IBM Switch SG24 4817 00 User Manual
SG24-4817-00  
IBM ATM Workgroup Solutions:  
Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
December 1996  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
SG24-4817-00  
International Technical Support Organization  
IBM  
IBM ATM Workgroup Solutions:  
Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
December 1996  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Take Note!  
Before using this information and the product it supports, be sure to read the general information in  
Appendix F, “Special Notices” on page 277.  
First Edition (December 1996)  
This edition applies to the ATM Workgroup Switch with microcode level 1.4.  
Comments may be addressed to:  
IBM Corporation, International Technical Support Organization  
Dept. HZ8 Building 678  
P.O. Box 12195  
Research Triangle Park, NC 27709-2195  
When you send information to IBM, you grant IBM a non-exclusive right to use or distribute the information in any  
way it believes appropriate without incurring any obligation to you.  
Copyright International Business Machines Corporation 1996. All rights reserved.  
Note to U.S. Government Users — Documentation related to restricted rights — Use, duplication or disclosure is  
subject to restrictions set forth in GSA ADP Schedule Contract with IBM Corp.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Contents  
Figures  
Tables  
Preface  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. vii  
.
ix  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
xi  
xi  
xii  
How This Redbook Is Organized  
The Team That Wrote This Redbook  
Comments Welcome  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
xiii  
Chapter 1. Introduction to ATM Networks  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1
1
1
2
2
3
1.1 ATM Fundamentals  
1.1.1 ATM Cells  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
1.1.2 ATM Connections  
1.1.3 ATM Addressing  
1.1.4 ATM Data Flows  
.
Chapter 2. Introduction to the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
9
9
2.1 8285 Components  
2.2 Base Unit  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 10  
. 10  
2.2.1 Internal Features  
2.2.2 8285 Front Panel  
.
.
.
.
11  
13  
13  
2.2.3 155 Mbps ATM I/O Card  
2.3 Expansion Unit (FC 5502)  
2.3.1 Internal Features  
2.3.2 Front Panel  
2.4 Installable Modules  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 14  
. 14  
. 16  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 3. Functional Overview of the IBM 8285  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
17  
17  
3.1 IBM 8285 Architecture Overview  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
3.2 Switching Fabric  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 22  
22  
. 25  
3.2.1 Switching in the IBM 8285  
.
3.2.2 Switching Scenarios  
3.3 Control Point Codes  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
28  
29  
30  
30  
31  
33  
33  
3.3.1 Control Point Levels  
3.3.2 Control Point V1.2  
3.3.3 Control Point V1.3  
3.3.4 Control Point V1.4  
.
.
.
.
.
.
3.4 ATM Backplane / Expansion Unit Connection  
3.5 LAN Emulation Server Functions  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 4. IBM 8285 ATM Modules  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
35  
35  
36  
4.1 Modules Currently Available for the 8285 ATM Subsystem  
4.2 Some Common Elements among the 8285 Modules  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4.2.1 Maximum Capacity  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 36  
4.2.2 Variable VPC/VCC Value Ranges  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
36  
38  
4.3 ATM 12-Port 25 Mbps UTP Concentrator Module  
4.3.1 Sample Scenarios  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 38  
4.4 ATM 2-Port 155 Mbps Flexible Media Module and ATM 3-Port 155 Mbps  
LAN Concentration Module  
4.4.1 Differences between the 2- and 3-Port ATM Modules  
4.4.2 ATM 155 Mbps Media Module Traffic Management  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
42  
43  
43  
Copyright IBM Corp. 1996  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
4.4.3 Sample Scenarios  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 43  
4.5 ATM 4-Port 100 Mbps MIC Fiber Module and the ATM 4-Port 100 Mbps  
SC Fiber Module  
4.5.1 Sample Scenarios  
4.6 Video Distribution Module  
4.6.1 MPEG Fundamentals  
4.6.2 Configuring the Video Distribution Module  
4.6.3 Sample Scenarios  
4.7 ATM 4-Port TR/Ethernet Bridge Module  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
46  
. 46  
48  
. 48  
52  
. 54  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
57  
58  
61  
62  
62  
66  
67  
67  
68  
4.7.2 Sample Configurations Using ATM TR/Ethernet Bridge Module  
4.7.3 ATM TR/Ethernet Bridge Module and LAN Emulation  
4.7.4 Association between IP and MAC Address  
4.7.5 ATM TR/Ethernet Bridge Module Configuration Utility Program  
4.7.6 Running and Stored Configuration Parameters  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4.8 ATM WAN Module  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
4.8.1 A02 WAN ATM Physical Interface Supported  
4.8.2 VPD Installation Considerations  
4.8.3 Sample Scenario  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 69  
71  
4.9 LAN Switching Modules  
.
4.9.1 Description  
4.9.2 Sample Scenarios  
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 71  
. 77  
Chapter 5. 8285 ATM Network Specifications  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
81  
5.1 ATM Connections  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 81  
5.1.1 Supported VPI and VCI Range  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
81  
82  
82  
83  
83  
85  
85  
86  
87  
88  
5.1.2 Supported Virtual Connection Types  
5.1.3 Maximum Number of Connections Supported  
5.1.4 How PVCs Are Supported  
5.1.5 How to Configure PVCs  
5.1.6 How PVPs Are Supported  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
5.1.7 How to Define PVPs  
.
.
.
5.1.8 How a VPI/VCI Is Allocated to SVCs  
5.1.9 How Point-to-Multipoint Connections Are Supported  
5.1.10 8285 LAN Emulation Specifications  
5.2 Traffic Management  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 89  
5.2.1 Service Classes Supported by the IBM 8285 ATM Workgroup  
.
90  
Chapter 6. IBM 8285 Planning and Installing  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
91  
6.1 Physical Planning  
6.1.1 Packaging  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 91  
. 91  
. 92  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
6.1.2 Physical Specifications  
6.1.3 ATM Ports and Cabling  
6.1.4 Planning for Availability  
.
95  
97  
.
6.2 Logical Planning  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 97  
. 97  
103  
105  
105  
105  
109  
110  
110  
111  
115  
6.2.1 Capacity Planning  
6.2.2 Standards Compliances  
.
.
.
6.3 Install  
6.3.1 Physical Installation  
6.3.2 8285 Console  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
6.3.3 ATM Concentration Module Basic Configuration Process Steps  
6.4 Microcode/Picocode Considerations  
6.4.1 Reasons for Upgrading Microcode  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
6.4.2 Acquiring the Latest Microcode  
.
.
.
6.4.3 Upgrading the Microcode  
.
.
.
.
iv ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Chapter 7. IBM 8285 Configuration  
7.1 Configuring Classical IP  
7.1.1 Classical IP Parameters  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
123  
123  
123  
123  
126  
128  
131  
131  
131  
135  
139  
.
.
.
.
.
7.1.2 Configuring a Simple CIP Network  
7.1.3 Troubleshooting Your CIP Network  
7.1.4 Configuring a Local Multi-Switch Network for CIP  
7.2 Configuring LAN Emulation  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
7.2.1 8285 LAN Emulation Functions Overview  
7.2.2 LAN Emulation Parameters  
7.2.3 Configuring a Simple LANE Network  
7.2.4 Troubleshooting Your LANE Network  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Chapter 8. IBM 8285 Management  
8.1 Management Information Bases (MIBs)  
8.2 IBM Nways Campus Manager ATM Overview  
8.3 IBM Nways Campus Manager ATM for AIX  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
145  
145  
148  
149  
149  
154  
156  
159  
167  
167  
170  
170  
.
.
.
8.3.1 Overview  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
8.3.2 Prerequisites  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
8.3.3 Using Nways Campus Manager ATM for AIX with IBM 8285  
8.3.4 IBM 8285 Node Related Information  
8.4 Nways Manager for Windows  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
8.4.1 Overview  
8.4.2 Prerequisites  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
8.4.3 Using Nways Manager for Windows with IBM 8285  
Appendix A. 8285 ATM Control Point Commands  
A.1 Command Line Interface  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
171  
171  
171  
173  
173  
174  
174  
176  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
A.1.1 How to Access the Command Line Interface  
A.1.2 Access Mode  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
A.1.3 How to Change Administrator and User Password  
A.1.4 Resetting the Password to Factory Default  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
A.1.5 How to Change Terminal Settings  
A.2 IBM 8285 ATM Command List  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Appendix B. Pinouts for Ports and Cables  
B.1 Pinouts for ATM25 and Other Common Network Connectors  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
179  
179  
179  
180  
180  
B.2 Other Cabling Considerations  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
B.2.1 Converter Cables  
B.2.2 Crossover Cables  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Appendix C. Part Numbers for Key Components  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
181  
183  
195  
277  
Appendix D. Hints and Tips for the ATM 4-Port TR/Ethernet Bridge Module  
Appendix E. IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Appendix F. Special Notices  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Appendix G. Related Publications  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
279  
279  
279  
279  
G.1 International Technical Support Organization Publications  
G.2 Redbooks on CD-ROMs  
G.3 Other Publications  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
How To Get ITSO Redbooks  
How IBM Employees Can Get ITSO Redbooks  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
281  
281  
Contents  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
How Customers Can Get ITSO Redbooks  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
282  
283  
IBM Redbook Order Form  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Glossary  
List of Abbreviations  
Index  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
285  
291  
295  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
vi ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Figures  
1. ATM Addressing Format Cell  
2. ATM UNI/NNI Format Data Cells  
3. ATM Call Establishment  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
2
3
4
6
.
.
.
.
4. ATM Classical IP using ARP Server  
5. Front Panel of the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch Base Unit . 11  
6. Front Panel of the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch Expansion  
Unit  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 14  
. 15  
. 16  
7. Inserting a Module in the Expansion Unit  
8. Attaching the Expansion Interface Cable  
9. Hardware Architecture of the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch  
Base Unit  
10. Hardware Architecture of the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 18  
Base and Expansion Unit  
11. Internal Cell Format of the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch  
12. ATM 12-Port 25 Mbps UTP Concentrator Module Workgroup  
13. 8285 Low-Cost Configuration Implementation  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
21  
24  
39  
40  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
14. 8285 with ATM 12-Port 25 Mbps UTP Concentrator Modules as an  
Access Switch  
15. ATM 2-Port 155 Mbps Flexible Media Module High-Performance  
Workgroup  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 41  
. 44  
. 45  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
16. ATM 3-Port 155 Mbps LAN Concentration Module with Redundant  
Backbone Links  
17. ATM 100 Mbps MIC/SC Fiber Module Workgroup Configuration  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
46  
18. ATM 100 Mbps MIC/SC Fiber Module with Redundant ATM Backbone  
Links  
19. Typical MEPG-2 Picture Sequence Showing Picture Types  
20. Video Distribution Module Workgroup Configuration  
21. Video Distribution Module for Campus Video Distribution  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 47  
.
.
.
51  
54  
55  
.
.
.
.
.
22. Video Distribution Module with ATM WAN for Enterprise Video  
Distribution  
23. Local LAN to ATM Server Bridging  
24. Local LAN Bridging and ATM Server Access  
25. Campus LAN Interconnect and ATM Server Access  
26. ATM TR/Ethernet Bridge Module Configuration Window  
27. The ATM TR/Ethernet Bridge Module Service Port Connection  
28. Windows Displayed by the ATM TR/Ethernet Bridge Module  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 56  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
59  
60  
61  
63  
64  
Configurator  
29. A Typical ATM WAN Module Configuration  
30. Relieving Token-Ring Congestion with LAN Switching Module  
31. Relieving Ethernet Congestion with LAN Switching Module  
32. Sample PVC Configuration  
33. Sample PVP Configuration  
34. LAN Information Frame Location  
35. Complex ATM Network Using ATM 8285  
36. Logon Screen of the IBM 8285 Console  
37. Sample Screen to Check the Physical Installation  
38. Simple CIP Network - Physical View  
39. Simple CIP Network - Logical View  
40. Multi-Switch CIP Network - Physical View  
41. Multi-Switch CIP Network - Logical View  
42. A Simple LANE Network - Physical View  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 65  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
70  
77  
79  
83  
86  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
89  
103  
107  
108  
124  
124  
128  
129  
136  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Copyright IBM Corp. 1996  
vii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
43. A Simple LANE Network - Logical View  
44. The Console Screen of a Simple LANE Network Configuration  
45. The Sample Console Screen to Check the Physical Connection  
46. The Sample Console Screen to Check the LANE Registration  
47. The Sample Console Screen to Check the LANE Registration  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
136  
138  
140  
141  
142  
157  
158  
159  
160  
161  
162  
163  
166  
166  
167  
173  
174  
174  
174  
175  
175  
175  
175  
176  
176  
176  
176  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
48. NetView for AIX Root Submap  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
49. ATM Campus Submap  
50. ATM Campus Submap  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
51. IBM 8285 ATM Node View - Star  
52. IBM 8285 Node Profile Panel  
.
.
53. IBM 8285 Node Configuration Panel  
54. IBM 8285 Device View  
55. IBM 8285 Node Call Logging Panel  
56. IBM 8285 Node LAN Emulation Panel  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
57. ELAN View  
58. Changing Administrator Password  
59. Changing User Password  
60. Changing the Terminal Baud Rate  
61. Changing the Terminal Data Bits  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
62. Changing the Terminal Parity  
.
.
63. Changing the Terminal Stop Bits  
64. Changing the Terminal Prompt  
.
65. Disabling the Terminal Auto Hangup  
66. Changing the Terminal Timeout  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
67. Saving the Terminal Settings  
68. Showing the Terminal Settings  
.
.
.
69. Output from Show Terminal Command  
viii ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Tables  
1. Control Point Levels Summary of the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup  
Switch  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 29  
2. ATM Buses Implemented in the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup  
Switch  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 33  
. 42  
. 52  
. 53  
. 67  
. 69  
. 75  
. 75  
3. ATM 155 Mbps Media Module Supported I/O Cards  
4. Video Distribution Module Comparison of MPEG-2 and Motion-JPEG  
5. VC Values by Port for VDM Module (VP=0)  
6. ATM Physical Interface Support  
7. A02 WAN I/O Card VPD Part Numbers  
8. A Comparison of 8285 Token-Ring LAN Switch Modules  
9. A Comparison of 8285 Ethernet LAN Switch Modules  
10. Bandwidth Improvement with Token-Ring LAN Switch Module  
11. Bandwidth Improvement with Ethernet LAN Switch Module  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
78  
79  
82  
89  
89  
90  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
12. Supported Connection Type by the A-CPSW Module  
13. LANE Information Field Lengths  
14. Types of Traffic  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
15. Traffic Management Functions Support  
16. Environmental Specifications of the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup  
Switch  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 92  
. 93  
17. Mechanical Specifications of the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup  
Switch  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
18. Power Supply Specifications of the 8285  
19. Power Supply Specifications of Future 8285 Models  
20. Power Budget of the 8285 Expansion Chassis  
21. Connection Capacity of IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch  
22. Transmit Delay (Latency per Port)  
23. Bandwidth Capacity of the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch  
24. LES/BUS Capacity of the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch  
.
.
.
.
.
.
93  
93  
94  
98  
98  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
99  
.
100  
25. TRS Capacity of the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch and IBM  
8260 Nways Multiprotocol Switching Hub  
26. References and Process Quick Guide  
27. Filenames for System Upgrade Microcode (Release 1.0-1.2)  
28. Filenames for System Upgrade Microcode (Release 1.3-1.4)  
29. Filenames for Module Upgrade Microcode (Release 1.4)  
30. Download Errors and Suggested Fixes  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
101  
109  
114  
114  
114  
119  
120  
124  
129  
130  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
31. Swap Errors and Suggested Fixes  
32. Necessary Parameters for 8285 #1  
33. Necessary Parameters for 8285 #2  
34. IX Status Messages and Causes  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
35. Address Assignment Rule for the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup  
Switch LAN Emulation Components  
36. Necessary Parameters for 8285#1  
37. 8285 Configurations SET Commands Quick Reference List  
38. IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch ATM Command List  
39. RJ-45 Pin Assignments by Network Type  
40. Pin Assignments for Converter Cable (P/N 10H3904)  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
132  
137  
172  
177  
179  
180  
180  
181  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
41. Pin Assignments for Switch-to-Switch Crossover Cable  
42. Spare Parts and Accessories  
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Copyright IBM Corp. 1996  
ix  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
x
ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Preface  
This redbook provides a detailed overview of the IBM 8285 Nways ATM  
Workgroup Switch, from both functional and operational viewpoints. It provides  
everything you need to know to plan, implement, debug, manage, and maintain  
an ATM network using the 8285 switch. It includes scripted and tested  
configuration scenarios to simplify and expedite the initial implementation, and  
debugging and tuning guidelines to optimize the ATM network. In addition, it  
covers the very latest modules and features of the 8285/8260 family of ATM  
switches, including the ATM WAN Module, and the Video Distribution Module.  
This book is intended for all networking personnel involved in planning,  
implementing, and/or maintaining an ATM network based on the IBM 8285  
Nways ATM Workgroup Switch. A working knowledge of ATM is helpful but not  
necessary.  
How This Redbook Is Organized  
This redbook contains 296 pages. It is organized as follows:  
•
Chapter 1, “Introduction to ATM Networks”  
This chapter provides an overview of ATM, LAN Emulation, and Classical IP  
networks. This information provides a basis for understanding many of the  
operational aspects of the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch.  
•
Chapter 2, “Introduction to the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch”  
This chapter provides an overview of the major features of the IBM 8285  
Base Unit and the IBM 8285 Expansion Chassis. This information will  
familiarize the reader with the overall layout and design of the 8285 switch  
•
Chapter 3, “Functional Overview of the IBM 8285”  
This chapter provides a detailed view of the functions of the 8285 switch and  
how it performs them. Included are details about the internal architecture,  
switching mechanisms (including an in-depth technical description of the  
switching process), control point codes, and the capabilities of the integrated  
Forum-Compliant LAN Emulation server.  
•
Chapter 4, “IBM 8285 ATM Modules”  
This chapter provides an overview of the many modules that can be installed  
with the 8285 switch. These modules provide performance and flexibility,  
and enable the 8285 switch to be used in a wide variety of network  
configurations.  
•
Chapter 5, “8285 ATM Network Specifications”  
This chapter provides an overview of the ATM capabilities specific to the  
8285 switch. The overview includes discussions of which ATM features are  
supported, what the maximum system capabilities are, and how these  
capabilities might be implemented.  
•
Chapter 6, “IBM 8285 Planning and Installing”  
Copyright IBM Corp. 1996  
xi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
This chapter provides an overview of the 8285 installation process. This  
includes physical and logical planning information, as well as details about  
the 8285 microcode and how to upgrade it.  
•
Chapter 7, “IBM 8285 Configuration”  
This chapter provides information on how to configure and troubleshoot a  
network of 8285 switches. Both Classical IP ATM networks and LAN  
Emulation ATM networks are discussed. Actual console samples are  
included, where appropriate, to facilitate understanding.  
•
•
Chapter 8, “IBM 8285 Management”  
This chapter provides a discussion of how to manage an 8285 network using  
either an ASCII console or an SNMP-based network management platform.  
Various operational aspects are discussed as well.  
Appendix A, “ 8285 ATM Control Point Commands”  
This appendix provides an overview of the 8285 console, its functions, and its  
supported commands.  
•
•
•
Appendix B, “Pinouts for Ports and Cables”  
This appendix provides pin-out diagrams for the ATM25 RJ-45 ports.  
Appendix C, “Part Numbers for Key Components”  
This appendix contains a list of components and part numbers.  
Appendix D, “Hints and Tips for the ATM 4-Port TR/Ethernet Bridge Module”  
This appendix contains information concerning the latest release of code for  
the ATM 4-Port TR/Ethernet Bridge Module.  
•
Appendix E, “ IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs”  
This appendix contains the latest version of the IBM campus ATM switch  
private MIB.  
The Team That Wrote This Redbook  
This redbook was produced by a team of specialists from around the world  
working for the Systems Management and Networking ITSO Center, Raleigh.  
This project was designed and managed by Georges Tardy, LAN Campus  
Specialist at the Systems Management and Networking ITSO Center, Raleigh,  
working in La Gaude, France. He joined IBM in 1965, and was previously a  
hardware development engineer of campus hub products at La Gaude  
Laboratory, France.  
The authors of this document are:  
Marc Fleuette is a Senior Networking Technical Specialist from the IBM North  
American Sales and Services organization. He has been with IBM for nine  
years, in both marketing and technical positions, including two years as  
Technical Internetworking Marketing Specialist. He currently provides pre-sales  
technical support for IBM′s family of campus internetworking products, including  
hubs, routers, and switches, for both ATM and traditional LANs. He has a B.S. in  
Industrial Engineering and a B.A. in History/English, both from Lehigh University  
in Bethlehem, PA, USA.  
xii ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Tadashi Murayama is an Advisory Networking I/T Specialist in IBM Japan. He  
has been with IBM Japan for 11 years in the Field Support Organization and has  
been in charge of the networking products, such as the CCU/NCP and the LAN  
products. He holds a degree in LL.B. from Gakusyuin University in Tokyo,  
Japan. His areas of expertise include traditional SNA networking, legacy LAN  
protocols (token-ring, Ethernet, FDDI), and campus ATM protocols and related  
products.  
Thanks to the following people for their invaluable contributions to this project:  
Aroldo Yuji Yai  
Systems Management and Networking ITSO Center, Raleigh.  
Ange Aznar  
IBM La Gaude  
Our grateful acknowledgement for their contribution to this work by the following  
IBM La Gaude Product Engineering people:  
Benoit Panier  
Michel Leblais  
Pierre-Olivier Martin  
Olivier Caillau  
Bernard Putois  
Jacques Baroghel  
Eric Montagnon  
Comments Welcome  
We want our redbooks to be as helpful as possible. Should you have any  
comments about this or other redbooks, please send us a note at the following  
address:  
[email protected]  
Your comments are important to us!  
Preface xiii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
xiv ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Chapter 1. Introduction to ATM Networks  
This book is designed to help you to get the most effective use of the IBM 8285  
Nways ATM Workgroup Switch as you implement an ATM network. Before going  
into further details about the 8285, however, it might be useful to review the  
basics of ATM networking, addressing, and data flows.  
1.1 ATM Fundamentals  
Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) is a high-performance network technology  
that is rapidly becoming the standard for high-speed LAN and WAN networks,  
both public and private. It combines the flexibility and resiliency of  
connection-less protocols, such as TCP/IP, with the efficiency and manageability  
of session-oriented protocols, such as SNA. This is because ATM uses small,  
fixed-size packets called cells which are transported across the network  
hop-by-hop along a pre-determined virtual path that can be quickly changed to  
avoid congestion or failures. Both of these concepts are discussed below.  
1.1.1 ATM Cells  
ATM uses the concept of cells as its basic delivery vehicle. These cells are  
similar to the packets (or frames) used in traditional networks, except for two  
distinguishing features:  
1. Fixed Cell Size  
All ATM cells are 53-bytes long, of which 48 bytes are payload, and 5 bytes  
are header information. This payload-size provides the best combination of  
efficiency (favoring large payloads for data) and latency (favoring small  
payloads for time-sensitive applications such as voice and video).  
The header contains all the information necessary for the cell to enter the  
network, to be carried to its next (intermediate) destination, and to identify  
simple errors (single-bit) that might occur.  
The most important thing about the fixed cell size, however, is that it enables  
cells to be switched simply and efficiently, in hardware, without costly (in  
time and money) large buffers.  
2. Minimal Routing Information  
ATM cells are connection-oriented, which means that they are not  
responsible for identifying a destination or determining the best route. In  
fact, the only routing information necessary is the current hop information  
(which the next switch uses in its forwarding decision). And, since all cells  
for a given session follow the same path, no provision is necessary for  
out-of-sequence arrival. Thus, unlike traditional LAN packets, sequencing  
numbers are not required, and addressing at the MAC and network layers is  
eliminated (for native ATM applications). The result is more data, less  
overhead, and simpler hardware-based switching  
Copyright IBM Corp. 1996  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
1.1.2 ATM Connections  
ATM, being session-oriented, requires that a path through the network be  
determined and maintained for the duration of the session. This path is  
comprised of virtual channel links (switch-to-switch connections), which are  
linked together to form a virtual channel connection (VCC) (end-to-end  
connection), which are aggregated into virtual paths (VP). Just like a virtual  
channel (VC), a virtual path can be a virtual path link (switch-to-switch  
connection) or a virtual path connection (VPC) (end-to-end connection). More  
importantly, a virtual path can be switched to a new route (to avoid congestion  
or a failure) without affecting or individually processing the VCs it contains.  
Connections through the network can be either fixed and pre-determined, or can  
be defined dynamically through a signalling protocol. A pre-determined path,  
defined by the network operator, is called a permanent virtual connection (PVC),  
while a dynamically determined temporary path is called a switched virtual  
connection (SVC). In either case, a connection will be implemented only if there  
is adequate capacity in the network to meet the requisite end-to-end bandwidth  
and Quality of Service (QoS) parameters, or if an existing connection can be  
preempted to make it possible to meet bandwidth and QoS requirements.  
1.1.3 ATM Addressing  
Figure 1. ATM Addressing Format Cell  
An ATM address consists of two parts: a 13-byte network prefix and a 7-byte  
terminal identifier (consisting of a 6-byte end station identifier (ESI), and a 1-byte  
selector field). Further information on specific requirements for ATM addressing  
can be found in IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch: Installation and User′s  
Guide and in ISO-8348 (CCITT X.213). Of specific relevance to us, are the  
following addressing restrictions:  
2
ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
1. The network prefix must be unique and consistent within a given ATM  
network. It is defined at each switch in the network and consists of an  
11-byte network address and a 2-byte area identifier, which is further divided  
in to a 1-byte ATM Cluster Number(ACN), and a 1-byte Hub Number (HN).  
This results in a hierarchical network topology of:  
a. An ATM network comprised of  
b. ATM sub-networks (or clusters) comprised of  
c. ATM hubs  
In any given ATM network, all switches will have an ATM address with the  
same first 11 bytes. In any given ATM cluster, all switches will have an  
address with the same first 12 bytes, and every switch will have a unique  
13-byte network prefix.  
This hierarchical organization allows for very efficient topology calculation  
and distribution, since updates can be localized to a given cluster, or, where  
appropriate, to devices connected to an adjacent cluster or network.  
2. The network prefix must begin with either 39 (corresponding to IEEE 802  
(LAN) Format), 45 (corresponding to ITU-T (E.164) Format), or 47  
(corresponding to OSI Format). Generally speaking, it doesn′t matter which  
format you choose, however, specific bytes have specific significance in each  
format, and, consequently, care should be taken in choosing a format,  
especially if your ATM network will be connected to other ATM networks.  
1.1.4 ATM Data Flows  
Figure 2. ATM UNI/NNI Format Data Cells  
Chapter 1. Introduction to ATM Networks  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Because ATM allows for dynamic registration of resources, signalling processes  
have been established to provide for initial registration, connection setup, and  
connection teardown, whether the connection is native ATM, ATM  
Forum-Compliant LAN Emulation, or Classical IP (CIP).  
1.1.4.1 Basic ATM Signalling  
Figure 3. ATM Call Establishment  
For an endstation to communicate in a switched environment such as ATM, it  
must register with the network, request a connection when necessary, and clear  
the connection when through. For native ATM endstations, this is done by the  
following:  
Initial Registration: When an endstation wishes to enter the network, it must  
first register its full ATM address with its associated switch. This signalling  
process is described in ATM UNI Specification 3.0 (based on ITU-T Q.93B  
recommendations), or more recently, in ATM UNI Specification 3.1 (based on  
ITU-T Q.2931 recommendations) and is performed when the endstation is  
activated. During this process, the workstation receives its 13-byte network  
prefix from the switch, appends its own local address (ESI plus selector), and  
registers its complete ATM address with the switch.  
Connection Setup: When an endstation wishes to communicate with another  
endstation, it must first establish a connection to it. It does this by issuing a  
SETUP request to the ATM network.  
If the requested address is local, the switch acknowledges the request by issuing  
a CALL PROCEEDING response to the requesting endstation and forwarding the  
SETUP request to the requested endstation, which acknowledges receipt with a  
CALL PROCEEDING response.  
4
ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
If the requested endstation is not local, the switch will forward the request to the  
correct switch based on routing information compiled and maintained by the  
8285 ATM Control Point′s Topology and Routing Services (TRS) subsystem. The  
path will be selected based on the widest path (not the shortest) available  
between the end-points. This path information is appended to the setup request  
and is used by intermediate switches to determine the next hop through the  
network. There can be no more than 15 hops in any given path.  
If the requested workstation is able to accept the incoming connection, it issues  
a CONNECT response to the network, which forwards it back to the requesting  
workstation, where it is acknowledged by issuing a CONNECT ACK response to  
the network which forwards it to the destination endstation to complete the call  
set-up process.  
Connection Tear-Down: When an endstation wishes to end a connection, it  
issues a DISCONNECT request to the network. The network acknowledges the  
request by returning a RELEASE response (instructing the requesting endstation  
to drop all resources associated with the call), and by forwarding the  
DISCONNECT on to the destination workstation, which acknowledges the request  
by returning a RELEASE command to the network. The process is completed  
when the requesting endstation returns a RELEASE COMPLETE to the network,  
which forwards it to the destination endstation, indicating that the call has been  
dropped and the associated resources freed up.  
1.1.4.2 ATM Forum-Compliant LAN Emulation (LANE)  
LAN emulation simplifies a migration from a traditional LAN environment to an  
ATM switched environment by superimposing LAN interfaces on top of the  
underlying ATM transport and by supporting traditional LAN addressing (at the  
media access control (MAC) layer) as well as broadcast and multicast  
capabilities. This means that LAN-based applications run unchanged, yet now  
have access to to the network and to network-attached resources at scalable  
speeds from 25 Mbps to 155 Mbps and beyond.  
The signalling process used by LANE is analogous to that for basic ATM  
signalling, except that instead of a control point providing directory services,  
there is now a LAN Emulation Server (LES) which provides directory services at  
the MAC layer (which provides MAC address to ATM address mapping) for LAN  
Emulation Clients (LECs). The 8285 ATM Control Point has two LES entities,  
which together can handle 128 clients, distributed between two Ethernet or  
token-ring ELANs. Either of the 8285 ATM Control Point′s two LECs can use  
these internal LESs or can be configured to use an external LES, such as the  
IBM Multiprotocol Switched Services Server, providing for greater flexibility, for  
larger ELANs, and for inter-ELAN routing and bridging.  
Emulating a traditional LAN environment requires the ability to allow for  
broadcast traffic (common in a connectionless environment), while handling it in  
a fashion optimized for a connection-oriented environment. This function is  
addressed by the Broadcast/Unknown address Server (BUS), which attempts,  
with the LES, to convert MAC broadcast traffic to a specific ATM destination  
address. The 8285 ATM Control Point integrates this BUS function with the  
internal LES function. Either of the 8285 ATM Control Point′s two LE clients can  
also be configured to use an external BUS, such as the IBM Multiprotocol  
Switched Services Server, providing for very sophisticated broadcast  
management, especially in IP and IPX environments.  
Chapter 1. Introduction to ATM Networks  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
To avoid having to configure the LES′s address at each endstation, LANE  
provides for a Lan Emulation Configuration Server (LECS), which LECs can query  
for their proper LES address. This enables backup LESs to be configured, since  
should the primary LES fail, the LECS merely has to direct connections to a  
backup LES without having to change any configuration in the workstation.  
Although the 8285 ATM Control Point does not contain an LECS, either or both of  
the internal LECs can be configured to use an external LECS, such as that  
provided by the IBM Multiprotocol Switched Services Server.  
This section was intended only as an overview of LANE. For a more detailed  
description of these functions, please see IBM 8260 As a Campus ATM Switch,  
SG24-5003 and ATM Campus Introduction, Planning, and Troubleshooting  
Overview, GA27-4089.  
1.1.4.3 Classical IP (CIP)  
Figure 4. ATM Classical IP using ARP Server  
Classical IP (RFC 1577) is a protocol-specific VLAN (PVLAN) technology that has  
been widely adopted in the Internet working community. It provides for layer 3  
routing of IP datagrams over an ATM network. In many ways, it is analogous to  
LANE. For instance, all endstations must register with an address resolution  
server (called a LES in LANE, but an Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) Server  
in CIP). Once the endstation is registered with the address resolution server, it  
is, by definition, part of a virtual broadcast domain (an ELAN in LANE  
terminology, but a VLAN in CIP, known as a Logical IP Subnet (LIS)). The 8285  
ATM Control Point has a single CIP client entity.  
Here are the CIP data flows:  
6
ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
CIP Address Registration: Because in CIP there is no function analogous to the  
LECS in LANE, each endstation must be configured with the ATM address of its  
ARP server. The ARP client establishes a connection to the ARP server, and  
notifies it of its IP address and its ATM address. The ARP server adds these to  
its ARP table, so that it can respond properly to other ARP requests.  
CIP Address Resolution: When a CIP client wishes to establish IP  
communication with another IP device, it issues an ARP to the ARP server to  
determine the ATM address of the other device. If the ARP server has an entry  
that matches the IP address of the requested device, it returns the ATM address  
of that device to the requesting endstation, which caches it in its own ARP table.  
If however, the ARP server doesn′t have the IP address in its ARP table, it  
returns an ARP_FAILURE to the requesting client. The client now forwards the  
unresolvable address to its default gateway for further handling. If the gateway  
can resolve the address, it returns its IP and ATM addresses to the client to be  
cached. If the gateway cannot resolve the address, it returns an ARP_FAILURE  
to the client and the address resolution process terminates.  
CIP Data Forwarding: When a device wishes to forward data to another CIP  
device, it must first check to see if it knows the other device′s ATM address (that  
is, its ARP table contains an entry for the desired destination device). If so, it  
merely establishes a direct connection with the other device, and forwards data  
to it. If not, it must first resolve the address (see “CIP Address Resolution”  
above), then setup a connection, and then forward data directly.  
A more complete discussion of Classical IP can be found in IBM 8260 As a  
Campus ATM Switch, SG24-5003 and ATM Campus Introduction, Planning, and  
Troubleshooting Overview, GA27-4089.  
Chapter 1. Introduction to ATM Networks  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
8
ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Chapter 2. Introduction to the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup  
Switch  
The IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch (hereafter called the 8285 switch) is  
an ATM switch for the workgroup environment that provides a low-cost ATM  
solution as either a stand-alone switch or as an access node to the rest of the  
enterprise. Using your existing wiring it provides up to 25 Mbps of bandwidth to  
users. The 8285 switch can connect users to any ATM network at speeds up to  
155 Mbps, and even has forum-compliant LAN emulation built-in to make  
implementation easier.  
In addition, the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch is expandable, using the  
optional 8285 expansion chassis which enables it to take advantage of most of  
the many ATM modules available for the IBM 8260 Nways Multiprotocol  
Switching Hub. This provides you with ability to:  
•
Create even larger workgroups  
•
Service more high-speed devices (such as servers)  
•
Provide more bandwidth in to your ATM backbone network  
•
Connect existing token-ring or Ethernet users directly to the ATM backbone  
•
Connect to remote sites using public ATM services at speeds from 34 Mbps  
up to 155 Mbps  
•
Distribute video information across your ATM network and make it  
accessible using standard TV monitors  
The following sections provide an overview of the 8285 switch.  
2.1 8285 Components  
The 8285 switch is comprised of the following components:  
•
Standard:  
−
Base Unit:  
-
-
12 ATM 25.6 Mbps ports  
I/O slot for optional uplink (see below)  
•
Optional:  
−
155 Mbps ATM I/O Card which can be installed in the IBM 8285 Base  
Unit:  
-
-
Multi-mode Fiber (MMF)  
Single-mode Fiber (SMF)  
−
−
Expansion Unit  
Installable 8285/8260 ATM Modules  
Copyright IBM Corp. 1996  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Note  
Although there are two models of the 8285 switch, the 8285-00B and the  
8285-00P, they are identical except that the latter includes 12 workstation  
adapters, providing a total solution at a special bundled price.  
2.2 Base Unit  
The base unit is comprised of the following:  
•
Internal Features:  
−
−
An ATM cell switching function  
A switch control function, called the 8285 ATM Control Point  
•
Front Panel Features:  
−
Ports:  
-
12 ATM ports that support ATM 25.6 Mbps operation over standard  
copper wiring  
-
A slot for an optional high-speed uplink to provide 155 Mbps access  
to either a server or to an ATM backbone  
−
−
LEDs:  
-
-
System Status  
Port Status  
Connectors:  
-
-
A connector to connect the optional expansion unit  
A connector to connect a standard ASCII console  
2.2.1 Internal Features  
The IBM 8285 Base Unit contains a planar which controls the 8285 switch and its  
external interfaces.  
2.2.1.1 ATM Cell Switching in the IBM 8285 Base Unit  
The ATM switching mechanism installed in the base only switches ATM cells  
between ports in the base unit. This is accomplished by basically taking what  
would normally be the backplane output and connecting it directly to what would  
normally be the backplane input.  
When an IBM 8285 Expansion Chassis is connected to the IBM 8285 Base Unit,  
however, this connection is disabled, and the traffic from the IBM 8285 Base Unit  
uses the switch-on-a-chip that is incorporated in the IBM 8285 Expansion  
Chassis.  
2.2.1.2 8285 ATM Control Point  
The 8285 ATM Control Point is integrated in the base unit and provides the  
following functions:  
•
Manages the functions of the IBM 8285 Base Unit as well as the optional  
8285 Expansion Chassis and its inserted modules.  
10 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
•
Controls the ATM cell switching between appropriate ports and performs the  
functions associated with the establishment and management of ATM  
circuits.  
•
•
Provides a management interface (via an SNMP manager or an  
ASCII/TELNET terminal) for monitoring, configuration, and microcode  
distribution.  
Provides an Forum-Compliant LAN Emulation implementation which  
supports:  
−
Integrated LAN Emulation Server (LES)/Broadcast and Unknown Server  
(BUS)  
There are two instances of the LES/BUS in the 8285 ATM Control Point,  
allowing up to two Emulated LANs (ELANs), either token-ring or Ethernet,  
to be configure.  
−
−
Integrated LAN Emulation Client (LEC)  
There are two instances of the LEC configurable in the 8285 ATM Control  
Point, allowing the 8285 ATM Control Point to be accessible from up to  
two ELANs, either token-ring or Ethernet.  
LAN Emulation Configuration Server (LECS)  
Although the LECS function is not integrated in to the 8285 ATM Control  
Point, support is provided for using an external LECS by using its  
well-known address, or by getting its ATM address through the ILMI  
protocol.  
2.2.2 8285 Front Panel  
Figure 5 shows the front panel of the IBM 8285 base unit.  
Figure 5. Front Panel of the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch Base Unit  
As found in the Figure 5, there are ports, LEDs, connectors and a button that the  
user can access from the front panel.  
Chapter 2. Introduction to the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch 11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
2.2.2.1 Ports  
The IBM 8285 Base Unit has the following ATM ports:  
•
12 ATM25 Ports  
−
Fully compliant with the ATM Forum Physical Interface Specification for  
25.6 Mbps over Twisted Pair Cable  
−
−
Use standard RJ-45 connectors  
Support standard twisted pair cabling, either shielded or unshielded  
•
1 ATM155 Port (Optional):  
This port is further described in 2.2.3, “155 Mbps ATM I/O Card” on page 13.  
2.2.2.2 LEDs  
The front panel has LEDs for two purposes:  
1. Port LEDs:  
•
Port Enable  
•
Output Activity  
2. Switch Status LEDs:  
•
Power  
•
OK  
•
Fault  
2.2.2.3 Connectors  
The front panel has four connectors:  
•
Power Input  
The power input connector matches the country-specific power cord that is  
shipped with the base unit. The power supply itself is an auto-sensing  
universal power supply.  
•
Console Port  
The console port is a standard RS-232 25-pin D-shell male interface for  
connecting either an ASCII console or a modem in order to perform the  
initial configuration.  
•
Expansion Connector  
The expansion connector is a 68-pin female connector used to attach the IBM  
8285 Expansion Chassis using an expansion interface cable shipped with the  
IBM 8285 Expansion Chassis shipping group.  
•
Advanced Diagnostics Connector  
The advanced diagnostics connector is a 9-pin connector used only by  
authorized service personnel for advanced diagnostics. This connector is  
not needed in any case to install and configure the 8285 switch.  
12 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
2.2.2.4 Reset Button  
The reset button resets both the IBM 8285 Base Unit and the optional IBM 8285  
Expansion Chassis with its inserted modules.  
For more information about the LEDs, the connectors, and the reset button, refer  
to the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch: Installation and User′s Guide,  
SA33-0381.  
2.2.3 155 Mbps ATM I/O Card  
The 155 Mbps ATM I/O Card is an optional card installable in the 155 Mbps  
Feature I/O Card Slot of the base unit. There are two types of 155 Mbps ATM I/O  
Cards available, Multimode Fiber (FC 5500) and Single-Mode Fiber (FC 5501). It  
becomes the 13th port of base unit and can be linked to an ATM station or to  
another ATM switch that supports ATM 155, such as another 8285 switch or an  
8260 hub.  
2.2.3.1 Connectors  
Both I/O cards have SC connectors.  
2.2.3.2 LEDs  
The 155 Mbps ATM I/O Card has the following LEDs:  
•
Status  
•
Output Activity  
•
Error  
2.3 Expansion Unit (FC 5502)  
The 8285 Expansion Chassis provides three slots to receive IBM 8260/8285 ATM  
modules, extending the 8285 switch′s functions and capacities.  
The IBM 8285 Expansion Chassis consists of the following:  
•
Internal Features:  
−
−
An ATM backplane that is similar to the one used in the 8260 hub.  
A planar containing a switch-on-a-chip, which connects the base unit  
ATM ports to each other and to other ATM modules in the IBM 8285  
Expansion Chassis.  
•
External Features:  
−
−
−
−
Slots  
Connectors  
LEDs  
A rack-mountable chassis with an integrated, auto-sensing universal  
power supply  
Chapter 2. Introduction to the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch 13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
2.3.1 Internal Features  
The IBM 8285 Expansion Chassis has two primary internal features.  
2.3.1.1 ATM Backplane  
The IBM 8285 Expansion Chassis contains an ATM backplane that is effectively a  
three-slot version of the 8260 hub′s ATM backplane. That is to say, it is a  
completely passive backplane with female connectors. It is capable of  
supporting most 8260 hub ATM modules.  
Note  
However, there are some differences between the ATM backplanes of the  
IBM 8285 and IBM 8260. Specifically, the IBM 8260 ATM Control Point and  
Switch Module cannot be used in the IBM 8285 Expansion Chassis. For more  
information, refer to Chapter 3, “Functional Overview of the IBM 8285” on  
page 17.  
2.3.1.2 ATM Planar  
The IBM 8285 Expansion Chassis contains a planar which has a switch-on-a-chip  
switching module. When connected to the IBM 8285 Base Unit with the  
expansion interface cable, the switch-on-a-chip performs all the port-to-port cell  
switching:  
•
Between ports in the IBM 8285 Base Unit  
•
Between ports in the IBM 8285 Base Unit and ATM modules in the IBM 8285  
Expansion Chassis  
•
Between ports on ATM modules in the IBM 8285 Expansion Chassis  
2.3.2 Front Panel  
Figure 6 shows the front panel of the IBM 8285 expansion unit.  
Figure 6. Front Panel of the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch Expansion Unit  
14 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
As shown in the Figure 6, there are slots, LEDs, and connectors that the user  
can access from the front panel.  
2.3.2.1 Slots  
The expansion unit has three slots that can support most of the IBM 8260 ATM  
modules. The modules that are supported in the IBM 8285 Expansion Chassis  
are listed in Chapter 4.  
Figure 7 shows how the modules are inserted in the IBM 8285 Expansion  
Chassis.  
Figure 7. Inserting a Module in the Expansion Unit  
2.3.2.2 LEDs  
The expansion unit has the following switch status LEDs:  
•
Power  
•
OK  
•
Fault  
2.3.2.3 Connectors  
The expansion unit front panel has two connectors:  
•
Power Input  
•
Base Connector  
The base unit connector is a 68-pin female connector just like expansion unit  
connector of the base unit. It is connected to the IBM 8285 Base Unit by the  
expansion interface cable which is shipped with the expansion unit.  
Chapter 2. Introduction to the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch 15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Figure 8. Attaching the Expansion Interface Cable  
For more information about the LEDs and the connectors, refer to the IBM 8285  
Nways ATM Workgroup Switch: Installation and User′s Guide, SA33-0381.  
2.4 Installable Modules  
All ATM modules designed for the IBM 8260 Nways Multiprotocol Switching Hub  
can be used in the IBM 8285 Expansion Chassis. Refer to 4.1, “Modules  
Currently Available for the 8285 ATM Subsystem” on page 35 for the list of  
modules that are officially supported with the 8285 switch.  
16 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Chapter 3. Functional Overview of the IBM 8285  
This chapter contains the following sections describing the functional overview of  
the IBM 8285:  
•
IBM 8285 Architecture Overview  
•
•
•
•
Switching Fabric  
Control Point Codes  
ATM Backplane / Expansion Unit Connection  
LAN Emulation Server Functions  
3.1 IBM 8285 Architecture Overview  
This section discusses the architecture of the IBM 8285.  
Figure 9 on page 18 shows the hardware architecture of the IBM 8285 Base Unit.  
Copyright IBM Corp. 1996  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Figure 9. Hardware Architecture of the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch Base Unit  
As shown above, the IBM 8285 Base Unit contains the following functional  
components:  
18 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
•
Management and Control Components:  
Control Point components:  
−
-
Processing Components  
•
Flash memory, to store the microcode  
•
8M byte DRAM, for operational code and tables  
•
Motorola M68040 processor, to execute the microcode  
-
Management Components:  
•
M360 processor, to handle the console interface (the same as the  
IBM 8260)  
•
Data Handling Components:  
−
−
CAP/CAD components to process cells, both inbound and outbound  
Specific Front End (SFE) components to handle the physical interfaces,  
inbound and outbound, for all ATM ports, including:  
-
-
ATM 25 Mbps ports  
ATM 155 Mbps port. While this SFE is physically located on the  
optional 155 Mbps ATM I/O Card, it can be treated as functionally  
part of the base unit.  
-
ATM control-point port.  
3.1.1.1 8285 ATM Control Point  
The 8285 ATM Control Point has a processor and flash memory. The flash  
memory holds the boot strap code and also the operational code. The control  
point performs the following functions:  
•
Signalling entities  
•
Resource management  
•
Address mapping  
•
Topology and route selection  
•
Node management and inband or out-of-band console interface  
•
Integrated LES/BUS  
The control point manages the rest of the ATM subsystem by sending control  
cells via an internal port connected to the 25 Mbps HS.SFE.  
3.1.1.2 CAP, CAD and SFE  
The CAP, CAD and SFE are internal components implemented on the IBM 8285  
Base Unit, as well as in each of the ATM modules. Their functions are as  
follows:  
•
CAP/CAD Components:  
−
CAP (Common ATM Processor)  
The CAP handles the cell routing, queuing, scheduling, and traffic  
management. It determines what the routing header for the internal cell  
should be and gives the information to the CAD to build the cell.  
−
CAD (Common ATM Datamover)  
Chapter 3. Functional Overview of the IBM 8285 19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
The CAD function prepares the cell for transmission to the switch. The  
CAD builds the internal cell in its RAM according to instructions given by  
the CAP.  
As described in 3.1, “IBM 8285 Architecture Overview” on page 17, the IBM  
8285 base unit is treated as a single module and all ports in the base unit  
share two sets of CAP/CAD, one set to handle the inbound cells, called  
CAP_up and CAD_up, and the other set to handle the outbound cells, called  
CAP_down and CAD_down.  
•
SFE (Specific Front End)  
The SFE handles the ATM front-end concentration and dispatch. Its main  
role is to deliver the cell from any ATM interface to the CAD.  
There are three sets of SFE components in the base unit: an  
inbound/outbound pair for the ATM25 ports, called HS.SFE_up/HS.SFE_down,  
an inbound/outbound pair for the ATM155 port, called SFE_up/SFE_down, and  
a single, bidirectional SFE used by the control point, called the CP SFE.  
In addition, each ATM module also uses CAP, CAD, and SFE components, but in  
two sets: an inbound set (CAP_Up, CAD_Up, and SFE_Up), and an outbound set  
(CAP_Down, CAD_Down, and SFE_Down). Note that this slightly different from  
the 8285 switch which has the additional CP SFE, and which connects CAD_up  
directly to CAD_down when operating without an expansion unit.  
Figure 10 on page 21 shows the hardware architecture of the IBM 8285 Base  
Unit when connected to the IBM 8285 Expansion Chassis.  
20 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Figure 10. Hardware Architecture of the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch Base  
and Expansion Unit  
When the IBM 8285 expansion unit is installed, its switch chip, called a  
switch-on-a-chip, becomes the primary cell switch for the 8285 system. The  
CAD_up and CAD_down devices in the base unit and in any ATM modules link  
directly to this switch. Another way of saying this is that the link between the  
base unit′s CAD_up and CAD_down is disabled, and all cells (even port-to-port)  
within the base unit or within an individual ATM module, are switched through  
the switch-on-a-chip.  
Chapter 3. Functional Overview of the IBM 8285 21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Additional Information  
The switch-on-a-chip is a scalable, non-blocking, shared buffer switching  
module that was developed at the IBM Research Laboratory in Zurich,  
Switzerland. This is the same switch that is used in other IBM ATM switches,  
such as the IBM 8260 Nways Multiprotocol Switching Hub and the IBM Nways  
2220 Broadband Network Switch.  
The architecture of the expansion unit is similar to that of the IBM 8260:  
•
Each module contains CAP/CAD components to interface to the ATM  
backplane.  
•
The ATM backplane is fully passive and uses female connectors to improve  
availability.  
•
The ATM backplane is point-to-point wired to connect each module directly  
to the switch-on-a-chip.  
Note  
This means that the IBM 8260 ATM CPSW Module is not supported in the  
IBM 8285 Expansion Chassis, which also means that any  
CPSW-exclusives, such as switch redundancy, are not supported.  
However, the architecture is different in several key ways:  
•
The control point is in a separate module (the base unit) from the switch.  
•
The control point shares a set of CAP/CAD components with the ATM ports.  
3.2 Switching Fabric  
As described above, there are two switching mechanisms used in the IBM 8285,  
depending on whether the base unit is operating with or without an expansion  
unit. The following sections describe in detail the switching mechanism in each  
case.  
3.2.1 Switching in the IBM 8285  
This section describes the switching mechanism in the IBM 8285.  
Before going into further details about the switching function of the 8285 switch,  
it is necessary to understand the internal frame format it uses. This format is  
described below.  
3.2.1.1 Internal Cell Format  
The 8285 switch uses the same internal frame format, a 64-byte extension of the  
standard 53-byte ATM cell, as the 8260 hub. This cell is constructed by the  
following process:  
•
The ATM cell received from a port by the SFE.  
•
The SFE calculates a header error check value and compares it to the HEC  
that arrived in the cell′s header.  
•
If no error is detected (the calculated and transmitted HEC values match),  
the SFE strips the HEC from the cell′s header and sends the resulting 52-byte  
ATM cell to the CAP/CAD.  
22 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
•
The CAP/CAD adds a 2-byte internal header (called a routing header (RH)),  
and 1-byte trailer.  
The RH contains the information necessary to route the internal cell.  
Basically, the switching information is contained in the Source Blade (SB)  
and Target Blade (TB) fields, which correspond to ports on the  
switch-on-a-chip, and which the switch uses in order forward the cell to the  
correct blade(s). The switch itself does not use destination port or VPC/VCC  
number when switching the cell. However, at the module level, the  
CAP/CAD would forward the cell to the appropriate port(s) based on the  
target port (TP) contained in the format field of the RH.  
Note: In this context, blade refers to the set of components that share a  
common CAP/CAD. This is normally a module, such as an ATM  
media module or the ATM Control Point and Switch module of the  
IBM 8260. However, by this definition, the IBM 8285 Base Unit can be  
considered a blade or module as well, since its ports share a  
common CAP/CAD.  
Figure 11 on page 24 shows the internal cell format used in the IBM 8285. Note  
the internal cell format will be changed in future releases but the concept should  
remain similar and able to be referenced.  
Chapter 3. Functional Overview of the IBM 8285 23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3  
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1  
┌────────────────┬───────────────┬───────┬───────┬────────────────┐  
│
TB  
├────────┬───────┴───────────────┼───────┴───────┼────────────────┤ │ RH (8 byte)  
NBA F1 F2 │ ─┘  
├────────┼───────────────┬───────┴───────────────┴───────┬─────┬──┤  
│ GFC │ VPI VCI │ PT │CL│ ── ATM Header  
├────────┴───────────────┴───────────────────────────────┴─────┴──┤ (4 byte: without HEC)  
│
TBE  
│LCBAul │ SB │  
LCBAuh  
│ ─┐  
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
│
ATM payload (48 byte)  
├─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┤  
Future Use  
└─────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────────┘  
│
│
TB:  
TBE:  
Target Blade  
Target Blade Extension  
LCBAul: Leaf Control Block Address up(inbound) lower port  
LCBAuh: Leaf Control Block Address up(inbound) higher port  
NBA:  
F1:  
F2:  
Next Buffer Address  
Format Field 1st  
Format Field 2nd  
GFC:  
VPI:  
VCI:  
PT:  
Generic Flow Control  
Virtual Path Identifier  
Virtual Channel Identifier  
Payload Type  
Cell Loss Priority  
Header Error Control  
CL:  
HEC:  
Figure 11. Internal Cell Format of the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch  
3.2.1.2 Switching without the Switch Chip  
When no expansion chassis is connected, the IBM 8285 Base Unit implements a  
direct connection between CAD_up and CAD_down. This means that inbound  
cells would undergo the following process:  
1. The SFE_up strips the HEC from valid cells and forwards the cell to the  
CAD_up.  
2. The CAD_up prepares the internal cell and forwards it directly to the  
CAD_down.  
3. The CAD_down uses the RH information to determine which ports to forward  
the cell to, strips the internal header, and forwards the 52-byte cell to the  
SFE_down.  
24 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
4. The SFE_down performs the appropriate label-swapping, calculates a new  
HEC, and forwards the 53-byte cell across the physical interface.  
Blade number 0 is assigned to the blade for the base unit.  
Note  
The blade number is used for the internal switching and is different from  
physical slot number.  
3.2.1.3 Switching the Switch Chip  
When the IBM 8285 Expansion Chassis, with its switch-on-a-chip, is connected,  
the connection between the base unit′s CAD_up and CAD_down is disabled, and  
all traffic flows through the switch-on-a-chip. This means that Step 2 above  
becomes the following:  
•
2A. The CAD_up prepares the internal cell and forwards it across the  
expansion interface cable to the switch-on-a-chip.  
•
2B. The switch-on-a-chip decides which blade(s) to forward the cell to and  
forwards it to the CAD_down of the target blade(s) for further handling.  
3.2.2 Switching Scenarios  
The following describes the process of how cells are switched from one port to  
another port in the IBM 8285. To understand this process it is best to follow a  
cell as it enters one port and exits another and to see what actually happens as  
it goes through the various components. Please refer to 3.2.1.1, “Internal Cell  
Format” on page 22, as the following discussion assumes that you are already  
familiar with the internal cell format.  
•
Point-to-Point Routing  
The following describes what happens to a cell in a point-to-point connection:  
1. Receive the cell.  
a. CAD_Up prepares in advance, for every port, the address of the next  
cell assembly buffer. This is the location where the internal cell will  
be built in CAD_Store.  
b. An ATM cell is received by SFE_Up. Here the HEC of the ATM  
header gets checked. If it is a bad cell, it is discarded, otherwise the  
HEC is stripped and the remaining 52 bytes are delivered to CAD_Up.  
c. The connection from SFE_Up to CAD_Up is 32-bits wide so the cell is  
transferred in 13 4-byte blocks. There are port lines between SFE_Up  
and CAD_Up which indicate what port the cell came from. Using  
these port lines, the 4-byte block transfers can be mixed from  
different ports. For example, deliver a 4-byte block from Port 1, then  
deliver a 4-byte block from Port 2, then deliver a 4-byte block from  
Port 1 and so on. This ensures that no time is wasted in delivering  
data from a port that has no cells.  
d. When the first 4-byte block of a cell gets transferred, one of the  
control lines is raised to indicate the beginning of a cell.  
e. The SFE forwards each 4-byte block of the cell to CAD_Up, which  
stores it in CAD_Store using the address of the next cell assembly  
buffer prepared previously. However, CAD_Up skips the first 8 bytes,  
which are reserved for the routing header, before it stores the first  
Chapter 3. Functional Overview of the IBM 8285 25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
4-byte block. A 4-bit register pointing to the lower address of where  
the next 4-byte block should go is updated and is used as a  
displacement pointer from the cell buffer address.  
f. CAD_Up writes source port (SP) in RH. When the cell is completely  
assembled in the CAD_Store, CAD_Up puts the cell buffer address in  
a general queue, to allow for cell assembly ending almost at same  
time (one cycle of SFE_Up/CAD_Up interface). Each cell will then be  
dequeued on a first-in/first-out basis from the general queue, and  
CAD_Up sends a copy of the first 4-byte block and the source port  
(SP) to CAP_Up. CAD_Up prepares the address of the next assembly  
cell buffer for this port. The address is determined from the port  
number, which indicates a register pointing to where these 4-bytes  
should be placed. This register is also updated.  
2. Prepare the routing header (RH).  
a. The first 4-byte block of a cell is the first 4 bytes of the ATM cell  
header which contains the VPI/VCI. When CAP_Up receives the first  
4-byte block with SP it now has all the information it needs to identify  
a particular connection: SP, VPI and VCI. From these three values,  
CAP_Up determines the inbound leaf control block address  
(LCBAup), which is the pointer to the leaf control block (LCB) for this  
connection.  
b. The LCB contains the target blade (TB). TB, LCBAup and source  
blade (SB), and RB/NRB connection parameter are given to CAD_Up  
to be written to the header of the internal cell in CAD_Store.  
CAP_Up knows the address of the beginning of this cell, so that the  
address is also given to CAD_Up to ensure that the information is  
written in the correct place in CAD_Store. In the case of an unknown  
SP/VP/VC, the cell is released by CAP_Up by sending to CAD_Up the  
cell buffer address, which can be used for another data movement.  
CAP_Up also performs smart discard on NRB AAL5 frame flows,  
which purges cells on an AAL5 frame basis in the case of NRB node  
congestion.  
3. Place the cell in the queue.  
The cell is put by CAD_Up into the appropriate output queue (with the  
RB/NRB indication) so that prioritization of traffic can occur. There is an  
RB queue and an NRB queue.  
The cell is now ready to be switched.  
4. Switch the cell.  
This step depends on whether or not the IBM 8285 has an expansion  
unit. In other words, whether the switching is done by the CAP/CAD or  
by the switch chip. When the IBM 8285 is installed without the expansion  
unit, the switching is done as follows:  
a. The connection between CAD_Up and CAD_Down has been enabled  
because the IBM 8285 does not have the switch chip.  
b. The cell is switched from CAD_Up to CAD_Down immediately.  
When the IBM 8285 is installed with the expansion unit, the switching is  
done as follows:  
a. When the expansion unit installed, all connections between the  
switch chip and the CAP/CADs are enabled. And then, the direct  
26 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
connection between CAD_Up and CAD_Down in the base unit is  
disabled.  
b. When the switch chip indicates to CAD_Up to give the next cell,  
CAD_Up gives the first cell from the appropriate queue based on its  
priority mechanism (RB over NRB Queue)  
c. The cell is delivered to the switch chip, and the pointers of that  
queue are updated.  
d. The switch chip switches the cell based on TB.  
5. Receive the cell into the target blade.  
a. CAD_Down has prepared a location in advance for the next cell.  
b. CAD_Down receives the cell into CAD_Store in the general queue.  
c. CAD_Down dequeues the cell and sends CAP_Down a copy of the  
RH, which contains the LCBAup and the source blade.  
6. Place the cell in the correct output queue and prepare it for transfer to  
SFE_Down.  
a. Using SB and LCBAup, CAP_Down determines LCBAdown.  
LCBAdown points to the LCB for the connection in the outbound  
blade. The LCB has VPI/VCI out, target port (TP), RB/NRB and  
Multicast indication. There is also part of the LCB in a shadow zone  
in CAD_Store for performance reasons.  
b. LCBAdown TP, NRB/RB, and Multicast indications from the LCB are  
given to CAD_Down.  
CAD_Down queues the cell in the corresponding target port queue (one  
RB and one NRB per port) with the indication received from CAP_Down  
and prepares it for transfer to SFE_Down.  
7. Prepare and send a new ATM cell.  
a. When SFE_Down asks for the next cell of a port, CAD_Down moves  
the contents of LCBshadow, which has VPI/VCI out and the type of  
swapping (SWAP_TYPE) to be performed, plus the 52-byte cell to  
SFE_Down.  
b. SFE_Down modifies the header based on SWAP_TYPE. SWAP_TYPE  
indicates if only the VP needs to be swapped, if both the VP and VC  
need to be swapped or neither need to be swapped. The PTI field is  
always retrieved from the incoming header.  
c. SFE generates HEC.  
d. SFE presents the cell to the specific interface.  
Point-to-Multipoint Routing  
•
In a point-to-multipoint (multicast) connection, the process is very similar.  
Steps remain the same right up until the cell is ready to be switched. The  
TB field actually indicates that this cell is part of a multicast connection by  
having the first bit of TB set to 1. The other 7 bits form the multicast ID  
(MID). In a point-to-point connection, the first bit is set to 0 and the other 7  
bits indicate the target blade.  
1. Switch the cell.  
This step depends on the IBM 8285 has a expansion unit or not. In other  
words, the switching is done by the CAP/CAD or the switch chip. When  
Chapter 3. Functional Overview of the IBM 8285 27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
the IBM 8285 is installed without the expansion unit, the switching is  
done as follows:  
a. The cell is switched from CAD_Up to CAD_Down immediately as well  
as the case of point-to-point connection. The CAP_Up does not  
recognize the multicast ID.  
When the IBM 8285 installed with the expansion unit, the switching is  
done as follows:  
a. The switch chip recognizes that the TB is actually a Multicast ID;  
thus, using the MID as a pointer, it looks at its switch multicast tree  
table to get 16 bits. Each bit corresponds to a blade. If the bit is on,  
then that blade is part of the multicast tree.  
b. The switch chip switches the cell to the target blades based on the  
multicast tree table.  
2. Receive the cell into the target blade.  
This step is the same as in a point-to-point connection described earlier.  
3. Place the cell in the correct output queue and prepare for transfer to  
SFE_Down.  
a. Using SB and LCBA, CAP_Down determines LCBAdown. Since this  
is a multicast connection, LCBAdown actually points to a chain of  
LCBs. Each LCB in the chain represents the branches on the  
multicast tree on this blade. Each LCB in the chain has VPI/VCI out,  
SWAP_TYPE and target port (TP) and last multicast (Last_MC)  
indication. There is also a shadow of the LCB chain in CAD_Store  
for performance reasons.  
b. The same steps as in the unicast case apply. But when the cell has  
been sent to SFE_Down, the CAD_Down will re-enqueue this cell in  
the general queue so that CAP will reprocess this cell with the next  
LCB in the chain. This is done till CAP_Down finds the LAST_MC  
indication in the LCB.  
4. Prepare and send a new ATM cell.  
These scenarios assume that the appropriate tables have been assembled  
already by the 8285 ATM Control Point and stored in the appropriate CAP/CAD.  
This would be done, for instance, during the call establishment process. To  
communicate such information to internal devices (such as CAD, CAP, an SFE),  
the 8285 ATM Control Point uses a special port number, F (which is unique  
within the switch), and special internal cells, called guided cells, which can be  
discriminated from the other internal cells, called swapped cells, by its format  
field.  
3.3 Control Point Codes  
There are three types of control point microcode:  
•
Boot Code  
This resides in flash memory on the control point and is the first thing that  
executes after a power-on or reset. It contains initialization, diagnostics and  
support for download out-of-band commands. This code executes straight  
from flash memory and is normally used to load the operational code.  
•
Operational Code  
28 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
This code is also on the control point and is executed once the boot code  
has finished. There are two copies of the code stored in the flash memory.  
One of these copies is identified as current and is loaded into RAM during  
the initialization process. This code is executed from RAM. The second  
copy of the operational code allows new operational code to be loaded into  
the control point while the control point is running, and then swapped (which  
resets the ATM subsystem) when it is less disruptive to network operations.  
•
FPGA Code  
This code configures the various internal chips on the IBM 8285 base unit so  
that they perform their desired ATM functions. There are two copies of the  
FPGA code stored in flash memory. One of these copies is identified as  
current code. The current code is loaded into the internal chips of the  
appropriate components during the initialization process. The second copy  
of the FPGA code allows new FPGA code to be loaded while the IBM 8285 is  
operational, and then swapped (which resets the ATM subsystem) when it is  
less disruptive to network operations.  
The following sections describe the code levels that are currently shipped, are  
announced, or are available in the future.  
3.3.1 Control Point Levels  
Table 1 lists the levels of control point code that are currently available for the  
8285 switch.  
Table 1. Control Point Levels Summary of the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch  
Control Point  
Level  
Available  
Highlights  
V1.0.0  
V1.0.1  
V1.2.0  
V1.3.0  
V1.4.0  
March 1996  
April 1996  
Initial release  
Fixed some problems in initial release  
TR LEC, EU, and 8260 modules support ꢀ1ꢁ  
New 8260 module support ꢀ2ꢁ  
July 1996  
October 1996  
October 1996  
Connection capacity increased, Variable VPC/VCI, ABR flow  
control and PVC multipoint supportꢀ3ꢁ  
Notes:  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
Except A-CPSW, MSS Server and 8271/8272 modules  
A3-MB155 module  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
ATM firmware upgrade kit required  
These control point microcode levels (except the obsolete ones) are available on  
the Internet and can be downloaded via the Web or by FTP. And the code can  
be downloaded into the IBM 8285 either out-of-band via a SLIP-connected  
workstation, or inband via an FTP file transfer. For more information about how  
to get and download the code, refer to 6.4, “Microcode/Picocode Considerations”  
on page 110.  
Chapter 3. Functional Overview of the IBM 8285 29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
3.3.2 Control Point V1.2  
The Control Point V1.2 has been available since July 1996. It contains the  
operational code V1.2.0, the boot code V1.2.0 and FPGA 3. The FPGA is optional  
but highly recommended.  
The highlights of new and enhancement functions are as follows:  
•
Token-Ring (IEEE 802.5) LAN Emulation Client (LEC) Support  
The previous levels allowed the inband monitoring of the IBM 8285 in a  
Classical IP environment as well as in Forum-Compliant LAN Emulation  
(Ethernet / IEEE 802.3). This support has been extended to Token-Ring (IEEE  
802.5) Forum-Compliant LAN Emulation.  
•
Expansion Unit and 8260 ATM Modules Support:  
This level supports the IBM 8285 Expansion Unit and IBM 8260 ATM modules  
as follows:  
−
−
−
−
−
−
ATM 4-Port 100 Mbps MIC Fiber Module  
ATM 4-Port 100 Mbps SC Fiber Module  
ATM 2-Port 155 Mbps Flexible Media Module  
ATM 12-Port 25 Mbps UTP Concentrator Module  
ATM 4-Port Ethernet/TR Bridge Module  
ATM WAN Module  
Note  
When this level became available, it supported all IBM 8260 ATM media  
and bridge modules then announced. However, there are the following  
modules are currently announced and not supported by the IBM 8285  
expansion unit:  
•
MSS Module  
•
8271/8272 LAN Switch Modules  
•
MIB Enhancement (MIB 1.5)  
The IBM private MIB for the IBM 8285 is enhanced corresponding to the  
other enhancements.  
3.3.3 Control Point V1.3  
The Control Point V1.3 has been available since October 1996. It contains the  
operational code V1.3.0 and the boot code V1.3.0. No FPGA is included in this  
level.  
The highlights of new and enhancement functions are as follows:  
•
New 8260 ATM Modules Support  
In addition to the control point level V1.2, this level supports the new IBM  
8260 ATM modules as follows:  
−
ATM 3-Port 155 Mbps LAN Concentration Module  
•
MIB Enhancement (MIB 1.6)  
The IBM private MIB for the IBM 8285 is enhanced corresponding to the  
other enhancements.  
30 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
3.3.4 Control Point V1.4  
The Control Point V1.4 has been available since October 1996 as well as the  
V1.3. It contains the operational code V1.4.0, the boot code V1.4.0 and FPGA  
code 0B40 and 0C10. The FPGA code 0C10 is for the ATM 3-port 155 Mbps LAN  
Concentration module, ATM 12-port 25 Mbps UTP Concentrator module and for  
the 8285 Base Unit. The FPGA code 0B40 is for the others.  
This level is also called as the ATM Firmware Upgrade Kit (MES 5099) and the  
FPGA upgrade is mandatory. The boot and operational code V1.4.0 supports  
several functions with new FPGA codes in addition to the functions provided by  
V1.3.0 of those codes. The FPGA codes for all available ATM modules are  
contained in the ATM Firmware Upgrade Kit.  
The highlights of new and enhancement functions are as follows:  
•
Increase of Number of Connections  
For all ATM media modules currently announced, the number of bidirectional  
connections is increased from 992 to 4,064 per ATM blade. However, the  
maximum number of connections per an IBM 8285 is 2,048 due to the  
limitation of its control point.  
•
Variable Range of VPI/VCI Values Support  
The ITU-T define the ATM cell format and the virtual path identifier (VPI) and  
virtual channel identifier (VCI) have 8 bits (VPI value comprised between 0  
and 256) and 16 bits (VCI value comprised between 0 and 65536). However,  
in actual campus network, the full address range should not be used and the  
UNI specification allows you to restrict the number of active VPI and VCI bits.  
The IBM 8285 supports a 14 or 12-bit address range for VPI/VCI depending  
on which port is used. And prior to the control point V1.3, the range was  
fixed to a 2-bit VPI (0 through 3) and 10-bit VCI (0 through 1023) for the 25  
Mbps ports (base unit and 25Mbps module) and 4-bit VPI (0 through 15) and  
10-bit (0 through 1023) for the other ports. The control point V1.4 supports  
variable range of VPC/VCC. This function allows you to have more virtual  
path connections (VPCs) or virtual channel connections (VCCs) than previous  
levels along with the customer requirement. The range supported on an  
ATM port depends on which port is used.  
−
For the 25 Mbps ports:  
One of the following three patterns of range can be selected:  
-
-
-
VPI/VCI: 0 bit/12 bits (VPI=0, VCI=0 through 4095)  
VPI/VCI: 2 bits/10 bits (VPI=0 through 3, VCI=0 through 1023)  
VPI/VCI: 4 bits/8 bits (VPI=0 through 15, VCI=0 through 256)  
−
For the other ports:  
One of the following three patterns of range can be selected:  
-
-
-
VPI/VCI: 0 bit/14 bits (VPI=0, VCI=0 through 16383)  
VPI/VCI: 4 bits/10 bits (VPI=0 through 15, VCI=0 through 1023)  
VPI/VCI: 6 bits/8 bits (VPI=0 through 63, VCI=0 through 256)  
In addition, the network administrator can define upper limits for VPI/VCI  
values to meet specific ranges supported by some ATM UNI devices. The  
ATM Forum-Compliant UNI stations inform the ATM switch about the  
supported values of VPI/VCI. In case a station fails to do so, this may  
Chapter 3. Functional Overview of the IBM 8285 31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
prevent interworking with the IBM ATM switches. This function solves this  
problem by allowing the the network administrator to set the VPC/VCC range  
on a given ATM port on the ATM switch, thereby enabling the interworking  
with non-compliant devices. For example, you can restrict the VPI value  
equal to 0 and VCI value comprised between 0 and 63 by specifying 0/6 as  
the VPI/VCI.  
Note  
If you change the VPI/VCI range for the SSI or NNI port, you must specify  
the same value on both ends.  
•
•
•
ABR Flow Control Support  
On the ATM 12-port 25 Mbps UTP Concentrator module, the ATM 3-port 155  
Mbps LAN Concentration module, and on the 12-port 25 Mbps base unit, the  
end user can add the ATM Forum-compliant available bit rate (ABR) flow  
control through Explicit Forward Congestion Notification Indication (EFCI)  
marking. When congestion occurs due to excessive traffic flow, the IBM 8285  
and 8260 modules can now mark the EFCI bit in the ATM cells to indicate a  
congestion condition asking the destination station to notify the source  
device to reduce its traffic.  
Increase Buffer Size  
When multiple ATM sources try to send traffic over one link (for instance the  
one to which a server is attached), using UBR or ABR class of service,  
congestion conditions might occur because the aggregate traffic exceeds the  
capacity of the LAN traffic over ATM. By having a larger buffer size (8,000  
cells) the A12-MB25 and A3-MB155 modules are able to absorb bursts of  
traffic of longer duration, thereby delaying the trigger of the congestion  
control mechanism, such as Early Packet Discard. This improves the overall  
response time and relieves end systems from extra frame retransmissions.  
PVC Multipoint Support  
In addition to the existing support of point-to-multipoint SVCs, this introduces  
the smart PVC point-to-multipoint function. Point-to-multipoint trees can be  
defined now with either fixed permanent virtual paths (PVPs) or fixed  
permanent virtual channels (PVCs). You only need to define the parameters  
(VP or VP/VC values) for the root of the tree and the leaves, without any  
definition for intermediate switches. In case of failure on these intermediate  
switches, the connections are automatically re-established.  
•
•
New 8260 ATM Modules Support  
In addition to the control point level V1.2, this level supports the new IBM  
8260 ATM modules as follows:  
−
ATM 3-Port 155 Mbps LAN Concentration Module  
MIB Enhancement (MIB 1.6)  
The IBM private MIB for the IBM 8285 is enhanced corresponding to the  
other announcements.  
32 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
3.4 ATM Backplane / Expansion Unit Connection  
As described in Figure 9 on page 18, there are several ATM buses to connect  
each component of IBM 8285. The buses between CAP/CADs or CAP/CAD and  
the switch chip are called as the ATM backplane. In the IBM 8285, the ATM  
backplane is extended to the connection between the base and expansion unit.  
When the IBM 8285 is installed with the expansion unit, they are connected by a  
special cable, called the expansion interface cable, which has 68 pins. On the  
other hand, as described in some documents, such as the IBM 8260 As a  
Campus ATM Switch, all ATM modules have 120 pins for backplane connection.  
The difference comes from the number of modules supported by the IBM 8285  
and the IBM 8260 whether or not it supports the redundant switch configuration.  
Except for the redundant switch function, both of the IBM 8285 and IBM 8260 ATM  
backplanes are fully equivalent functionally to an ATM blade.  
You can find the pin layout of the IBM 8285 expansion interface in the appendix  
of the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch: Installation and User′s Guide.  
For more information about the IBM 8260 ATM backplane, refer to IBM 8260 As a  
Campus ATM Switch, SG24-5003.  
Table 2 shows the characteristics of typical buses implemented in the IBM 8285.  
Table 2. ATM Buses Implemented in the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch  
Bus Location  
Bus Speed  
CAD_Up and CAD_Down (ATM backplane in the base unit)  
256 Mbps (32 MHz x 8 bit  
parallel)  
CP SFE and 25 Mbps HS.SFE_Up/Down  
256 Mbps / FDX ꢀ1ꢁ  
25 Mbps HS.SFE_Up/Down or 155 Mbps SFE_Up/Down and  
CAD_Up/Down  
512 Mbps (16 MHz x 32 bit  
parallel) / FDX ꢀ1ꢁ  
CAD_Up/Down and the switch chip (ATM backplane across the  
expansion unit)  
256 Mbps / FDX ꢀ1ꢁ  
Note  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
FDX means each up (inbound) and down (outbound) works  
simultaneously and the maximum capacity should be double (256  
Mbps/FDX : 512 Mbps).  
As described above, the internal bandwidth for each blade should be 256 Mbps.  
However, we have to consider that the IBM 8285 uses a 64-byte internal cell  
instead of a 53-byte ATM standardized cell. As a result, the available ATM  
bandwidth for the ATM cell transfer should be decreased from the internal  
bandwidth, 256 Mbps per blade, to 212 Mbps (256 Mbps x 53/64) per blade by the  
overhead of the internal cell header/trailer.  
3.5 LAN Emulation Server Functions  
The IBM 8285 integrates a Forum-compliant LAN Emulation Server (LES) and  
Broadcast and Unknown Server (BUS) functions in the control point. The  
LES/BUS functions are performed with or without external a LAN Emulation  
Configuration Server (LECS).  
The IBM 8285 can support up to two sets of the LES/BUS functions with any  
combinations of the types of LAN emulation, token-ring (IEEE 802.5) and Ethernet  
Chapter 3. Functional Overview of the IBM 8285 33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
(IEEE 802.3). The maximum number of the LAN Emulation Clients (LECs) is 128  
regardless the number of the LES/BUS, so it should be the sum of the LECs  
supported by the IBM 8285 when two LES/BUS are used.  
The LES/BUS gives an impact on CP performance when running so that the  
processor and memory are mainly shared between signaling, BUS and routing.  
However, it is designed to prevent the CP traffic from the delay and buffer  
accumulation by assigning lower priority to the broadcast traffic.  
34 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Chapter 4. IBM 8285 ATM Modules  
This chapter describes the various functions and features that are available on  
8285 ATM modules.  
4.1 Modules Currently Available for the 8285 ATM Subsystem  
The current ATM modules for the IBM 8285 are:  
•
ATM 12-Port 25 Mbps UTP Concentrator Module  
•
ATM 2-Port 155 Mbps Flexible Media Module  
−
−
−
−
1-port ATM 155Mbps Multi-mode Fiber I/O card  
1-port ATM 155 Mbps Single-mode Fiber I/O card  
1-port ATM 155 Mbps UTP/STP I/O card (RJ-45)  
1-port ATM 155 Mbps STP I/O card (DB9)  
•
ATM 3-Port 155 Mbps LAN Concentration Module  
−
−
−
−
1-port ATM 155Mbps Multi-mode Fiber I/O card  
1-port ATM 155 Mbps Single-mode Fiber I/O card  
1-port ATM 155 Mbps UTP/STP I/O card (RJ-45)  
1-port ATM 155 Mbps STP I/O card (DB9)  
•
•
•
•
•
ATM 4-Port 100 Mbps MIC Fiber Module  
ATM 4-Port 100 Mbps SC Fiber Module  
Video Distribution Module  
ATM 4-Port TR/Ethernet Bridge Module  
ATM WAN Module  
−
−
−
−
−
−
1-port E3 I/O card  
1-port DS3 I/O card  
1-port OC3 I/O card (SMF)  
1-port OC3 I/O card (MMF)  
1-port STM1 I/O card (SMF)  
1-port STM1 I/O card (MMF)  
Copyright IBM Corp. 1996  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
4.2 Some Common Elements among the 8285 Modules  
The following sections describe some of the common elements shared by the  
8285 modules.  
4.2.1 Maximum Capacity  
All 8285 modules have a backplane capacity of 212 Mbps. In order to provide  
guaranteed service, the maximum configurable reserved bandwidth is 185 Mbps  
(85% of 212 Mbps). The non-reserved traffic will use whatever bandwidth is  
available, including bandwidth that is reserved but not being used.  
4.2.2 Variable VPC/VCC Value Ranges  
With the latest release of 8285 code (Release 1.4), the 8285 modules now support  
variable VPC/VCC range values. That is to say, they allow you to manage your  
network more precisely by allocating varying numbers of bits to the VPC and  
VCC portions of the header on a port-by-port basis.  
Note  
The VPC/VCC range must be the same on both ends of an SSI or NNI link.  
With one exception, noted below, all of the modules allocate 14 bits to the  
VPC/VCC portion of the header, which you can allocate in one of the following  
ways:  
•
Mode 0/14 (all 14 bits assigned to VCC):  
−
−
VPC=0  
VCC range is 0-16383  
•
•
Mode 4/10 (4 bits for VPC, 10 bits for VCC):  
−
−
VPC range is 0-15  
VCC range is 0-1023  
Mode 6/8 (6 bits for VPC, 8 bits for VCC):  
−
−
VPC range is 0-63  
VCC range is 0-255  
The exception to the above is the newest module, the ATM 12-Port 25 Mbps UTP  
Concentrator Module, which allocates only 12 bits to the VPC/VCC portion of the  
header, and which allows the following modes:  
•
Mode 0/12 (all 12 bits assigned to VCC):  
−
−
VPC=0  
VCC range is 0-4095  
•
•
Mode 2/10 (2 bits for VPC, 10 bits for VCC):  
−
−
VPC range is 0-3  
VCC range is 0-1023  
Mode 4/8 (4 bits for VPC, 8 bits for VCC):  
−
−
VPC range is 0-15  
VCC range is 0-255  
36 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
For all modules, you can define upper limits for VP/VC values at the port level to  
facilitate interoperability with certain ATM devices that have constraints on what  
values they will accept. This is done using the Set PORT command, which has a  
new parameter, VPI_VCI: #bits_vpi.#bits_vci.  
Chapter 4. IBM 8285 ATM Modules 37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
4.3 ATM 12-Port 25 Mbps UTP Concentrator Module  
The ATM 25 Mbps UTP Concentrator Module is a single-slot concentrator module  
that provides low-cost access to a high-performance ATM network. It is ideal for  
upgrading your legacy LAN users and for providing higher performance to new  
users.  
It has the following characteristics:  
•
12 Forum-Compliant ATM 25.6 RJ-45 ports capable of supporting shielded  
and unshielded twisted pair cabling.  
•
Supports user-to-switch, server-to-switch, and switch-to-switch connections in  
any combination.  
•
Supports ATM Forum Available Bit Rate (ABR) Service using Explicit Forward  
Congestion Control (EFCI) marking.  
•
Has a large 8,000 cell buffer to smooth bursts of traffic without triggering  
congestion control mechanisms.  
•
Supports UNI 3.0, UNI 3.1, and UNI translation.  
•
Expands IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch capacity up to 48 ports  
with optional 8285 Expansion Chassis (FC# 5502).  
4.3.1 Sample Scenarios  
The ATM 12-Port 25 Mbps UTP Concentrator Module is a high-performance card  
that is very cost-effective for connecting high-bandwidth users and servers into a  
workgroup or an ATM network. In addition, it can be used to provide redundant  
links to a backbone or server to provide higher bandwidth and improved  
reliability. Figure 12 on page 39, Figure 14 on page 41, and Figure 13 on  
page 40 show some ways the ATM 12-Port 25 Mbps UTP Concentrator Module  
can be used with the 8285 switch.  
38 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Figure 12. ATM 12-Port 25 Mbps UTP Concentrator Module Workgroup  
The first example, a workgroup configuration, shows how you might set up a  
very cost-effective stand-alone workgroup by merely changing adapters in the  
workstations and connecting them to the 8285 switch. This simple change  
provides up to 25 Mbps of bandwidth to the desktop for up to 48 users per 8285,  
and gives them access to a high-speed server.  
Chapter 4. IBM 8285 ATM Modules 39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Figure 13. 8285 Low-Cost Configuration Implementation  
The second example shows a building with 8285s on floors and in the basement.  
The backbone and server are working at 155 Mbps. By ordering an 8285 model  
00P, it is possible to create an ATM network at a very attractive price, since it  
provides both the base unit and 12 ATM25 workstation adapters at a special  
bundled price.  
40 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Figure 14. 8285 with ATM 12-Port 25 Mbps UTP Concentrator Modules as an Access  
Switch  
The third example shows how you can connect the ATM25 workgroup into the  
backbone network to access additional high-speed resources using only the  
standard ATM 155 Mbps uplink. In this capacity, the 8285 makes an excellent  
ATM floor switch, especially when used in conjunction with the IBM 8260 Nways  
Multiprotocol Switching Hub as the backbone or collapse-point switch.  
By implementing a second backbone link (using either the ATM 2-Port 155 Mbps  
Flexible Media Module or the ATM 3-Port 155 Mbps LAN Concentration Module)  
connected to a different switch in the backbone, you can take advantage of the  
additional bandwidth during normal operations, and provide availability to your  
workgroup even if one of the collapse-point switches fails.  
Chapter 4. IBM 8285 ATM Modules 41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
4.4 ATM 2-Port 155 Mbps Flexible Media Module and ATM 3-Port 155 Mbps  
LAN Concentration Module  
The ATM 2-Port 155 Mbps Flexible Media Module and the ATM 3-Port 155 Mbps  
LAN Concentration Module are single-slot concentrator modules that are ideal  
for high-speed connections to both local resources and to devices up to 20 Km  
away. They have the following characteristics in common:  
•
Provide two or three ports, each capable of supporting a 155 Mbps  
(full-duplex) connection to either a user, a server, or another switch. The  
traffic received from these ports will be multiplexed into the backplane  
connection between the ATM 155 Mbps Media Module and the  
switch-on-a-chip.  
Each port can support any of the following I/O cards:  
Table 3. ATM 155 Mbps Media Module Supported I/O Cards  
Feature  
8800  
Part Number  
58G9667  
Interface  
SC  
Cable  
Multi-Mode Fiber  
Single-Mode Fiber  
UTP5/STP  
8801  
58G9855  
SC  
8802  
58G9856  
RJ-45  
DB9  
8803  
58G9857  
STP  
•
Support either SONET STS-3C or SDH STM-1 on any port at speeds of  
155.520 Mbps.  
STS-3c Limitations  
The STS-3c implementation is a Lite implementation, which, although fully  
compliant with ATM Forum standards, is lacking some of the  
management and overhead portions of a full SONET implementation. It  
will interoperate with the 1-port OC3 I/O card (SMF) and the 1-port OC3  
I/O card (MMF) that are installed in an ATM WAN Module. However,  
neither the 1-port ATM 155 Mbps Single-mode Fiber I/O card nor the  
1-port ATM 155 Mbps UTP/STP I/O card (RJ-45) are suitable for direct  
connection to a public bearer service other than dark fiber. In addition,  
there may be incompatibilities with certain adapters that expect a full  
SONET implementation.  
STM-1 Limitations  
The STM-1 implementation is a Lite implementation, lacking some of the  
management and overhead portions of a full SDH implementation. It will  
interoperate with the 1-port STM1 I/O card (SMF) and the 1-port STM1 I/O  
card (MMF) that are installed in an ATM WAN Module. However, neither  
the 1-port ATM 155 Mbps Single-mode Fiber I/O card nor the 1-port ATM  
155 Mbps UTP/STP I/O card (RJ-45) are suitable for direct connection to a  
public bearer service. In addition, there may be incompatibilities with  
certain adapters that expect a full SDH implementation.  
Please refer to Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM): Technical Overview for  
more information on the SONET and SDH standards.  
•
•
Hot-pluggable in any slot in the 8285 Expansion Chassis.  
Support UNI, SSI, and NNI on either port in any combination.  
42 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
•
Support UNI 3.0 and/or UNI 3.1 on all ports and will attempt to adapt to the  
standards of the connected device. That is to say, if a remote UNI 3.1 device  
needs to connect to a UNI 3.0 device connected to the ATM 155 Mbps  
module, the module will attempt to translate between the two at the output  
port.  
4.4.1 Differences between the 2- and 3-Port ATM Modules  
Although these two modules are very similar, there are some key differences.  
Specifically, the ATM 3-Port 155 Mbps LAN Concentration Module has the  
following additional features:  
•
Supports ATM Forum Available Bit Rate (ABR) Service using Explicit Forward  
Congestion Control (EFCI) marking.  
•
Has a large 8,000 cell buffer to smooth bursts of traffic without triggering  
congestion control mechanisms.  
4.4.2 ATM 155 Mbps Media Module Traffic Management  
The ATM 155 Mbps Media Module provides reserved bandwidth (RB) and  
non-reserved bandwidth (NRB) with the following caveats:  
•
For RB traffic, the maximum bandwidth that can be reserved is 85% of the  
total throughput capacity, which is:  
−
−
Port Interface: 131 Mbps (85% of 155 Mbps)  
Backplane Interface: 180 Mbps (85% of 212 Mbps)  
4.4.2.1 Reserved Bandwidth Constraints  
In order to fairly allocate reserved bandwidth among its ports, the ATM 155 Mbps  
modules will enforce traffic limitations on each port that is configured for SSI, as  
follows:  
•
For a single SSI link between two 8285s, the maximum bandwidth that can be  
reserved is 131 Mbps (85% of 155 Mbps).  
•
If a second SSI port is configured, the amount of reserved bandwidth for the  
first port will be recalculated and each SSI link will be allocated 90 Mbps  
(50% of 180 Mbps). If the peak cell rate (PCR) in the first SSI port exceeds 90  
Mbps when you try to configure the second port, the command setting for the  
second SSI port will be rejected since the first port could not be throttled  
back.  
•
If a third SSI port is configured (on the ATM 3-Port 155 Mbps LAN  
Concentration Module only), the amount of reserved bandwidth for the first  
two ports will be recalculated and each SSI link will be allocated 60 Mbps  
(33% of 180 Mbps). If the peak cell rate (PCR) in either of the first two SSI  
ports exceeds 60 Mbps when you try to configure the third port, the  
command setting for the third SSI port will be rejected since the other ports  
could not be throttled back.  
4.4.3 Sample Scenarios  
The ATM 155 Mbps Media Modules are high-performance cards that are ideal for  
connecting high-bandwidth users and servers into either a workgroup or an ATM  
network. In addition, they can be used to provide redundant links to a backbone  
or server to provide higher bandwidth and improved reliability. Figure 15 on  
page 44 shows how the ATM 2-Port 155 Mbps Flexible Media Module can be  
used as a concentrator for a high-performance workgroup.  
Chapter 4. IBM 8285 ATM Modules 43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Figure 15. ATM 2-Port 155 Mbps Flexible Media Module High-Performance Workgroup  
In this scenario, six users are connected to the 8285 via a high-performance ATM  
155 Mbps adapter, such as the IBM Turboways ATM 155 Mbps Adapter,  
connected in to ATM 2-Port 155 Mbps Flexible Media Modules installed in the  
8285 Expansion Chassis. This allows all six users to access the ATM 155 Mbps  
server, connected to the ATM 155 Mbps port on the base unit, for such  
bandwidth-intensive applications as CAD/CAM, video playback, etc. In addition,  
12 ATM25 users can access the same high-performance ATM server for such  
applications as video conferencing and traditional LAN server applications.  
44 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Figure 16. ATM 3-Port 155 Mbps LAN Concentration Module with Redundant Backbone  
Links  
Figure 16 shows how you can use the ATM 3-Port 155 Mbps LAN Concentration  
Module to connect a high-performance workgroup into the backbone network to  
access additional high-speed resources. In this case, up to eight users, using  
workstations with high-performance ATM 155 Mbps adapters, such as the IBM  
Turboways ATM 155 Mbps Adapter, are connected in to ATM 3-Port 155 Mbps  
LAN Concentration Modules installed in the 8285 Expansion Chassis. This  
enables each user to access resources across the ATM backbone network. By  
providing redundant backbone links, preferably to separate backbone switches,  
the ATM 3-Port 155 Mbps LAN Concentration Module also provides aggregate  
backbone access bandwidth as high as 310 Mbps and ensures availability to the  
workgroup should one of the links fail. Up to 12 ATM25 users can also take  
advantage of this increased bandwidth and availability.  
Whether as a workgroup solution or as a backbone solution, the ATM 2-Port 155  
Mbps Flexible Media Module and the ATM 3-Port 155 Mbps LAN Concentration  
Module meet the needs of bandwidth-intensive applications, with the ATM 3-Port  
155 Mbps LAN Concentration Module offering more ports, a lower price/port, and  
additional buffering to handle bursty traffic.  
Chapter 4. IBM 8285 ATM Modules 45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
4.5 ATM 4-Port 100 Mbps MIC Fiber Module and the ATM 4-Port 100 Mbps SC  
Fiber Module  
The ATM 4-Port 100 Mbps MIC Fiber Module and the ATM 4-Port 100 Mbps SC  
Fiber Module are single-slot concentrator modules that are identical except for  
they have MIC and SC connectors, respectively. They have the following  
characteristics:  
•
Hot-pluggable in any slot in the 8285 Expansion Chassis.  
•
Each module provides four taxi ports, each capable of supporting 100 Mbps  
(full-duplex). The traffic received from these ports will be multiplexed into  
the backplane connection between the A4-FB100 module and the  
switch-on-a-chip.  
•
Support for workstation connections (UNI) up to 2 km from the 8285.  
•
Support for a connection between two A4-FB100 ports (SSI/NNI) up to 3 km.  
4.5.1 Sample Scenarios  
The 4-port 100 Mbps modules are high-performance cards that are very  
cost-effective for connecting high-bandwidth users and servers into a workgroup  
or an ATM network. In addition, they can be used to provide redundant links to  
a backbone or server to provide higher bandwidth and improved reliability.  
Figure 17 and Figure 18 on page 47 show some ways the 4-port 100 Mbps  
modules can be used with the 8285.  
Figure 17. ATM 100 Mbps MIC/SC Fiber Module Workgroup Configuration  
The first example, a workgroup configuration, shows how you might set up a  
very cost-effective high-performance stand-alone workgroup, providing up to 100  
Mbps bandwidth to as many as 16 power users, 25 Mbps of bandwidth to as  
46 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
many as 12 ATM25 desktops, and give them all 155 Mbps access to an ATM  
server. When used in conjunction with IBM′s Turboways 100 Mbps ATM  
Adapters on the workstations, performance can meet or exceed some 155 Mbps  
adapter/switch combinations.  
Figure 18. ATM 100 Mbps MIC/SC Fiber Module with Redundant ATM Backbone Links  
The second example, above, shows how you can connect the high-performance  
workgroup into the backbone network to access additional high-speed resources.  
By implementing a second backbone link connected to a different switch in the  
backbone, you can provide additional bandwidth for your users and enhance the  
network′s availability to your workgroup even if one of the collapse-point  
switches fails.  
Chapter 4. IBM 8285 ATM Modules 47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
4.6 Video Distribution Module  
The Video Distribution Module is a double-slot video concentrator module that  
can be used to provide low-cost, high-quality, video distribution to standard TV  
monitors. It has the following characteristics:  
•
Eight independently addressable MPEG-2 decoder ports. Each port can  
support an MPEG-2 video stream encoded at data rates of 1.5-15 Mbps  
simultaneously.  
•
Eight separate audio and video output connections:  
−
Video: composite baseband NTSC (EIA Standard RS-170A) or PAL (in  
Release 1.1):  
-
Video Resolutions:  
•
SIF: 352x240 pixels (NTSC)  
•
HHR or Half-D1: 352x480 pixels (NTSC)  
•
CCIR-601 or Broadcast: 704x480 pixels (NTSC)  
•
Comparable PAL resolutions  
−
Audio: stereo, balanced or unbalanced  
•
•
Supports MPEG-2 Main Level, Main Profile (4:2:0) video and MPEG-1 audio.  
Supports MPEG-2 Elementary Stream or MPEG-1 Elementary Stream  
encapsulated in an MPEG-2 Transport Stream at speeds of up to 15 Mbps.  
•
•
Supports a Single Program Transport Stream (that is, one video and one  
audio program).  
Supports Closed Caption data and Extended Data Services information in  
accordance with EIA 608: Recommended Practice for Line 21.  
•
•
Supports ATM for PVC and SVC Connections using UNI 3.1.  
Can receive video input from any ATM device that can access the 8285  
switch via the the ATM network.  
•
•
Supports frame synchronization using GENLOCK inputs.  
Functions as an H.310 AAL-5 Receive-Only Terminal (ROT). H.310 is an ITU  
standard for broadcast-quality audiovisual communication over broadband  
networks using MPEG-2 video over high-speed ATM networks. The standard  
includes subparts such as:  
−
−
−
−
H.262 (MPEG-2 video standard)  
H.222.0 (MPEG-2 Program and Transport Stream)  
H.222.1 (MPEG-2 streams over ATM)  
Various audio compression standards  
•
Can be monitored, but not configured via the 8285 ATM Control Point.  
4.6.1 MPEG Fundamentals  
MPEG-2 is an International Telecommunication Union (ITU) standard for  
digitizing, compressing, and multiplexing video and audio information. The  
predecessor to MPEG-2 is MPEG-1, which is widely used in low-end video and  
PC software-based encoding and decoding environments. MPEG-1 is a desktop  
48 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
quality, low bandwidth, and low resolution standard with fixed limited rates.  
MPEG-2 expands upon MPEG-1 in all directions:  
•
Higher quality (at the expense of higher bandwidth requirements)  
•
Higher resolutions (up to HDTV levels)  
•
Tremendous flexibility in compression rates.  
MPEG-2 provides the standard for high-quality motion video compression. It is  
accepted by all segments of the entertainment, broadcasting, and video editing  
industry.  
4.6.1.1 MPEG-2 Data Streams  
MPEG-2 allows for the multiplexing of many independent audio and video  
streams (called Elementary Streams) into a System Stream, with synchronization  
information and audio/video correlation information.  
There are two types of system stream:  
1. Program data stream  
This is suitable in environments where reliable storage is ensured.  
2. Transport data stream  
This is designed to transmit audiovisual content over networks.  
The MPEG-2 transport data stream carries video and audio in the same data  
stream within separate fields. All video and audio material is stamped with  
presentation time stamps at the time of encoding. These time stamps are  
synchronized during the decoding process. This ensures synchronization of  
data without perceivable jitter.  
4.6.1.2 Multiplexing and Synchronization  
MPEG-2 defines a system layer that provides the ability to multiplex and  
synchronize multiple video and audio streams, and other private data. The  
system layer includes clocking information between the encoder and decoder.  
Even when an MPEG-2 stream is stored, the decoder may read the clock values  
to accurately recreate the motion picture.  
The system layer also removes storage and transmission dependencies from  
MPEG-2. Since the system layer is self-clocking, MPEG-2 does not require  
synchronized transmission lines. Error checking fields add robustness to the  
transmission layer.  
In comparison, there is no standardized system layer for M-JPEG. Therefore, it  
must record and transmit video and audio separately. The lack of a standard  
prevents M-JPEG encoded material from being freely exchanged. It cannot be  
recorded for future playback due to the absence of built-in timing information.  
M-JPEG requires a synchronous transmission line, that is, a more expensive  
communications network.  
Chapter 4. IBM 8285 ATM Modules 49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
4.6.1.3 Motion Interpretation and Improved Compression  
MPEG-2 interprets motion between successive images and takes advantage of  
motion to improve compression while sustaining the same level of perceived  
image quality. The MPEG-2 motion interpretation uses a combination of two  
kinds of frames to do this:  
•
An anchor frame:  
−
Intra-Frame (I-Frame):  
-
Only exploits spatial redundancy to compress information  
within the frame  
-
Contains all information to reconstruct the image; does not depend  
on another frame  
•
A difference frame, which can be either:  
−
Predictive Frame (P-Frame):  
-
-
-
Exploits temporal and spatial redundancy to compress video frame  
Must reference a previous anchor frame to reconstruct the image  
Can be anchors to other P or B frames  
−
Bidirectionally Predictive Frame (B-Frame)  
-
-
-
Exploits temporal and spatial redundancy to compress video frame  
Must reference an anchor frame  
Cannot be an anchor to another frame  
A typical encoded frame sequence might look like the one in Figure 19 on  
page 51.  
50 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Figure 19. Typical MEPG-2 Picture Sequence Showing Picture Types  
Since the anchor frame is sent only intermittently, and only changes are sent for  
the intervening frames, significant bandwidth savings can be realized, with  
minimum degradation of picture quality. It should be noted, however, that  
response time may be unacceptably affected in some situations when using full  
IPB compression. This can be remedied by using just I and P frames, resulting  
in similar delays to M-JPEG but requiring much less bandwidth.  
4.6.1.4 Audio Compression  
The MPEG-2 system multiplex layer allows for various audio compression  
standards to be used, and the definition of a standard compression scheme  
ensures compatibility between vendors. In comparison, M-JPEG does not include  
an audio standard. Audio is transmitted separately from the video.  
4.6.1.5 MPEG Summary  
MPEG-2 is superior to M-JPEG because of its ability to multiplex and to  
synchronize, to interpret motion and to provide improved compression, and to  
transport multiple different audio compression data streams.  
Table 4 on page 52 provides a convenient comparison of the two technologies.  
Chapter 4. IBM 8285 ATM Modules 51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Table 4. Video Distribution Module Comparison of MPEG-2 and Motion-JPEG  
Feature  
MPEG-2  
M-JPEG  
System Layer  
Provides audio and video  
synchronization.  
No system layer, that is,  
no standard  
synchronization method.  
Record on Servers  
Motion Compression  
Yes  
Must record video and  
audio separately, leading  
to synchronization  
problems.  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
Standard Auto  
Compression  
Compression Algorithm  
MPEG-1 Compatibility  
DCT  
DCT  
No  
System layer can carry  
MPEG-1. MPEG-2  
equipment downward  
compatible with MPEG-1.  
Private Data for Closed  
Captioning  
Yes  
No  
Bandwidth Requirements  
for High Quality Video  
I-Frame  
Less  
than 18  
Mbps.  
20 Mbps  
I + P Frame  
IPB Frame  
Less  
than 12  
Mbps.  
Less  
than  
6-8  
Mbps.  
ATM Compatibility  
Standardization  
MPEG-2 Transport  
Requires circuit-switched,  
constant bit rate (AAL1)  
services for accurate  
voice and video  
Streams can be carried  
over AAL5 and can take  
advantage of variable bit  
rate services.  
synchronization.  
MPEG-2 video and  
Video conferencing and  
transmission using  
M-JPEG is not  
standardized.  
Proprietary  
MPEG-1 audio encoding  
are standard. H.310  
encompasses MPEG-2  
and defines operational  
specifications for MPEG-2  
over ATM video  
implementations cause  
interoperability problems.  
conferencing.  
4.6.2 Configuring the Video Distribution Module  
The Video Distribution Module is a relatively simple module to configure since it  
is merely a target for an ATM stream from another source. The process is as  
follows:  
•
Enable the VDM port as a UNI interface:  
In the following example:  
−
The second port of the VDM for our video output is set.  
52 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
−
−
−
−
VPI 4 and VCI 10 values are used.  
UNI signalling is set.  
Flow control is disabled.  
ILMI handshaking is disabled, forcing UNI 3.1 signalling.  
ꢀ8285> set port 3.2 disable  
ꢂ8285> set port 3.2 enable vpi_vci:4.10 uni flow_control:off ilmi:off_sig_3_1  
ꢁ
ꢃ
•
Configure one PVC between the VDM port and the video source port, either  
local or remote, using the SET PVC command:  
ꢀSET PVC local_slot.port pvc_id remote_slot.port remote_hub_number path_type  
ꢁ
ꢃ
local_vpi remote_vpi bw_alloc bandwidth  
ꢂ
local_slot.port  
The slot and port number for a local end of the PVC.  
pvc_id  
This allows you to define multiple PVCs per port.  
remote_slot.port  
remote_hub_number  
The slot and port number for the other end of the PVC.  
The hub number (13th byte of the ATM address) of the  
other hub. Can match the local hub number for local  
PVCs.  
path_type  
local_vpi  
Specifies the type of virtual path connection.  
The vp.vc value for the local end of the PVC. See  
Table 5 for allowable values.  
remote_vpi  
bw_alloc  
The vp.vc value for the other end of the PVC. See  
Table 5 for allowable values.  
The bandwidth allocation algorithm to be used:  
− BEST_EFFORT  
− RESERVED_BANDWIDTH  
bandwidth  
The amount of bandwidth to allocate, if bw_alloc has  
been set to RESERVED_BANDWIDTH.  
Table 5. VC Values by Port for VDM Module (VP=0)  
Port  
First  
Second  
Third  
Fourth  
Fifth  
Sixth  
Seventh Eighth  
38 39  
VC  
32  
33  
34  
35  
36  
37  
Value  
With the following command, the video source, an IBM 8300 Video Access  
Node is directly connected to the 155 Mbps port on the base unit.  
ꢀ
ꢁ
ꢃ
ꢂ8285>set pvc 1.13 1 3.2 02 channel 0.33 0.33 best-effort  
Chapter 4. IBM 8285 ATM Modules 53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Reminder  
Remember that the vpi.vci pairs that you specify must match those  
configured in the devices at each end of the PVC. In this case, the VDM  
forces values of 0.32, 0.33, etc., but your source device must be configured to  
match the vpi.vci values that you configured above.  
4.6.3 Sample Scenarios  
The Video Distribution Module is designed to provide cost-effective distribution of  
video and audio programs, either real-time or from a server, to either a  
workgroup or an ATM network.  
It is ideal for such applications as distance learning, online education, and  
real-time news updates. Figure 20, Figure 21 on page 55, and Figure 22 on  
page 56 show some ways the Video Distribution Module can be used with the  
8285 switch  
Figure 20. Video Distribution Module Workgroup Configuration  
The first example, a workgroup configuration, shows how you might set up a  
very cost-effective stand-alone workgroup, providing video distribution from a  
video server to a group of users (with video connections) and/or TV monitors.  
54 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Figure 21. Video Distribution Module for Campus Video Distribution  
The second example shows how you can connect the workgroup into the  
backbone network to access additional video resources such as TV feeds and  
video servers, such as the IBM 8300 Video Access Node.  
Chapter 4. IBM 8285 ATM Modules 55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Figure 22. Video Distribution Module with ATM WAN for Enterprise Video Distribution  
The third example, shows how you might use the VDM module with the ATM  
WAN Module to provide access to video resources throughout the enterprise  
using publicly available ATM WAN services, accessed with the ATM WAN  
Module at speeds from E3 to OC-3/STM-1.  
56 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
4.7 ATM 4-Port TR/Ethernet Bridge Module  
The ATM TR/Ethernet Bridge Module is a two-slot module that functions as a  
multiport bridge providing a simple way to connect shared media LAN segments  
to a high-speed ATM backbone. This is an ideal way to begin a migration to an  
ATM backbone, especially for those customers running flat or bridged networks  
today, since it is completely transparent to your shared media users.  
The main features of this module are:  
•
Provides four external ports for interconnection to either Ethernet (IEEE 802.3  
and DIX V2) or token-ring (IEEE 802.5) LANs. This module does not allow the  
mixing of various LAN types.  
•
Provides media-speed bridging between all four LAN ports even  
when configured for full-duplex token-ring.  
•
Provides a single UNI 3.0-compatible ATM interface to the ATM backplane of  
the 8285 Expansion Chassis.  
•
The ATM port supports clients for either Forum-compliant LAN Emulation  
(LANE) or IBM LAN Emulation (IBMLE). This enables traditional LAN users  
connected to one of the external ports to access transparently devices (for  
instance, servers) on a high-speed ATM ELAN, either LANE or IBMLE.  
Note  
The emulated LAN must be the same type of LAN as the one used on the  
four LAN ports. This means that the ATM 4-Port TR/Ethernet Bridge  
Module cannot be used to connect Ethernet devices to token-ring devices  
across an ATM network. However, such connectivity can be provided  
when the ATM TR/Ethernet Bridge Module is used in conjunction with an  
ATM router such as the IBM Multiprotocol Switched Services Server  
•
Supports standard source route bridging (SRB) when the ports are  
configured to use token-ring. This enables easy migration from existing  
token-ring backbones to high-speed ATM backbones.  
•
Supports transparent bridging when the ports are configured to use Ethernet.  
•
Supports 256 virtual circuits (VCs) over the ATM connection.  
•
Supports both Generic Flow Control (GFC) and Operation and  
Maintenance/Flow 5 (OAM-5) to throttle traffic in a congestion situation.  
•
Supports powerful, flexible filtering of inbound LAN traffic:  
−
−
In the token-ring environment, filters can be based on:  
-
-
-
-
-
Hop count  
MAC address  
Ring number  
Source service access point (SAP)  
Subnetwork access protocol (SNAP)  
In an Ethernet environment, filters can be based on:  
-
-
-
MAC address  
Source service access point (SAP)  
Ethertype  
Chapter 4. IBM 8285 ATM Modules 57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
These filters can be activated and prioritized at both the bridge level and  
the port level to provide even greater control over your network traffic.  
•
•
Comes with an easy-to-learn, easy-to-use graphical configuration program to  
simplify the task of configuring and managing the bridge module.  
Management of the ATM LAN Bridge module is done using SNMP. The  
SNMP agent within the module supports various MIBs.  
Note  
The SNMP agent in this module is accessible via IP over any of the ATM  
or LAN ports. Since the ATM port supports only LANE or IBMLE, any  
ATM-attached management station must support LANE or IBMLE. This  
implies that ATM-attached stations using Classical IP over ATM (RFC  
1577) cannot communicate with this module directly over ATM. However,  
an ATM router, such as the IBM Multiprotocol Switched Services Server,  
can interconnect ELANs running CIP and LANE, and provide SNMP  
access at the IP layer.  
4.7.1.1 LAN Ports  
The ATM TR/Ethernet Bridge Module has four LAN ports that can be configured  
(via the configuration program) to be used either as token-ring or as Ethernet  
ports.  
Ports 1 and 3 on the module are always accessed via an RJ-45 interface for both  
token-ring and Ethernet.  
Ports 2 and 4 can be accessed via the following interfaces:  
•
An RJ-45 interface that can be used by token-ring or Ethernet  
•
An AUI interface that can be used by Ethernet only  
4.7.1.2 ATM Port  
The ATM port on the ATM-LAN bridge does not have an external interface and  
communicates with the switch-on-a-chip and the 8285 ATM Control Point via the  
ATM backplane in the 8285 Expansion Chassis. The ATM interface complies with  
UNI 3.0 specifications.  
4.7.1.3 RS-232 Console Port  
In addition to the LAN ports, the ATM TR/Ethernet Bridge Module has an RS-232  
console port (also known as a service port). The service port enables you to  
connect a workstation to the ATM TR/Ethernet Bridge Module to load new  
configuration, microcode, etc.  
Note: After the initial configuration, you can also access the ATM TR/Ethernet  
Bridge Module inband through LAN or ATM ports to load new configuration,  
microcode, etc.  
4.7.2 Sample Configurations Using ATM TR/Ethernet Bridge Module  
The following sections show you some examples of using the ATM 4-Port  
TR/Ethernet Bridge Module.  
58 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
4.7.2.1 Local LAN to LAN Server Bridging  
Figure 23 shows an example of using the ATM-LAN bridge as a means of  
bridging three token-ring LANs together while providing all users, including the  
ATM25 users, with access to a LAN server. Note the console connects to the  
base unit and to the bridge module; this is required for the initial configuration of  
the bridge module.  
Figure 23. Local LAN to ATM Server Bridging  
Figure 24 on page 60 shows an example of using the ATM-LAN bridge as a  
means of bridging three Ethernet LANs together while providing all users,  
including the ATM25 users, with access to both a LAN server and to an  
ATM-attached server for very demanding applications.  
Chapter 4. IBM 8285 ATM Modules 59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Figure 24. Local LAN Bridging and ATM Server Access  
4.7.2.2 Campus LAN Interconnect and ATM Server Access  
Figure 25 on page 61 shows an example of using the ATM-LAN bridge as a  
means of bridging four LANs together with four LANs remotely, interconnecting  
them with a high-speed ATM backbone while providing all users, including the  
ATM25 users, with access to an ATM-attached server for very demanding  
applications.  
Note  
All LANs configured on a specific module must be of the same type, Ethernet  
or token-ring. Moreover, the workstations connected to that port will only be  
able to communicate directly with other devices supporting that same kind of  
LAN type, whether natively (via another ATM/LAN bridge), or via LAN  
emulation. This limitation can be overcome using an ATM router such as the  
IBM Multiprotocol Switched Services Server.  
60 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Figure 25. Campus LAN Interconnect and ATM Server Access  
4.7.3 ATM TR/Ethernet Bridge Module and LAN Emulation  
The ATM TR/Ethernet Bridge Module provides connectivity between traditional  
LANs (token-ring or Ethernet) and ATM networks by sending LAN frames  
transparently over the ATM network using LAN emulation to resolve  
MAC-to-ATM addresses.  
The IBM LAN emulation service allows the ATM network to emulate the services  
of either a token-ring or an Ethernet LAN. The LAN emulation service is  
provided jointly by a LAN emulation server (LE server) and the LAN emulation  
client (LE client) software running in the device attached to the ATM network.  
As an LE client, the ATM TR/Ethernet Bridge Module is able to find the correct  
ATM destination, to set up the connection, and to switch LAN traffic to that  
destination on behalf of a LAN endstation. It is self-learning, meaning that it is  
able to discover its ATM partners and to establish connections on an as-needed  
basis.  
Chapter 4. IBM 8285 ATM Modules 61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
4.7.4 Association between IP and MAC Address  
The ATM TR/Ethernet Bridge Module can be reached via four LAN ports and/or  
one ATM port, but it has only a single IP address that is assigned to it at the  
time of configuration. This IP address will be associated with the first port on the  
ATM TR/Ethernet Bridge Module that connects to a network successfully. If  
more than one port is configured for the ATM TR/Ethernet Bridge Module, there  
will be a race condition to determine which port is associated with the IP  
address.  
The MAC address of the port associated with the IP address will be used in the  
response to the ARP requests sent to the IP address of the ATM TR/Ethernet  
Bridge Module, regardless of the port on which the ARP request is received. If  
the port which is associated with the IP address of the ATM TR/Ethernet Bridge  
Module becomes disabled (say the cable is disconnected), the IP-to-MAC  
address association will remain unchanged. This means that the ATM  
TR/Ethernet Bridge Module will still respond to ARP requests with the MAC  
address of the port that was initially associated with the IP address of the ATM  
TR/Ethernet Bridge Module. This ensures that the ARP table entry in the  
stations that communicate with the ATM TR/Ethernet Bridge Module via the IP  
will still be valid regardless of the fact that the port with that MAC address may  
be down.  
If the ATM TR/Ethernet Bridge Module is reset and the MAC address of another  
port is associated with the IP address of the ATM TR/Ethernet Bridge Module,  
the ARP table entry in the stations that were communicating with the ATM  
TR/Ethernet Bridge Module will become invalid. Those stations will not be able  
to communicate with the ATM-LAN Bridge module via IP until their ARP table  
entry is aged-out or is deleted by the user to allow the IP station to discover the  
new MAC address associated with the ATM TR/Ethernet Bridge Module.  
Therefore, if you have problems communicating with the ATM TR/Ethernet  
Bridge Module via IP, one of the first things that you can do is to delete the ARP  
entry in your IP workstation to enable it to rediscover the ATM TR/Ethernet  
Bridge Module via the ARP process.  
4.7.5 ATM TR/Ethernet Bridge Module Configuration Utility Program  
The Configuration Utility Program is a DOS/Windows-based application that  
enables a user to modify the ATM TR/Ethernet Bridge Module′s configuration  
parameters, to change the operating code, and to use minimal mode. The  
following is the list of the functions that can be performed using the  
Configuration Utility Program:  
•
Create a bridge profile  
•
Edit a bridge profile  
•
View a bridge profile  
•
Save a bridge profile to the hard disk  
•
Delete a bridge profile from the hard disk  
•
Send a bridge profile to the ATM TR/Ethernet Bridge Module  
•
Retrieve current configuration parameters from an ATM-LAN Bridge Module  
•
Load new operational parameters from an ATM-LAN Bridge Module  
•
View vital product data (VPD) for an ATM TR/Ethernet Bridge Module  
•
Erase the configuration for an ATM TR/Ethernet Bridge Module  
62 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
•
Perform a memory dump of the ATM TR/Ethernet Bridge Module  
To install the Configuration Utility Program, insert the diskette that contains the  
program in the diskette drive in your workstation, start Windows, and select Run  
from the Program Manager File menu. This procedure starts the execution of  
the install.exe file from the diskette, which installs the Configuration Utility  
Program. When the installation is complete, the ATM TR/Ethernet Bridge  
Module configuration group will appear as an icon on the Program Manager  
window (see Figure 26).  
Figure 26. ATM TR/Ethernet Bridge Module Configuration Window  
To use the Configuration Utility Program to manage the ATM TR/Ethernet Bridge  
Module, the workstation running this program must be able to access the ATM  
TR/Ethernet Bridge Module either via the service port or through a LAN or ATM  
port.  
To use the service port, the workstation must be directly attached to the serial  
EIA 232 port (labeled service on the ATM TR/Ethernet Bridge Module, see  
Figure 27 on page 64) and must use the Serial Line Internet Protocol (SLIP) to  
communicate with the ATM TR/Ethernet Bridge Module. Therefore, make sure  
that the TCP/IP protocol is running in the workstation, and that SLIP is correctly  
set up in the TCP/IP configuration.  
Chapter 4. IBM 8285 ATM Modules 63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Figure 27. The ATM TR/Ethernet Bridge Module Service Port Connection  
To access the ATM TR/Ethernet Bridge Module via a LAN or ATM port, the  
workstation running the Configuration Utility Program must have IP connectivity  
through the network (either directly or through bridges, routers, etc.) to be able  
to reach the ATM TR/Ethernet Bridge Module′s LAN or ATM port. In this case,  
the TCP/IP stack in the workstation must be configured to provide such a  
connectivity.  
Note: At the initial startup of the ATM TR/Ethernet Bridge Module, you must use  
the direct connection to access the module in order to load a valid configuration.  
After that, you may use either direct or LAN/ATM connections to access the ATM  
TR/Ethernet Bridge Module for subsequent configurations.  
The Configuration Utility Program provides a set of windows that allow you to  
configure and manage the ATM TR/Ethernet Bridge Module. Figure 28 on  
page 65 shows how you can navigate between various windows provided by the  
Configuration Utility Program.  
64 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Figure 28. Windows Displayed by the ATM TR/Ethernet Bridge Module Configurator  
For more information about how to install and use the Configuration Utility  
Program, please refer to Nways 8285 ATM TR/Ethernet LAN Bridge Module:  
Installation and User′s Guide, SA33-0361.  
Chapter 4. IBM 8285 ATM Modules 65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
4.7.6 Running and Stored Configuration Parameters  
When the ATM TR/Ethernet Bridge Module is running, there are always the  
following two sets of parameters stored:  
•
Running parameters  
These are the parameter values that are in use by the operational code.  
•
Stored parameters  
These are the parameter values that exist in FLASH memory and are used  
only during the startup.  
The stored parameters in the FLASH memory can be changed using the  
Configuration Utility Program by downloading new values for the configuration  
parameters. This can be done by creating a file of new parameter values (called  
profile) and sending this file to the ATM TR/Ethernet Bridge Module. To use new  
parameters as the running parameters, you need to restart the ATM TR/Ethernet  
Bridge Module.  
Once the ATM TR/Ethernet Bridge Module is in operational mode, you can only  
view and change the stored parameters using the Configuration Utility Program.  
To view and change the running parameters, you must use an SNMP  
management station.  
66 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
4.8 ATM WAN Module  
The ATM WAN Module is a single-slot WAN concentrator module that has the  
following characteristics:  
•
Provides wide-area access to campus ATM networks at speeds ranging from  
E3 (34.368 Mbps) to OC3/STM-1 (155.520 Mbps), when the bandwidth  
management capabilities of an external ATM WAN switch are not desired.  
•
Supports switch-to-switch and switch-to-server connections at speeds up to  
OC3/STM-1.  
•
Interfaces directly to the circuit installed by your service provider.  
•
Supports both UNI and NNI.  
•
Supports reserved bandwidth (RB) service (QOS class 1 under UNI 3.0).  
•
Is hot-pluggable in any available slot in the 8285 Expansion Chassis.  
•
Supports both internal and external clocking.  
•
Up to 3 ATM WAN Modules can be supported in the 8285 Expansion Chassis,  
providing up to 6 ATM WAN ports.  
•
Features four standard interfaces:  
−
−
Two backplane interfaces:  
-
-
An ATM backplane interface, which enables both data and control  
flows to the switch-on-a-chip and the 8285 ATM Control Point,  
respectively.  
A standard tri-channel interface, which provides power and other  
control signals.  
Two I/O interfaces, which enable the attachment of any combination of  
the following I/O cards:  
-
-
-
-
-
-
1-port E3 I/O card (E3: 34.368 Mbps) BNC interface  
1-port DS3 I/O card (DS-3/T3: 44.736 Mbps) BNC interface  
1-port OC3 I/O card (SMF) (OC3: 155.520 Mbps) SC interface  
1-port OC3 I/O card (MMF) (OC3: 155.520 Mbps) SC interface  
1-port STM1 I/O card (SMF) (STM-1: 155.520 Mbps) SC interface  
1-port STM1 I/O card (MMF) (STM-1: 155.520 Mbps) SC interface  
For each of these cards, the receive port is the left one, and the transmit  
port is the right one.  
4.8.1 A02 WAN ATM Physical Interface Supported  
The following table lists the ATM physical interfaces with WAN module interfaces  
supported:  
Table 6 (Page 1 of 2). ATM Physical Interface Support  
Layer  
Rate (Mbps)  
Cable  
Coding  
A02 WAN  
Support  
OC-48  
2488  
SMF  
SMF  
SMF  
STS-48  
No  
OC-24  
OC-12  
1244  
STS-24  
No  
No  
622.08  
STS-12c  
Chapter 4. IBM 8285 ATM Modules 67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Table 6 (Page 2 of 2). ATM Physical Interface Support  
Layer  
Rate (Mbps)  
Cable  
Coding  
A02 WAN  
Support  
STS-12c  
622.08  
155.52  
155.52  
155.52  
155.52  
155.52  
100  
UTP-5  
(4 pairs)  
No  
OC-3/STM-1  
STS-3c  
STS-3c  
155  
MMF/SMF  
MMF/SMF  
UTP-5/STP  
MMF  
NRZI  
Yes  
NRZI  
Yes  
NRZI  
No  
8B/10B  
8B/10B  
4B/5B  
CAP-16  
NRZI  
No  
155  
STP  
No  
TAXI  
STS-1  
DS-3/T3  
E3  
MMF  
No  
51.84  
44.7  
UTP-3  
No  
Coax (BNC)  
Coax (BNC)  
Bipolar-AMI  
Bipolar-AMI  
UTP/STP  
Yes  
34.4  
NRZI  
Yes (Note 1)  
E1  
2.048  
1.544  
25.6  
NRZI  
No  
No  
No  
T1  
NRZI  
25  
4B/5B  
Note 1: Country Homologation dependency.  
4.8.2 VPD Installation Considerations  
Each I/O card ships with a special VPD (vital product data) PROM  
(Programmable Read-Only Memory) chip. Before you can install the A02 WAN  
module, you must attach the I/O cards and install the VPD chips. Details on the  
installation process can be found in IBM 8260/8285 ATM WAN Module:  
Installation and User′s Guide. The following are a few additional considerations:  
•
The VPD PROM sockets are next to their respective I/O cards. That is, the  
left (or top) socket is matched with the left I/O card, while the right (or  
bottom) socket is matched with the right I/O card. Arrows have been placed  
on both sockets pointing to their respective I/O cards.  
•
There is only one correct way to insert the VPD PROM in each socket. This  
can be done by aligning the notch on the chip with the notch on the socket.  
However, inserting the chip backwards will not damage it; the port simply  
will not be able to register properly with the 8285 ATM Control Point.  
Reversing the chip should solve the problem.  
•
Any VPD PROM that ships with an A02 WAN I/O card can be used with any of  
the other I/O cards without affecting card function. However, the card will  
not be listed properly in the configuration, which could be very confusing to  
someone managing the network. It is strongly advised that you carefully  
match the VPD PROM part numbers with their respective I/O cards as listed  
in Table 7 on page 69  
68 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Table 7. A02 WAN I/O Card VPD Part Numbers  
Card Name  
Feature Code  
Part Number  
VPD Part Number  
1-port E3 I/O card  
8501  
51H4335  
51H4570  
51H4604  
(Switzerland)  
51H4605 (Sweden)  
51H4605 (UK)  
51H4606 (New  
Zealand)  
1-port DS3 I/O  
card  
8502  
8503  
8504  
8505  
8506  
51H4338  
51H4558  
51H4673  
51H4557  
51H4674  
51H4571  
51H4572  
51H4852  
51H4573  
51H4853  
1-port OC3 I/O  
card (SMF)  
1-port OC3 I/O  
card (MMF)  
1-port STM1 I/O  
card (SMF)  
1-port STM1 I/O  
card (MMF)  
4.8.3 Sample Scenario  
The ATM WAN Module is designed to provide high-speed access to the WAN  
network for all 8285-attached devices, whether native ATM or connected via the  
ATM 4-Port TR/Ethernet Bridge Module.  
Figure 29 on page 70 shows some ways the ATM WAN Module can be used with  
the 8285.  
Chapter 4. IBM 8285 ATM Modules 69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Figure 29. A Typical ATM WAN Module Configuration  
The scenario depicts a possible client/server environment in which the  
workstation must access both servers, and in which both servers must exchange  
information such as files and images. The ATM WAN Module allows each site to  
access the common backbone network at the most cost-effective speed, from E-3  
for the workstation to DS-3/T3 and even STM-1/OC-3 for the servers.  
70 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
4.9 LAN Switching Modules  
Attention  
The following section is included as a preview of module support that might  
become available in 1997.  
The 8285 is capable of supporting the following LAN switching modules:  
•
Token-Ring:  
−
−
−
2-slot 8272 ATM/LAN Switch Module  
3-slot 8272 ATM/LAN Switch Module  
2-slot 8272 LAN Switch Module with the following:  
-
8272 LAN Switch ATM Backplane Upgradeꢀ1ꢁ  
3-slot 8272 LAN Switch Module with the following:  
8272 LAN Switch ATM Backplane Upgradeꢀ2ꢁ  
Ethernet:  
−
-
•
−
−
−
2-slot 8271 ATM/LAN Switch Module  
3-slot 8271 ATM/LAN Switch Module  
2-slot 8271 LAN Switch Module with the following:  
-
8271 LAN Switch ATM Backplane Upgradeꢀ3ꢁ  
3-slot 8271 LAN Switch Module with the following:  
8271 LAN Switch ATM Backplane Upgradeꢀ4ꢁ  
−
-
Notes:  
ꢀ1ꢁBecomes functionally identical to 2-slot 8272 ATM/LAN Switch Module.  
ꢀ2ꢁBecomes functionally identical to 3-slot 8272 ATM/LAN Switch Module.  
ꢀ3ꢁBecomes functionally identical to 2-slot 8271 ATM/LAN Switch Module.  
ꢀ4ꢁBecomes functionally identical to 3-slot 8271 ATM/LAN Switch Module.  
4.9.1 Description  
The LAN switch modules that could be supported by the 8285 provide existing  
LAN users high-performance, cost-effective access to the ATM backbone as well  
as media-speed LAN switching for microsegmentation.  
Direct ATM backplane connectivity allows segments of LAN users to be  
interconnected to other LANs users segment via LAN switching or high-speed  
ATM switching.  
These modules feature the following:  
•
Common Features:  
−
Support media-speed transmission on all ports simultaneously, even in  
full-duplex mode  
−
Support half- or full-duplex transmission on each port independently  
Chapter 4. IBM 8285 ATM Modules 71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
−
−
Support port mirroring (TokenProbe or Etherprobe) whereby one port can  
monitor any LAN port for the purposes of connecting a LAN analysis tool  
Support three switching modes to optimize performance:  
1. Cut-Through Switching  
In this mode, the switch reads in the address portion of the frame  
header, makes a forwarding decision strictly based on destination  
address, and forwards the header and the remainder of the packet to  
the destination port while the packet is still arriving. This optimizes  
forwarding performance, but does not filter out bad frames.  
2. Store-and-Forward Switching  
In this mode, the switch reads the entire packet into a buffer and  
performs a full CRC check on it before forwarding good packets to  
the destination port. This eliminates bad frames, but with a greater  
latency.  
3. Adaptive Switching  
This feature allows the switch to run in cut-through mode (for high  
performance and low latency) until the number of bad packets  
received surpasses a user-settable threshold within a given period of  
time. It then automatically switches to store-and-forward mode to  
avoid propagating bad packets. When the number of bad packets  
falls to acceptable levels, the switch reverts automatically to  
cut-through mode. The net result is to give the highest possible  
performance with the least number of errors.  
−
−
Provides a Virtual Switch capability that allows the switch to operate as  
though it were actually several (up to 8) switches. That is to say, traffic  
arriving on a port can only be forwarded to ports within its group. This  
also means that broadcasts are isolated within each virtual switch.  
Support inbound MAC address filtering which allows:  
-
-
-
Blocking of packet based on source or the destination MAC address.  
Forwarding to specific ports based on source MAC address.  
Forcing traffic to specific ports based on the destination MAC  
address.  
•
Token-Ring Features:  
−
Supports 8 shielded TRN UTP/STP RJ45 lobe ports using either UTP  
category 3,4, or 5 cabling, or STP cabling.  
Note  
These ports do not support RI or RO connections. Use the 2-Port  
Fiber RI/RO UFC to handle RI or RO connections.  
−
Have either two UFC slots (2-slot modules) or four UFC slots (3-slot  
modules), which can contain any combination of the following UFCs:  
-
4-Port UTP/STP  
This UFC adds an additional four switched TRN ports to the module.  
•
Interface: RJ45  
•
Cabling: STP; UTP categories 3, 4, and 5  
72 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
-
-
2-Port Fiber RI/RO UFC  
This UFC enables switching between token-ring segments as far as 2  
km away.  
•
Interface: ST  
•
Cabling: Multimode fiber  
1-Port ATM 155 Mbps Multimode Fiber UFC  
This UFC provides an ATM interface that enables token-ring attached  
users to interoperate with ATM-attached devices that comply with the  
ATM Forum LAN Emulation specifications:  
•
Interface: SC  
•
Cabling: Multimode fiber  
•
Supports token-ring/IEEE 802.5 emulated LAN types.  
-
1-Port RMON UFC  
−
−
Support up to 1792 filter table entries per port, but no more than 10,000  
filter table entries per module. These filter table entries can be either  
MAC addresses or source-route descriptor entries. These entries can be  
aged-out based upon configurable parameters at the port and module  
level.  
Support a bandwidth aggregation feature, TokenPipe, which allows  
different LAN switching modules to be connected by up to four full-duplex  
connections, providing up to 128 Mbps of bandwidth between 8272  
switching modules.  
−
−
Support source route bridging that is fully compatible with existing  
source route bridges.  
Support source route switching, in which frames are forwarded based on  
destination MAC addresses for locally attached stations and based on  
the routing information within the token-ring frame for non-locally  
attached stations (as is the case with source routing bridges to a  
maximum of seven bridge hops).  
Note  
If the module is configured for source route switching, all token-ring  
LAN ports and emulated token-ring LAN ports share the same ring  
number.  
−
−
Gather statistics by:  
-
-
-
Port  
Connected station  
Switch  
Support Plug-and-Play installation by automatically initializing as a  
multiport transparent bridge. This allows the module to learn the  
network addresses and eliminates all pre-installation configuration  
requirements. In most cases, however, you will eventually want to  
customize this initial configuration with such parameters as an IP  
address, SNMP parameters, and port filters.  
Each port automatically identifies what kind of token-ring connection it  
has, determining whether it is:  
Chapter 4. IBM 8285 ATM Modules 73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
-
-
-
-
-
A lobe port to another concentrator  
A dedicated connection to a single device  
A connection to another token ring switch  
Operating at 4 or 16 Mbps  
Operating in half- or full-duplex mode  
These automatic configuration capabilities can be disabled, for instance  
when connecting to an auto-speed-sensing adapter.  
−
−
Support a transparent spanning tree configuration fully compliant with  
IEEE 802.1d standards. This ensures that there is only one path active to  
any segment in the network. The spanning tree function has  
configurable parameters for both port cost and port priority, enabling  
more accurate management of your network topology.  
Support a maximum frame size of 4540 bytes. In cut-through mode,  
frames larger than 4540 bytes will be truncated and terminated with an  
abort sequence. In store-and-forward mode, the switch port will reject  
frames larger than 4540 bytes and will generate an error on the port.  
•
Ethernet Features:  
−
Support 12 10Base-T RJ-45 MDI-X ports using standard UTP category 3,  
4, or 5 cabling or STP cabling.  
Note  
When using STP cabling, the patch cables at the switch port and at  
the workstation port should have an impedance-matching balun.  
−
Have either two UFC slots (2-slot modules) or four UFC slots (3-slot  
modules), which can contain any combination of the following UFCs:  
-
-
-
4-port Ethernet 10Base-T UFC:  
This UFC adds an additional four switched Ethernet ports to the  
module:  
•
Interface: RJ45  
•
Cabling: STP; UTP categories 3, 4, and 5  
3-port Ethernet 10Base-FL UFC:  
This UFC enables switching between Ethernet segments that are  
physically distant (up to 2 kilometers away) from the module:  
•
Interface: ST  
•
Cabling: Multimode fiber  
1-port Ethernet 100BaseT UFC:  
This UFC provides one 100BaseT Ethernet port for a connection to a  
100BaseT backbone segment or directly to a LAN station or server  
equipped with a 100BaseT Ethernet adapter:  
•
Interface: RJ45  
•
Cabling: STP; UTP categories 3, 4, and 5  
-
1-port Ethernet 100BaseFx UFC:  
74 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
This UFC provides one 100BaseFx Ethernet port for a connection to a  
100BaseFx backbone segment or directly to a LAN station or server  
equipped with a 100BaseFx Ethernet adapter as far as 2 km away:  
•
Interface: ST  
•
Cabling: Multimode fiber  
-
1-Port ATM 155 Mbps Multimode Fiber UFC  
This UFC provides an ATM interface that enables Ethernet-attached  
users to interoperate with ATM-attached devices that comply with the  
ATM Forum LAN Emulation specifications:  
•
Interface: SC  
•
Cabling: Multimode fiber  
•
Supports Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 emulated LAN types.  
−
−
Support up to 1790 active Ethernet addresses per port, but no more than  
10,000 addresses per module. These addresses can be aged-out based  
upon configurable parameters at the port and module level.  
Support a bandwidth aggregation feature, EtherPipe, which allows  
different LAN switching modules to be connected by up to four full-duplex  
connections, providing up to 80 Mbps of bandwidth between 8271  
switching modules.  
−
−
Gather statistics by:  
-
-
-
Port  
Connected station  
Switch  
Support Plug-and-Play installation by automatically initializing as a  
multi-port transparent bridge. This allows the module to learn the  
network addresses and eliminates all pre-installation configuration  
requirements. In most cases, however, you will eventually want to  
customize this initial configuration with such parameters as an IP  
address, SNMP parameters, and port filters.  
Table 8 and Table 9 provide comparisons of the token-ring modules and the  
Ethernet modules, respectively.  
Table 8. A Comparison of 8285 Token-Ring LAN Switch Modules  
Module  
Feature  
Maximum Number of Ports  
Copper  
Fiber  
ATM 155  
(RI/RO)  
2-slot 8272 ATM/LAN Switch Module  
3-slot 8272 ATM/LAN Switch Module  
5208  
5308  
16  
24  
4
8
2
4
Table 9 (Page 1 of 2). A Comparison of 8285 Ethernet LAN Switch Modules  
Module  
Feature  
Maximum Number of Ports  
10Base-T  
10Base-F  
100BaseT  
100BaseF  
ATM 155  
2-slot 8271 ATM/LAN  
Switch Module  
5212  
20  
6
2
2
2
Chapter 4. IBM 8285 ATM Modules 75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Table 9 (Page 2 of 2). A Comparison of 8285 Ethernet LAN Switch Modules  
Module  
Feature  
Maximum Number of Ports  
10Base-T  
10Base-F  
12  
100BaseT  
100BaseF  
ATM 155  
3-slot 8271 ATM/LAN  
Switch Module  
5312  
28  
4
4
4
4.9.1.1 ATM UFC I/O Feature  
There are 2 ATM UFCs available, one ATM 1-port UFC for the Ethernet LAN  
switches and one ATM 1-port UFC for the token-ring LAN switches.  
ATM 155 Mbps UFC: The ATM Multimode Fiber UFC achieves the ATM-to-LAN  
connection by providing an ATM Forum-compliant LAN emulation proxy client  
(LEC). It features the following:  
•
Supports a single ATM 155 Mbps multimode fiber interface with SC  
connectors.  
•
Supports SONET STS-3c framing.  
•
Supports both UNI 3.0 and UNI 3.1 in accordance with ATM Forum  
specifications.  
•
Supports switched virtual connections (SVCs) only and does not support  
permanent virtual connections (PVCs).  
•
Supports best effort (Unspecified QoS), variable bit rate (VBR), and  
continuous bit rate (CBR) connections in accordance with ATM Adaptation  
Layer 5 (AAL-5) specifications.  
•
Supports up to 3072 virtual channel connections (VCCs), requiring one VCC  
for each unique source/destination LEC pair.  
•
Supports up to eight emulated LANs (ELANs), each represented by a logical  
emulated LAN port (ELP), all sharing the same physical link to the ATM  
network. However, it is not possible to have two ELPs assigned to the same  
ELAN on a single ATM UFC.  
•
Does not support the VPI field of the virtual path/channel identifier.  
•
Supports up to eight LECs which are compatible with LES/LECS Version 1.0  
implementations. Each LEC can be pre-configured with the address of its  
required LAN Emulation Server (LES) or can discover the address of its LES  
dynamically via communication with a LAN Emulation Configuration Server  
(LECS).  
•
Supports full media-speed throughput in both directions on its full-duplex  
ATM connection, assembling or disassembling an aggregate of  
approximately 177 Kbps (thousand 64-byte frames per second).  
•
Supports the following management interfaces:  
−
−
−
LEC MIB (ATM Forum LEC Management Specification Version 1.0)  
AToM MIB (RFC 1695)  
Interface group of MIB-II (RFC 1213 and 1573), enhanced to include ATM  
The switch′s SNMP agent is accessible though any of the Ethernet or  
token-ring LAN ports. When the LAN switch is configured with an ATM UFC,  
the switch′s SNMP agent is also accessible via an emulated LAN connection  
across an ATM port.  
76 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Note  
If the module is configured for source route switching, all token-ring LAN  
ports and emulated token-ring LAN ports share the same ring number.  
4.9.2 Sample Scenarios  
The 8285 LAN switching modules complement the IBM 8285 Base Unit′s  
cost-effective ATM25 capabilities and can serve as the basis for a smooth  
migration from traditional shared-media LANs to the high-performance ATM  
networks of the future. Here are some scenarios that could be implemented.  
4.9.2.1 Stand-Alone Token-Ring Migration  
In this scenario, a workgroup of 80 users and 4 servers has run out of bandwidth  
on its local token-ring network. A very simple way to alleviate this constraint is  
to implement an 8285 switch with a 3-slot 8272 ATM/LAN Switch Module right in  
the same wiring closet, as illustrated in Figure 30.  
Figure 30. Relieving Token-Ring Congestion with LAN Switching Module  
The first change to make is to move all four servers off of the common ring and  
give them dedicated bandwidth. If we use full-duplex token-ring adapters, such  
as the IBM Auto LANStreamer MC32 Adapter or the IBM Auto LANStreamer PCI  
Adapter, we can enable the servers for full-duplex operation, connect them to a  
LAN switch port, and let the LAN switch module automatically provide each  
server with 32 Mbps of dedicated bandwidth.  
In addition, if we choose we can take advantage of the 8285 switch′s 155 Mbps  
ATM port by installing a high-performance ATM adapter, such as the IBM  
Turboways 155 Mbps adapter, in our most heavily used server.  
Chapter 4. IBM 8285 ATM Modules 77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Next, we can use microsegmentation to reduce the number of workstations that  
have to share the token-ring′s 16 Mbps of bandwidth. The segment size is  
limited only by the granularity of the token-ring concentrators you are using. If  
you are using a port-switching hub, such as the IBM 8260 Nways Multiprotocol  
Switching Hub, you can make your segments any size from two devices up to the  
architectural limit of the token-ring. And for those users who need the most  
performance that token-rings can provide, simply connect them directly to a port  
on the LAN switch module. This will provide them with up to 32 Mbps of  
dedicated bandwidth. In this case, since we have already used up 3 of our 24  
available token-ring ports for the servers, we can have as many as 21 segments  
switched by the LAN Switching module.  
Finally, to further reduce the number of workstations sharing token-ring  
bandwidth, you can begin to move some of your power users directly to the ATM  
network by installing ATM25 adapter cards, such as the IBM Turboways 25  
adapter, in their workstations, running the simple migration utility, and  
connecting them to an ATM 25 Mbps port on the IBM 8285 Base Unit. They now  
have dedicated bandwidth of 25 Mbps to their desktop and access to all of the  
resources of the ATM network, while still retaining access to the shared media  
resources, such as the full-duplex token-ring servers. We do that with 12 of our  
workstations, reducing the number of workstations on shared token ring  
segments to 68.  
Table 10 illustrates the before and after effects of our changes on the available  
bandwidth.  
Table 10. Bandwidth Improvement with Token-Ring LAN Switch Module  
Device  
Maximum Bandwidth Available  
After...(Kbps)  
Bandwidth  
Improvement  
Ratioꢀ2ꢁ  
Server  
Offload  
ATM  
Server  
Micro-  
segment  
-ationꢀ1ꢁ  
ATM25  
Offload  
Primary Server  
32000  
32000  
200  
155000  
32000  
200  
155000  
32000  
4000  
155000  
32000  
811x  
167x  
25x  
Secondary Server  
Token-Ring  
Desktop  
4942ꢀ3ꢁ  
ATM Desktop  
200  
200  
4000  
25000  
130x  
Note:  
ꢀ1ꢁIn this case assuming an even distribution of four workstations per  
segment on each of 21 available token-ring segments.  
ꢀ2ꢁCalculated by dividing the total bandwidth available after the change  
by the original bandwidth available per device, which was calculated by  
dividing the total bandwidth available by the number of devices sharing it.  
In this case, the original bandwidth calculation is: 16,000 Kbps/segment *  
1 segment / (80 users + 4 servers) = 191 Kbps/device.  
ꢀ3.ꢁThis is an average value. The 12 segments with three  
devices/segment would actually receive 5,333 Kbps while the remaining  
nine segments would have four devices apiece, each receiving 4,000  
Kbps.  
78 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Using a similar analysis, we can see in Table 11 on page 79, the bandwidth  
improvement possible for a constrained Ethernet environment of 40 users and 4  
servers. In this scenario, we have added an 8285 switch with an 3-slot 8271  
ATM/LAN Switch Module as shown in Figure 31 on page 79. In this case,  
however, rather than move our secondary servers to full-duplex Ethernet, we will  
go directly to 100base-Tx, providing each secondary server with 100 Mbps of  
dedicated bandwidth.  
Figure 31. Relieving Ethernet Congestion with LAN Switching Module  
Note  
The choice of 100Base-Tx in this scenario is merely to demonstrate the  
versatility of the LAN Switch modules in conjunction with the 8285 switch.  
For the purposes of the example, we could have just as easily moved all of  
the servers to ATM directly, providing 155 Mbps to each server. Or we could  
have connected a shared 100Base-Tx segment to the LAN switch module to  
access resources on that segment and to provide ATM access to the  
100Base-Tx users.  
Table 11 illustrates the before and after results of our changes.  
Table 11 (Page 1 of 2). Bandwidth Improvement with Ethernet LAN Switch Module  
Device  
Maximum Bandwidth Available (Kbps)  
Bandwidth  
Improvement  
Ratioꢀ2ꢁ  
Server  
Offload  
ATM  
Server  
Micro-  
segment  
-ationꢀ1ꢁ  
ATM25  
Offload  
Primary Server  
100000  
100000  
155000  
100000  
155000  
100000  
155000  
100000  
682x  
440x  
Secondary Server  
Chapter 4. IBM 8285 ATM Modules 79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Table 11 (Page 2 of 2). Bandwidth Improvement with Ethernet LAN Switch Module  
Device  
Maximum Bandwidth Available (Kbps)  
Bandwidth  
Improvement  
Ratioꢀ2ꢁ  
Server  
Offload  
ATM  
Server  
Micro-  
segment  
-ationꢀ1ꢁ  
ATM25  
Offload  
Ethernet Desktop  
ATM Desktop  
250  
250  
250  
250  
4000  
4000  
5714ꢀ3ꢁ  
25x  
25000  
110x  
Note:  
ꢀ1ꢁIn this case assuming an even distribution of three workstations per  
segment on each of 16 available Ethernet segments.  
ꢀ2ꢁCalculated by dividing the total bandwidth available after the change  
by the original bandwidth available per device, which was calculated by  
dividing the total bandwidth available by the number of devices sharing it.  
In this case, the original bandwidth calculation is: 10,000 Kbps/segment *  
1 segment / (40 users + 4 servers) = 227 Kbps/device. To be fair, this is  
a nominal value: in reality, the available bandwidth on a shared Ethernet  
segment rarely exceeds 40-50% of the rated bandwidth because of  
collisions and re-transmissions.  
ꢀ3ꢁThis is an average value. The four segments with one device would  
actually receive 10,000 Kbps/device, while the remaining 12 segments  
would have two devices a piece, each receiving 5,000 Kbps.  
80 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Chapter 5. 8285 ATM Network Specifications  
This chapter gives ATM connections and Traffic management specifications  
supported by the 8285.  
5.1 ATM Connections  
The IBM 8285 provides support for the following types of connections:  
•
Permanent Virtual Connection (PVC)  
Two types of PVCs are supported:  
−
−
PVC for virtual channel connections (VCC)  
PVC for virtual path connection (VPC), also known as permanent virtual  
path (PVP)  
•
•
Permanent Virtual Path (PVP)  
Note that PVPs are not supported when they span over NNI links. However,  
PVPs are supported over SSI links.  
Switched Virtual Connection (SVC)  
Note: Switched virtual path (SVP) is not supported by the IBM 8285.  
5.1.1 Supported VPI and VCI Range  
The virtual path identifiers (VPIs) and virtual channel identifiers (VCIs) supported  
by the 8285 are depending the control point version.  
Version 1.3:  
For the 25 Mbps port:  
•
VPIs are in the range 0-3.  
•
VCIs are in the range of 32-1023.  
For the other ports:  
•
VPIs are in the range 0-15.  
•
VCIs are in the range of 32-1023.  
Note that certain workstation adapters have limited addressing capability as far  
as the supported VPIs and VCIs are concerned. These limitations are based on  
the number of bits in the ATM header that are recognizable by the workstation  
adapter and are defined in the ILMI packets exchanged by the adapter. The 8285  
dynamically adjusts the supported VPI and VCI range on a port to the capability  
of the attached workstation at the ILMI exchange.  
Version 1.4:  
For the 25 Mbps ports:  
One of the following three modes (ranges) can be selected:  
•
VPI/VCI: 0 bit/12 bits (VPI=0, VCI=0 through 4095)  
•
VPI/VCI: 2 bits/10 bits (VPI=0 through 3, VCI=0 through 1023)  
•
VPI/VCI: 4 bits/8 bits (VPI=0 through 15, VCI=0 through 2556)  
Copyright IBM Corp. 1996  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
For the other ports:  
One of the following three modes (ranges) can be selected:  
•
VPI/VCI: 0 bit/14 bits (VPI=0, VCI=0 through 16383)  
•
VPI/VCI: 4 bits/10 bits (VPI=0 through 15, VCI=0 through 1023)  
•
VPI/VCI: 6 bits/8 bits (VPI=0 through 63, VCI=0 through 256)  
For more details refer to 3.3.4, “Control Point V1.4” on page 31.  
5.1.2 Supported Virtual Connection Types  
Table 12 shows the type of virtual connections supported by the IBM 8285.  
Table 12. Supported Connection Type by the A-CPSW Module  
Connection Type  
Unidirectional point-to-point  
Supported?  
No  
Bidirectional point-to-point with symmetric bandwidth  
Bidirectional point-to-point with asymmetric bandwidth  
Unidirectional point-to-multipoint  
Yes  
No ꢀ1ꢁ  
Yes  
No  
Bidirectional point-to-multipoint  
multipoint-to-multipoint  
No  
ꢀ1ꢁ If a call setup request with asymmetrical bandwidth requirement is received,  
the 8285 will establish the call with the higher peak rate used for both directions.  
5.1.3 Maximum Number of Connections Supported  
The maximum number of supported connections depends on their type  
(point-to-point or point-to-multipoint) and for point-to-multipoint connections on  
the number of parties per connection. The following are the rules you can use to  
determine the number of connections supported in your environment:  
•
The IBM 8285 has 4,096 connection control blocks.  
•
Each point-to-point connection requires two control blocks.  
•
Each party on a point-to-multipoint connection requires one connection  
control block.  
•
The maximum number of point-to-point connections supported by an IBM  
8285 with its expansion is 2,048 regardless the expansion unit installation.  
•
The maximum number of point-to-multipoint trees supported is 127.  
•
The maximum number of parties supported for all the point-to-multipoint  
trees is 1024.  
•
The maximum number of PVCs is 100.  
•
The maximum number of point-to-point connection per media modules or  
base unit is 2048 with Version 1.4 (was 992).  
•
The maximum number of parties for point-to-multipoint connections for the  
base unit or per media module is 1024.  
•
The maximum number of point-to-point connection per 8285 port is 2048.  
82 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
•
The maximum number of VPI connections supported per 25 Mbps port is 16  
and 64 for the others.  
5.1.4 How PVCs Are Supported  
To support PVCs, the 8285 maps them internally onto SVCs. This allows the PVC  
to be automatically reestablished using an alternate path in case of a link or  
node failure on the original path supporting the PVC. In addition, the parameters  
specified for the setting of the PVCs are saved in the NVRAM of the 8285 to  
provide automatic reestablishment of the PVC after the 8285 power off or reset  
condition.  
Note that the information about PVCs is only stored in NVRAM after the  
connection is activated. This is to ensure that only the current and valid PVCs  
are restarted.  
When an 8285 is restarted and an SVC is to be established before all the PVCs  
have been reestablished, a problem could occur if that SVC is allocated a label  
that is owned by one of the PVCs. To overcome this problem, the 8285 always  
checks to see if a label is not reserved by a PVC before allocating it to an SVC.  
5.1.5 How to Configure PVCs  
PVCs can be set up using the command line interface or the Nways Campus  
manager program. The following example shows how to configure a PVC for the  
configuration shown in Figure 32.  
Figure 32. Sample PVC Configuration  
Chapter 5. 8285 ATM Network Specifications 83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
ꢀ
ꢁ
ꢃ
ꢂ8285A>set pvc 2.1 100 1.9 2 channel 0.500 0400 best_effort  
Note that in this example, we have chosen the following attributes for the PVC:  
•
Workstation attached on the local 8285: slot.port 2.1.  
•
Workstation attached on the remote 8285: slot.port 1.9.  
•
PVC_id = 100.  
This is an arbitrary number that you can use to identify the PVC on various  
displays.  
•
Remote hub identifier = 2.  
This identifies the hub number (HN) of the remote hub (the hub on which the  
PVC terminates) within the cluster.  
•
•
•
VPI/VCI on the local hub:  
−
−
VPI = 1  
VCI = 500  
VPI/VCI on the remote hub:  
−
−
VPI = 0  
VCI = 400  
PVC type = best_effort.  
The VPI/VCI values chosen for each port must be free at the time of defining the  
PVC. You can find out the VPI/VCI values that are currently allocated to the  
other connections on the port by using the Nways Campus manager ATM for  
AIX. If you are not sure which VPI/VCI is available for allocation, you may use  
the following command, which will allow the 8285 Control-Point available VPI/VCI  
pair that is assigned for the PVC on each port:  
ꢀ
ꢁ
ꢃ
ꢂ8285A>set pvc 2.1 100 1.9 2 channel * * best_effort  
You can display the configuration information about a specific PVC or all the  
PVCs using the SHOW PVC command. The following example shows the output  
that will be displayed as a result of this command:  
ꢀ8285A> set pvc 2.1 100 1.9 2 channel 0.400 0.500 best_effort  
ꢁ
PVC set and started.  
8285A> show pvc all  
Local endpoint  
| Remote endpoint |  
-----------------------------|-------------------|  
Port id type Vpi/Vci | Port Vpi/Vci HNb| role |QOS| Status  
-----------------------------|-------------------|---------|---|--------  
2.01  
100 PTP-PVC 0/500 |1.09  
0/400  
0/500  
2| Primary | BE|Active  
1|Secondary| BE|Active  
1.09 1001 PTP-PVC 0/400 |2.01  
ꢂ8285A>  
ꢃ
You may display additional information about the configuration of the PVC by  
using the verbose parameter in the SHOW PVC command as shown in the  
following example:  
84 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
ꢀ8285A> show pvc 2.1 100 verbose  
ꢁ
ꢃ
Local endpoint  
| Remote endpoint |  
-----------------------------|-------------------|  
Port id type Vpi/Vci | Port Vpi/Vci HNb| role |QOS| Status  
-----------------------------|-------------------|---------|---|--------  
2.01  
100 PTP-PVC 0/500 |1.09  
0/400  
2| Primary | BE|Active  
Remote address : 39.09.85.11.11.11.11.11.11.11.11.01.02  
Quality of Service : Best Effort.  
Last Active Date : 16:38:55 2 Nov 96 (0 failures)  
ꢂ8285A>  
5.1.6 How PVPs Are Supported  
PVPs are supported through the PVCs.  
5.1.7 How to Define PVPs  
PVPs can be set up using the command line interface or the Nways Campus  
manager program. The following example shows how to configure a PVC for the  
configuration shown in Figure 33 on page 86.  
ꢀ
ꢁ
ꢃ
ꢂ8285A>set pvc 2.7 100 1.9 2 path 14 15 best_effort  
Note that in this example the following attributes are defined for PVP:  
•
Slot.port on the local 8285 = 2.7.  
•
Slot.port on the remote 8285 = 1.9.  
•
PVP_id = 100.  
This is an arbitrary number that you can use to identify the PVP on various  
displays.  
•
Remote hub identifier = 2.  
This identifies the hub number (HN) of the remote hub (the hub on which the  
PVP terminates) within the cluster.  
•
•
•
VPI on the local hub = 14.  
VPI on the remote hub = 15.  
PVP type = best_effort.  
The VPI values chosen for each port must be free at the time of defining the PVP.  
You can find out the VPI values that are currently allocated to the other  
connection on the ports by using the Nways Campus manager ATM for AIX. If  
you are not sure which VPI is available for allocation, you may use the following  
command which will allow the 8285 Control-Point to select the VPI value that is  
assigned for the PVP on each port:  
ꢀ
ꢁ
ꢃ
ꢂ8285A>set pvc 2.7 100 1.9 2 path * * best_effort  
Chapter 5. 8285 ATM Network Specifications 85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Figure 33. Sample PVP Configuration  
You display configuration information about PVPs using the SHOW PVC  
command, as described in 5.1.5, “How to Configure PVCs” on page 83.  
The following is an example of the output display for a PVP.  
ꢀ8285A> set pvc 2.7 100 1.9 2 path 14 15 best_effort  
PVC set and started.  
8285A> show pvc all  
ꢁ
ꢃ
Local endpoint  
| Remote endpoint |  
-----------------------------|-------------------|  
Port id type Vpi/Vci | Port Vpi/Vci HNb| role |QOS| Status  
-----------------------------|-------------------|---------|---|---------  
2.07  
100 PTP-PVP 14/*  
| 1.09 15/*  
2| Primary | BE|Active  
ꢂ8285A>  
5.1.8 How a VPI/VCI Is Allocated to SVCs  
For virtual connections (both SVCs and PVCs), the VPI/VCI allocation is  
performed on a per-port basis.  
For an SVC, it′s always the 8285′s role to allocate any VPI/VCI used by the SVC  
at each segment of the connection. The procedure for allocating a VPI/VCI for  
the SVCs is based on the following considerations:  
86 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
•
The VPI value is always 0 on the UNI and SSI links. On the NNI links, the VPI  
value is as defined in the SET LOGICAL_LINK command for that NNI link.  
•
•
The VCI values 0 through 31 are always reserved for ITU and ATM Forum.  
The 127 odd-numbered VCIs between 32 and 286 (that is VCI 33, 35, 37, etc.,  
through 285) are reserved for point-to-multipoint connections.  
•
•
The even-numbered VCIs between 32 and 286 (32, 34, 36, etc., through 286)  
and all the VCIs from 287 up to and including 1023 can be used by the SVCs.  
The VPI/VCI allocation algorithm is to increment the highest previously  
allocated VCI value and verify that this value is not in use by a VC or a VP  
connection. When incrementing the VCI value, the following considerations  
apply:  
−
−
−
−
If the connection is a point-to-point connection and the currently highest  
allocated VCI is less than 286, the VCI value is incremented by two.  
If the connection is a point-to-point connection and the currently highest  
allocated VCI is 286 or higher, the VCI value is incremented by one.  
If the connection is a point-to-multipoint connection, the VCI value is  
incremented by one.  
If the currently allocated VCI value for the point-to-point connections is  
1023, the next VCI allocated will be the first free VCI value starting from  
32.  
−
If the currently allocated VCI value for the point-to-multipoint connections  
is 285, the next VCI allocated will be the first free VCI value starting from  
33.  
For PVCs, as described in 5.1.5, “How to Configure PVCs” on page 83, you can  
either specify the VPI/VCI values allocated to the PVC at the two ports, which are  
the endpoints of the PVC, or you may leave it to the 8285 to select the VPI/VCIs  
which are allocated. If you choose the latter, the 8285 will use the algorithm  
described for SVCs to allocate the VPI/VCI values. For the intermediate links on  
a PVC, it is always up to the 8285 to allocate the VPI/VCI values using the  
previous algorithm.  
For PVPs, as described in 5.1.7, “How to Define PVPs” on page 85, you can  
either specify the VPI value allocated to the PVP at the two ports, which are the  
endpoints of the PVP or you may leave it to the 8285 to select the VPI/VCIs which  
are allocated. If you choose the latter, the 8285 will increment the highest  
previously allocated VPI and check to see if this value is not already in use.  
When the VPI value reaches the upper bound of VPI (15), the next VPI value  
wraps to 0. For intermediate links on a PVP, it is always up to the 8285 to  
allocate the VPI values using the previous algorithm.  
5.1.9 How Point-to-Multipoint Connections Are Supported  
To support point-to-multipoint connections, one cell destined for multiple ports  
occupies only one cell location in the shared switch memory. However, multiple  
output queues (one per media module) point to that one cell location. When the  
multicast cell arrives at the top of the output queue, it is sent to the output  
module. Within the output module, if the point-to-multipoint connection spans  
over multiple ports, then the multicast cell is replicated as required. The switch  
keeps track of when the last output port has transmitted the cell, thereby  
allowing its memory locations to be freed. This technique minimizes the amount  
of memory space required for multicast messages.  
Chapter 5. 8285 ATM Network Specifications 87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
5.1.10 8285 LAN Emulation Specifications  
The 8285 is able alone to manage small LAN emulation networks.  
Mechanisms and characteristics supported are:  
5.1.10.1 LAN Emulation Server (LES) and Broadcast Unknown  
Server (BUS)  
•
Number of LES: 2  
•
Maximum number of client registrations per LES: 128  
•
Maximum number of client registration for both LES: 128  
•
Multicast trees used by LES and BUS  
•
Each LES is using one control distribute VCC for the non-proxy LECs, and  
one control distribute VCC for the proxy LECs  
•
Each BUS uses one multicast forward VCC for proxy and non-proxy LECs.  
5.1.10.2 IP over ATM (RFC 1577)  
•
In-band management for SNMP/Telnet/Ping supported.  
−
Maximum transmission unit (MTU) size supported: 944 bytes.  
IP over ATM client imbedded.  
Maximum concurrent IP over ATM connections supported: 64.  
•
−
5.1.10.3 LAN Emulation Client (ATM Forum-Compliant LAN  
Emulation)  
•
Number of LECs: 2.  
−
−
−
Token-Ring LAN (802.5).  
Ethernet LAN (Ethernet 802.3 or Ethernet V2/DIX).  
Both LEC can run concurrently.  
•
•
Maximum number of connections supported per LEC: 30  
Maximum length of LANE information field (MTU):  
Is depending on the the maximum service data unit (SDU) size supported on  
the corresponding ELAN.  
88 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Figure 34. LAN Information Frame Location  
Table 13. LANE Information Field Lengths  
SDU SIZE  
Maximum Length  
802.3 LEC  
Maximum Length  
DIX LEC  
Maximum Length  
802.5 LEC  
1516  
4544  
9234  
18190  
1492  
4520  
9210  
18166  
1500  
4528  
9218  
18176  
1462  
4490  
9180  
18136  
5.2 Traffic Management  
The following sections provide background information about traffic management  
in ATM networks and how it is implemented in the 8285.  
Table 14 summarizes the characteristics of various traffic types.  
Table 14. Types of Traffic  
CBR  
VBR  
Connection-oriented  
Yes  
UBR  
Connection-oriented  
No  
ABR  
Connection Mode  
Timing Sensitive  
Connection-oriented  
Connection-oriented  
Yes  
No  
ATM Adaptation  
Layer  
AAL 1  
AAL 2  
AAL 3/4, 5  
AAL 5  
Quality of Service  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
No  
Yes  
No  
Reserved  
Bandwidth  
Flow Control  
Traffic Types  
No  
No  
No  
Yes  
Voice, Video  
Compressed  
Voice, Video  
Data  
Data  
Chapter 5. 8285 ATM Network Specifications 89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
5.2.1 Service Classes Supported by the IBM 8285 ATM Workgroup  
The following quality of service (QoS) classes are supported by the 8285 control  
point:  
•
Constant bit rate (CBR)  
•
Variable bit rate - real time (VBR-rt)  
This class is supported as CBR.  
•
Variable bit rate - non-real time (VBR-nrt)  
This class is supported as CBR.  
•
Unspecified bit rate (UBR)  
•
Available bit rate (ABR)  
Table 15 provide information about the traffic management functions supported  
by the 8285.  
Table 15. Traffic Management Functions Support  
Traffic Management Functions  
Connection admission control (CAC)  
Usage parameter control (UPC)  
Generic cell rate algorithm (GRCA)  
Explicit forward congestion indication (EFCI)  
Full packet level discard  
Supported  
Yes  
No  
No  
Yes  
Yes  
No  
Network parameter control  
Random early detection (RED)  
Selective cell discarding  
No  
No  
Dynanic discard control  
No  
90 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Chapter 6. IBM 8285 Planning and Installing  
This chapter contains the following sections describe the planning and  
installation of the 8285 switch:  
•
Physical Planning (Installation Considerations):  
−
−
−
−
−
Environmental considerations  
Mechanical considerations  
Power considerations  
Cabling considerations  
Availability considerations  
•
•
•
Logical Planning (Network Design Considerations)  
Installation Considerations  
Microcode/Picocode Considerations:  
−
−
−
Reasons for upgrading the microcode  
How to acquire the latest microcode  
How to update the microcode  
6.1 Physical Planning  
This section discusses the following installation considerations that might affect  
how and where you choose to install the 8285 switch:  
•
Packaging  
•
Physical specifications  
6.1.1 Packaging  
The 8285 switch shipping group provides everything necessary to install and  
configure the 8285 switch, including the following items.  
6.1.1.1 Base Unit  
The base unit shipping group contains:  
•
An IBM 8285 Base Unit with mounting brackets attached  
•
A cable management bracket  
•
An RS-232 wrap plug  
•
An RJ45 wrap plug  
•
RS-232 connectors for connecting an ASCII console, consisting of:  
−
−
−
An RS-232 straight cable  
A null-modem interposer  
A gender changer (25-pin D-shell Female/Female)  
•
•
A power cord suitable for the country  
The following publications:  
Copyright IBM Corp. 1996  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
−
−
−
IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch: Installation and User′s Guide,  
SA33-0381  
IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch: Safety and Service Catalog,  
SA33-0398  
IBM 8285/8260: ATM Command Reference Guide, SA33-0385  
6.1.1.2 Expansion Unit  
The expansion unit shipping group contains:  
•
An IBM 8285 Expansion Chassis with mounting brackets attached  
•
A cable management bracket  
•
A power cord suitable for the country  
•
An expansion interface cable  
•
An expansion connector wrap plug  
6.1.1.3 Optional Items  
Optional items include the following:  
•
A 155 Mbps ATM I/O Card (MMF)  
•
A 155 Mbps ATM I/O Card (SMF)  
•
IBM 8260/8285 ATM Module(s)  
•
Lobe Adapter Cables  
−
−
IBM ATM RJ-45 STP Adapter Cable (part number 42H0544)  
RJ-45 UTP Converter Cable (part number 10H3904)  
Note  
All data cables, including converter cables and crossover cables, must be  
ordered separately.  
6.1.2 Physical Specifications  
The following sections describe the physical specifications of the IBM 8285.  
6.1.2.1 Environmental Specifications  
The 8285 switch does not require any special cooling. However, care should be  
taken to ensure that its environment corresponds to the specifications listed in  
Table 16.  
Table 16 (Page 1 of 2). Environmental Specifications of the IBM 8285 Nways ATM  
Workgroup Switch  
Description  
IBM 8285 Base Unit  
Base plus Expansion  
Operating Temperature  
10•C to 40•C  
10•C to 40•C  
(50•F to 122•F)  
(50•F to 122•F)  
Storage Temperature  
Operating Humidity  
Air Exhaust  
1•C to 60•C  
(33.8•F to 140•F)  
1•C to 60•C  
(33.8•F to 140•F)  
8% to 95%  
(non-condensing)  
8% to 95%  
(non-condensing)  
1.4m•/min  
2.8m•/min  
92 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Table 16 (Page 2 of 2). Environmental Specifications of the IBM 8285 Nways ATM  
Workgroup Switch  
Description  
IBM 8285 Base Unit  
Base plus Expansion  
Acoustic  
5.8Bel  
6.0Bel (with Expansion)  
6.1.2.2 Mechanical Specifications  
The 8285 switch is designed to be either rack-mounted or to rest on a table-top.  
Your mount must be able to support at least the following specifications, listed in  
Table 17, with the appropriate safety factors.  
Table 17. Mechanical Specifications of the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch  
Description  
Width  
IBM 8285 Base Unit  
440 mm (17.3 inches)  
508 mm (20.0 inches)  
133.3 mm (5.25 in. or 3U)  
12.8 kg (28.2 lbs)  
Base plus Expansion  
440 mm (17.3 inches)  
508 mm (20.0 inches)  
133.3 mm (5.25 in. or 3U)  
Depth  
Height  
Weight (empty)  
Weight (fully loaded)  
12.8 kg (28.2 lbs)  
19.4 kg (36.8 lbs)  
Mounting Clearances  
Front:  
Back:  
100 mm (4 inches)  
300 mm (12 inches)  
100 mm (4 inches)  
300 mm (12 inches)  
6.1.2.3 Power Supply  
The IBM 8285 Base Unit has a universal power supply, as does the 8285  
Expansion Chassis. The power supplies are currently identical although this can  
be expected to change in the future.  
•
General Power Specifications  
Table 18 shows the general power specifications of the IBM 8285 Base Unit  
and the 8285 Expansion Chassis.  
Table 18. Power Supply Specifications of the 8285  
Description  
Base Unit  
Expansion Unit  
Current Draw  
- at 100V  
- at 240V  
3.6A  
1.9A  
3.6A  
1.9A  
Surge Current  
40A  
40A  
Leakage Current  
2.7mA  
2.7mA  
Caloric Value  
- Kcal/hr  
- BTU  
44  
174.59  
44  
174.59  
Table 19 shows the anticipated power specifications of future models of the  
IBM 8285 Base Unit and the 8285 Expansion Chassis.  
Table 19 (Page 1 of 2). Power Supply Specifications of Future 8285 Models  
Description  
Base Unit  
Expansion Unit  
Current Draw  
- at 100V  
2A  
3A  
- at 240V  
0.85A  
1.25A  
Chapter 6. IBM 8285 Planning and Installing 93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Table 19 (Page 2 of 2). Power Supply Specifications of Future 8285 Models  
Description  
Base Unit  
40A  
Expansion Unit  
40A  
Surge Current  
Leakage Current  
3.5mA  
3.5mA  
Caloric Value  
- Kcal/hr  
- BTU  
72  
285  
104  
412.67  
•
Power Budget for the Expansion Chassis  
The 8285 Expansion Chassis has a universal power supply that provides  
power for these three available slots for 8285/8260 modules. When planning  
for your installation, please make sure that the power requirements of your  
planned configuration do not exceed either the +5V power budget or the  
+12V power budget.  
Note  
Any 8260 ATM module (except the A-CPSW module) will function properly  
in the 8285 Expansion Chassis provided that the power budget is not  
exceeded. However, any configuration containing modules that are not  
officially supported by the 8285 will be considered an unsupported  
configuration. Please note that as of November, 1996, the following 8260  
ATM modules were not supported in the 8285:  
•
2-slot 8272 ATM/LAN Switch Module  
•
3-slot 8272 ATM/LAN Switch Module  
•
2-slot 8271 ATM/LAN Switch Module  
•
3-slot 8271 ATM/LAN Switch Module  
•
Multiprotocol Switch Service (MSS) Server Module  
To determine if there is adequate power to support your desired  
configuration, simply add up the required power listed in Table 20, and make  
sure that it is less than the available power listed in the same table.  
Note: Although listed, there is no supported configuration in which the  
+12V power budget can be exceeded.  
Table 20 (Page 1 of 2). Power Budget of the 8285 Expansion Chassis  
Device  
Watts ( +5V)  
Watts ( +12V)  
Available Power Budget (Present/Future)  
Required Power:  
120/150  
15.6/24  
ATM 2-Port 155 Mbps Flexible Media Module  
ATM 3-Port 155 Mbps LAN Concentration Module  
ATM 155Mbps I/O Cards: MMF,SMF,UTP/STP,STP  
ATM 4-Port 100 Mbps MIC Fiber Module  
ATM 4-Port 100 Mbps SC Fiber Module  
Video Distribution Module  
25.0  
25.0  
2.5  
1.2  
1.2  
35.0  
35.0  
37.5  
35.0  
17.5  
2.5  
2.5  
ATM 12-Port 25 Mbps UTP Concentrator Module  
ATM 1-slot Carrier Module  
1.2  
0
94 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Table 20 (Page 2 of 2). Power Budget of the 8285 Expansion Chassis  
Device  
Watts ( +5V)  
17.5  
82.0  
18.4  
7.9  
Watts ( +12V)  
ATM 2-Slot Carrier Module  
ATM 4-Port TR/Ethernet Bridge Module  
ATM WAN Module  
12.0  
ATM WAN I/O Cards: E3,DS3,OC-3,STM-1  
IBM Multiprotocol Switched Services Server  
2-slot 8272 ATM/LAN Switch Module  
3-slot 8272 ATM/LAN Switch Module  
42.0  
67.5  
67.5  
11.0  
8.0  
1.0  
Token-Ring  
UFCs  
4-Port UTP/STP  
2-Port Fiber  
1-Port ATM155  
1-Port RMON  
25.0  
24.0  
58.5  
58.5  
5.5  
2-slot 8271 ATM/LAN Switch Module  
3-slot 8271 ATM/LAN Switch Module  
Ethernet  
UFCs  
4-Port 10Base-T  
3-Port 10Base-FL  
1-Port 100Base-Tx  
1-Port 100Base-Fx  
1-Port ATM155  
6.7  
5.7  
6.0  
25.0  
6.1.3 ATM Ports and Cabling  
With its expansion, the IBM 8285 offers several physical kind of port connections  
to handle twisted pair, fibers and coaxial lines. The physical specification of  
each type of port are as follows:  
•
UTP/FTP/STP Ports  
−
−
Physical Interface: RJ-45  
25 Mbps Cabling Supported and Maximum Distances:  
UTP Category 3  
100 meters (unshielded twisted pair)  
UTP Category 4  
150 meters  
UTP Cat.5 (100 Ohms)  
FTP (100/120 Ohms)  
SFTP (150 Ohms)  
STP (150 Ohms)  
160 meters  
150 meters (foiled twisted pair)  
150 meters (shielded and foiled twisted pair)  
300 meters (shielded twisted pair)  
−
155 Mbps Cabling supported and Maximum Distances:  
UTP Cat.5 (100 Ohms)  
FTP (100/120 Ohms)  
SFTP (100/120 Ohms)  
STP (150 Ohms)  
100 meters  
100 meters (foiled twisted pair)  
100 meters (shielded and foiled twisted pair)  
100 meters (shielded twisted pair)  
The ports comply with the latest ATM Forum specifications concerning  
pinouts. Although, the ATM25 cable uses the same number of pins as both  
Chapter 6. IBM 8285 Planning and Installing 95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
token-ring and Ethernet, the pinouts are different and incompatible, as shown  
in Table 39 on page 179.  
•
Fiber Ports  
−
Physical Interface:  
100 Mbps ports: SC or MIC  
155 Mbps ports: SC  
Cabling Supported:  
−
-
Multimode Fiber I/O Cards  
100 Mbps/155 Mbps ports:  
•
50/125 µm (micron) multimode fiber  
•
62.5/125 µm  
-
Single Mode Fiber I/O Cards  
155Mbps ports:  
•
Light Source: LASER at 1300+/-20nm  
•
9(± 1)/125 µm (micron) single mode fiber  
It is not necessary for a single type of fiber to be used from one end of a  
connection to another. However, doing so will provide you with longer  
distances between devices and may simplify troubleshooting and cable  
management issues as well. Should you choose to use different  
types/diameters of fiber, use the tables in the appendices of IBM 8285  
Nways ATM Workgroup Switch: Installation and User′s Guide, SA33-0381  
to determine if the optical budget for each port is adequate.  
•
E3 COAXIAL BNC Ports:  
−
−
−
−
Cable type: RG59  
Impedance: 75 Ohms  
Attenuation: 25dB MAX per 100m  
Maximum distance: 100m  
•
D3 COAXIAL BNC Ports:  
−
−
−
−
Cable type: RG59  
Impedance: 75 Ohms  
Attenuation: 25dB MAX per 100m  
Maximum distance:  
68m by default  
135m using an option setting (see IBM 8260/8285 ATM WAN Module  
Installation and User′s Guide, SA33-0396 at DS3 parameter ″Line  
Buildout″).  
96 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
6.1.4 Planning for Availability  
The 8285 switch is designated as a customer setup device. If you choose not to  
have the switch covered under an IBM maintenance plan, you may choose to  
provision one or more spares for key components to improve network  
availability. For your convenience, a cross-reference of components and part  
numbers is included in Table 42 on page 181.  
6.2 Logical Planning  
The following sections contain information about various aspects of IBM 8285  
logical planning:  
•
Capacity planning:  
−
−
−
−
−
Switching capacity  
ATM bandwidth capacity  
Integrated LES/BUS capacity  
SSI connection (TRS capacity)  
NNI connection  
•
Other Planning:  
Compliance to the standards  
−
6.2.1 Capacity Planning  
The following sections describe several aspects of capacity planning for the 8285  
switch, such as:  
•
Switching Capacity  
•
Bandwidth Capacity  
•
LES/BUS Capacity  
•
ATM Topology Management Limitations  
Note that the values described in the following sections are theoretical  
maximums and may be different from the practical maximums that apply to your  
network.  
6.2.1.1 Switching Capacity  
•
Maximum Number of Connections  
In most cases, the maximum number of connections per switch would be  
constrained by storage, such as the number of control blocks, rather than by  
the switch component capacity itself. Consequently, it may be possible to  
attain the maximum number of connections supported by the switch on an  
actual network if the traffic volume is not too much.  
•
Transmit Delay (Latency per Port)  
This value is sometimes used as a measure of the switch′s capacity.  
However, care should be used in using this value as a proxy for overall  
throughput in a real-world environment. It depends on several factors, some  
of which can be unrealistically tuned in a test environment to generate  
misleading results. It is especially affected by the utilization of those  
components that cause the increase in service waiting time, buffer  
shortages, and so on.  
Chapter 6. IBM 8285 Planning and Installing 97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
The system switching capacity maximums are listed in Table 21 on page 98  
below.  
Table 21. Connection Capacity of IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch  
Maximum  
IBM 8285 Base Unit  
Bidirectional  
Connectionsꢀ1ꢁ  
-With ATM firmware upgrade kit  
-Without ATM firmware upgrade kit  
2,016 ꢀ2ꢁ  
992  
ATM Module  
-With ATM firmware upgrade kit  
-Without ATM firmware upgrade kit  
2,016 ꢀ2ꢁ  
992  
IBM 8285 (with Expansion Unit)  
-With ATM firmware upgrade kit  
-Without ATM firmware upgrade kit  
2,016 ꢀ3ꢁ  
2,016  
PVCs per IBM 8285  
100 ꢀ4ꢁ  
Maximum Multipoint Parties per IBM 8285  
1,024  
Notes  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
Maximum Bidirectional Connections  
Defined here as the sum of point-to-point (PTP) and point-to-multipoint  
(PTM) connections  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
The module (CAP/CAD) is capable of supporting up to 4,064  
bidirectional connections but the number is restricted to 2016 due to  
the 8285 ATM Control Point′s capacity (2048 PVC - 32 PVC reserved).  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
ꢀ4ꢁ  
Due to the IBM 8285 control point capacity. (The number is 6,000 on  
the IBM 8260 A-CPSW.)  
Sum of PtP and PtM, and also sum of PVP and PVC connections.  
In the case of the 8285 switch, the transmit latency is dependent on whether the  
switching is done in the base unit, via CAP/CAD, or when it is installed in the  
IBM 8285 Expansion Chassis with its switch-on-a-chip. Table 22 shows the  
maximum latency for both switching modes under both normal and high  
utilization.  
Table 22. Transmit Delay (Latency per Port)  
Switching Mode  
Utilization  
ATM Port  
Latency (in  
microseconds)  
CAP/CAD  
normal  
25 Mbps  
155 Mbps  
25 Mbps  
155 Mbps  
57 µs  
41 µs  
61 µs  
44 µs  
33 µs  
40 µs  
high  
switch-on-a-chip  
normal  
high  
98 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
6.2.1.2 ATM Bandwidth Capacity  
The ATM bandwidth should be considered in a large network, especially for  
reserved bandwidth connections, such as the connections between switches.  
This section describes the ATM bandwidth capacity of the 8285 switch and its  
components:  
•
Total Bandwidth  
The total bandwidth available for each IBM 8285 Base Unit and ATM module  
in the expansion unit is 212 Mbps/FDX. This is because, although the  
switch-on-a-chip supports up to 256 Mbps for each module, the switch uses  
64-byte cells internally to transport 53-byte ATM cells. Therefore, the  
maximum external throughput per module is 256 Mbps x 53/64 or 212 bytes.  
•
Total Reserved Bandwidth  
The total reserved bandwidth available for each IBM 8285 base unit and for  
each ATM module in the expansion unit is 85 percent of the total bandwidth  
available and is 180 Mbps when the total bandwidth is 212 Mbps. In addition,  
the maximum reserved bandwidth for an ATM port is 85 percent of the  
physical port speed. For example, it becomes 85 Mbps for a 100 Mbps port  
and 131 Mbps for a 155 Mbps port.  
Table 23 shows the summary of the IBM 8285 ATM bandwidth capacity.  
Table 23. Bandwidth Capacity of the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch  
Description  
Value  
Total bandwidth for all ports in the base unit  
212 Mbps (256  
Mbps x 53/64)  
Total bandwidth per an ATM module in the expansion unit  
Total reserved bandwidth for All ports in the base unit  
212 Mbps  
180 Mbps (212  
Mbps x 85%)  
Total reserved bandwidth per an ATM module in the expansion  
unit  
180 Mbps  
Maximum reserved bandwidth per an ATM port  
85% of physical  
port speed  
6.2.1.3 Integrated LES/BUS Capacity  
The IBM 8285 can integrate the LES/BUS server functions in the control point.  
This section describes the capacity information when the function is configured:  
•
Maximum Number of LES/BUS Instances  
When the LAN Emulation protocol is used, each LES/BUS instance will define  
an Emulated LAN (ELAN). The IBM 8285 can configure two LES/BUSs  
instances, and therefore two ELANs. To interconnect these ELANs together  
requires an ATM router, such as the IBM Multiprotocol Switched Services  
Server.  
•
Maximum Number of LECs  
The number of LECs can impact LES performance, for example, during the  
initial registration process and during the MAC-to-ATM address mapping  
process.  
Table 24 on page 100 shows the summary of the IBM 8285 integrated LES/BUS  
capacity.  
Chapter 6. IBM 8285 Planning and Installing 99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Table 24. LES/BUS Capacity of the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch  
Description  
Value  
Maximum Number of LES/BUS Instances (or ELANs)  
Maximum number of LECs  
2ꢀ1ꢁ  
128ꢀ2ꢁ  
LEC Registration Capacity  
27 LECs/sec ꢀ3ꢁ  
100 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Notes:  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
Any two combinations of token-ring (IEEE 802.5) and Ethernet /  
IEEE802.3 LAN Emulation.  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
Sum of the LECs when two sets of LES/BUS configured.  
Average value based on the performance test.  
6.2.1.4 SSI Connection (TRS Capacity)  
The IBM 8285 implements a dynamic routing mechanism between ATM switches.  
This mechanism, called the switch-to-switch interface (SSI) protocol, was  
developed by IBM based on the ATM Forum PNNI Phase 1 specification, and is  
an IBM exclusive. SSI provides many benefits, such as reducing the workload of  
route definition, enabling link aggregation between switches, and enabling  
automatic route backup should the primary route fail. However, as with any  
dynamic routing protocol, the need to exchange information between nodes can  
consume bandwidth and processing resources. The IBM 8285 has the following  
capacity limitations for SSI connection:  
•
Maximum number of ATM switches per cluster  
•
Maximum number of ATM switch hops in a cluster  
Call setup and cell transmit time are proportional to the number of hops.  
•
Parallel / Multiple SSI link  
Parallel SSI links between two hubs are supported but the bandwidth cannot  
be shared. This means a data path between two switches is assigned to a  
specific SSI link even if you have parallel SSI links. But parallel SSI links  
increase the total bandwidth available between switches. There is no limit  
for the number of the parallel SSI links but excessive links provide little  
additional benefit.  
Multiple SSI links which provide alternate paths are supported. There is no  
limit to the number of multiple SSI links allowed as long as the network is  
designed within the restrictions of the maximum number of ATM switches  
and ATM switch hops in a cluster.  
Table 25 shows the summary of the TRS capacity of the IBM 8285 and IBM 8260.  
Table 25. TRS Capacity of the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch and IBM 8260  
Nways Multiprotocol Switching Hub  
Description  
Value  
25  
Maximum number of the ATM switches per a cluster  
Maximum number of the ATM switch hops in a cluster  
5
6.2.1.5 NNI Connection  
The IBM 8285 implements static routing mechanism between ATM switches as  
well. It is called NNI and is fully-compliant with the IISP specification of The ATM  
Forum. The NNI connection may be established on a physical link (direct  
connection) or over a permanent VP (PVP) connection via the ATM WAN module.  
As of today, IISP is the only protocol that can be used to interconnect an IBM  
campus ATM switch to another vendor′s switch. On the NNI connection, the  
following capacity limitations should be considered:  
•
Maximum number of static route definitions  
Chapter 6. IBM 8285 Planning and Installing 101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Each NNI connection requires that a static route be configured so that the  
routing mechanism is aware of the destination network. The maximum  
number of static route definitions is 50 per control point.  
•
Maximum number of NNI links per port  
The maximum number of NNI logical links per port is only restricted by the  
maximum number of VPCs since an NNI logical link needs a unique VPI  
value to distinguish it from the others. Therefore, the maximum number of  
NNI logical links per port is 15 on the 25 Mbps ports and 63 on the other  
ports.  
The maximum number of NNI logical liks per 8285 is 64.  
Note  
Prior to the control point code V1.0.1, static routes could not be defined to  
nonadjacent clusters. This limitation has been removed.  
102 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Figure 35. Complex ATM Network Using ATM 8285  
Figure 35 shows an ATM network mixing private and public environments.  
Grouping ATM switches into separate clusters limits your network restart time,  
limits the number of topology updates sent (as topology information remains  
within a cluster), and reduces the resources required on each node to maintain  
the network topology. ATM clusters in Figure 35 are interconnected in a bigger  
structure called a subnetwork to improve performances. Clusters are  
interconnected by parallel NNI connections increasing bandwidth (link  
aggregation) and offering redundancy.  
6.2.2 Standards Compliances  
The following section describes additional planning information about the IBM  
8285 in accordance with the ATM standards.  
Chapter 6. IBM 8285 Planning and Installing 103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
6.2.2.1 Compliance to the Standards  
The IBM 8285 is compliant to the following standard specifications:  
•
Physical Interface  
As to the physical interface, refer to section 6.1.3, “ATM Ports and Cabling”  
on page 95.  
•
UNI (User-to-Network Interface)  
There are three versions of UNI standardized by The ATM Forum, V3.0, V3.1,  
and V4.0. The IBM 8285 supports the following UNI versions:  
−
−
V3.0  
V3.1  
In addition, the 8285 switch supports the dynamic interconnection between  
UNI V3.0 and V3.1 devices as well. Both SVC and PVC are supported and  
they can be defined on the same physical port.  
•
NNI (Network-to-Network Interface)  
There are two protocols of NNI standardized by The ATM Forum, IISP  
(Interim Inter-switch Signaling Protocol) previously called PNNI Phase 0, and  
PNNI (private network-to-network interface) Phase 1. The IBM 8285 supports  
the following NNI protocols:  
−
IISP  
The IISP protocol is called NNI in the IBM campus ATM Switch terminology.  
•
LANE (LAN Emulation)  
There are two versions of LANE standardized by The ATM Forum, V1.0 and  
V2.0. The IBM 8285 supports the following LANE version and components:  
−
LANE V1.0 (both IEEE 802.5 and Ethernet/IEEE 802.3 LANE)  
-
-
-
LES (LAN Emulation Server)  
BUS (Broadcast and Unknown Server)  
LEC (LAN Emulation Client) for node management  
The LES/BUS function can interwork with an external LECS. To get the LECS  
address, all of the standardized mechanisms (via ILMI, using the LECS  
well-known address (WKA), and the LECS PVC) are supported.  
Note  
The order an LEC attempts the mechanisms is also standardized by The  
ATM Forum and is as follows:  
1. Get LECS address via ILMI  
2. Use the LECS well-known address  
3. Use the LECS PVC  
104 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
6.3 Install  
The following sections describe information about the IBM 8285 installation:  
•
•
Physical Installation  
8285 Console  
6.3.1 Physical Installation  
The physical installation procedure of the IBM 8285 is completely described in  
IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch: Installation and User′s Guide,  
SA33-0381. The physical planning information described in 6.1, “Physical  
Planning” on page 91 can help your installation as well.  
Note  
It is not described in the above manual but please make sure that the  
expansion unit is installed directly above the base unit. Otherwise, if it is  
installed below, the physical connection of the expansion unit cable may not  
be smooth and may also prevent you from connecting your local console.  
6.3.2 8285 Console  
When the physical installation procedure is completed, you have to make sure  
the system is operating properly, and start customizing the IBM 8285. Although  
some valuable information can be determined by observing the front panel LEDs,  
you really need to connect the 8285 console to check the detailed status and to  
start the customizing process.  
The following sections describe the console setup procedure and the basic  
console functions required to check the status of the IBM 8285.  
•
Overview  
•
Setup Procedure  
•
Basic Console Functions  
6.3.2.1 Overview  
The configuration console supports both out-of-band and inband access.  
However, out-of-band access is required for the initial setup since some  
parameters, such as the IP address, need to be configured before the console  
can be reached via an inband connection.  
The out-of-band console is connected to the console port on the base unit and  
the connection is supported by direct attachment or remote attachment via  
modem/telecommunication link. The out-of-band console supports two access  
modes: nrmal (ASCII) mode and SLIP mode.  
The normal mode is very popular as a LAN device console interface. It uses a  
simple ASCII terminal interface normally and uses XMODEM file transfer protocol  
when downloading microcode. The SLIP mode uses a Telnet session normally  
and uses TFTP when downloading the microcode. Both TCP/IP protocols use  
SLIP as the protocol stack. The IBM 8281 and 8282 also use a SLIP interface as  
their configuration console interface but they use a native interface not a Telnet  
session.  
Chapter 6. IBM 8285 Planning and Installing 105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
The inband console is attached to the LAN and establishes a Telnet session to  
the IBM 8285 and uses TFTP to download microcode. Like the out-of-band SLIP  
mode, it uses the TCP/IP stack.  
In addition to the configuration console, the 8285 switch can be managed via its  
SNMP interface, which allows most console functions to be performed via a  
user-friendly graphical interface. For more information about the SNMP  
management, refer to the following chapter.  
6.3.2.2 Setup Procedure  
This section describes the setup procedure summary for both normal and SLIP  
mode. The detailed procedure is described in the IBM 8285 Nways ATM  
Workgroup Switch: Installation and User′s Guide, SA33-0381.  
•
Normal Mode  
The setup procedure of normal mode console is as follows:  
1. Connect an ASCII terminal  
Connect an ASCII terminal (pure ASCII terminal or PC/RISC workstation  
which has ASCII emulation function) to the IBM 8285. The connection  
can be directly, connecting the terminal to the console port on the front  
panel of the IBM 8285 base unit, or remotely via modems and a  
telecommunication link.  
2. Set up the console parameters  
Check if the console parameters settings of the terminal match the IBM  
8285′s, and change the values if needed. The factory-set default settings  
for the IBM 8285 are as follows:  
Parameter  
Baud rate  
IBM 8285 Default Value  
9,600  
8
Data bits  
Parity  
None  
1
Stop bits  
3. Access the IBM 8285  
When the previous procedure is completed, try to access the IBM 8285.  
The initial screen which requires your password input will appear after  
you press the Enter key. You may then enter 8285 which is the initial  
administrator password or just press Enter which is the initial user  
password.  
Note  
The password will not be visible.  
If you have changed the administrator password but forgotten it, refer to  
the procedure to reset the password to the factory default setting  
described in A.1.4, “Resetting the Password to Factory Default” on  
page 174.  
Note  
The passwords are case-sensitive although the commands are not.  
106 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
After entering the proper administrator password, you will be logged in,  
and the 8285 will respond with a welcome message identifying what kind  
of access privileges (system administrator or user) you have. Figure 36  
on page 107 shows the screen containing the initial prompt and the  
welcome message.  
ꢀ8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch  
(C) Copyright IBM Corp. 1996. All rights reserved.  
ꢁ
Password:  
Welcome to system administrator service on 8285.  
ꢂ8285>  
ꢃ
Figure 36. Logon Screen of the IBM 8285 Console  
•
SLIP Mode  
The setup procedure of SLIP mode console is as follows:  
1. Establish normal mode connection  
In order to have SLIP mode connection, some parameters are needed,  
such as an IP address. Then establish normal mode connection at first  
based on the procedure described in the setup procedure of Normal  
mode.  
2. Set up the console parameters  
You need to define local (IBM 8285) and remote (terminal) IP address for  
the SLIP protocol using the SET TERMINAL SLIP_ADDRESS command.  
And if you use a baud rate other than 9600bps, change the rate using the  
SET TERMINAL BAUD command.  
3. Change the operating mode  
The operating mode of the configuration console is either ASCII or SLIP  
mode and they are exclusive. You need to change the mode from  
normal to SLIP since the default setting is normal mode. You can  
change the mode using SET TERMINAL CONSOLE-PORT-PROTOCOL  
SLIP command.  
The console automatically returns to normal mode if no activity takes  
place for a period of 20 minutes or if the IBM 8285 resets.  
4. Access the IBM 8285  
When the previous procedure completed, try to access the IBM 8285. In  
SLIP mode, you need to start a Telnet session to the IBM 8285. The  
logon procedure is the same as for the normal mode.  
6.3.2.3 Basic Console Functions  
This section describes the basic console functions to check if the physical  
installation has been done successfully.  
Te following commands are useful to check the IBM 8285 status:  
•
SHOW DEVICE  
•
SHOW MODULE  
Chapter 6. IBM 8285 Planning and Installing 107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
First, if you can access the IBM 8285 using the console interface, it means the  
IBM 8285 microcode works fine. The level and status of the IBM 8285 microcode  
can be checked using the SHOW DEVICE command. And the SHOW MODULE  
command can be used to check the FPGA picocode level and status of an ATM  
blade.  
Figure 37 shows the console screen when the SHOW MODULE command is  
issued to check the physical installation status.  
ꢀ8285> show module all ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢁ
Slot Install Connect Operation General Information  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------  
1
2
3
4
Y
Y
n
n
Y
n
n
n
Y
n
n
n
8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch ꢀ2ꢁ  
- ꢀ2ꢁ  
-
-
8285> set module 2 connected enable ꢀ3ꢁ  
Slot 2:Module set  
8285> show module all ꢀ4ꢁ  
Slot Install Connect Operation General Information  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------  
1
2
3
4
Y
Y
n
n
Y
Y
n
n
Y
Y
n
n
8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch  
8285 ATM Wan module with E3 + E3 Ports ꢀ5ꢁ  
-
-
ꢂ8285>  
ꢃ
Figure 37. Sample Screen to Check the Physical Installation  
Notes  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
The SHOW MODULE command is issued to the IBM 8285 base unit  
that has an expansion unit with a WAN module connected to it.  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
All status indicators of the Base Unit (install, connect and operation)  
are Y (yes) but only the install status of module installed in the  
expansion unit is Y. This is normal.  
If you don′t have the expansion unit, only the first line, starting with  
slot number 1, is displayed.  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
ꢀ4ꢁ  
ꢀ5ꢁ  
To change the other status indicators, issue the SET MODULE  
command.  
The SHOW MODULE command is issued after the SET MODULE  
command.  
All of the status indicators of the module have become Y. This means  
the physical installation has been done successfully. If any status  
does not become Y, check the physical installation procedure.  
108 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Note  
Most of the MES processes, such as installing or removing a module, do not  
prevent the others from working. However, the process of adding or  
removing the expansion unit to or from the IBM 8285 base unit makes the  
ATM subsystem reset.  
The install status may be Y even if no module installed. This should be  
normal because the IBM 8285 does not clear the previous status. If you  
really want to clear the status, use the CLEAR CONFIGURATION command in  
maintenance mode.  
6.3.3 ATM Concentration Module Basic Configuration Process Steps  
The module configuration process is very straight-forward. It summarizes briefly  
what operations must be done to install ATM port concentration modules.  
However, you should familiarize yourself with the following reference materials  
before you begin:  
Table 26 (Page 1 of 2). References and Process Quick Guide  
Task  
References  
•
Physical  
8260/8285 ATM 25 Mbps Concentration Module:  
Installation  
Installation and User′s Guide, SA33-0383  
•
•
•
•
8260/8285 ATM 155 Mbps Flexible Media Module:  
Installation and User′s Guide, SA33-0358  
IBM 8260/8285 A4-FB100 Module Installation and User′s  
Guide, SA33-0324  
IBM 8260/8285 ATM WAN Module: Installation and User′s  
Guide, SA33-0396  
8260/8285 Video Distribution Module: Installation and  
User′s Guide, GA27-4173  
−
−
−
−
Uncrating  
Installing I/O Cards  
Installing Module  
Connecting Cables  
•
Configuration  
Process  
IBM 8260/8285 ATM Command Reference Guide,  
SA33-0385  
−
−
−
−
−
SET MODULE  
SET PORT  
SET STATIC_ROUTE  
SET LOGICAL_LINK  
SAVE ALL|MODULE_PORT  
Chapter 6. IBM 8285 Planning and Installing 109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Table 26 (Page 2 of 2). References and Process Quick Guide  
Task  
References  
•
Monitoring and  
Troubleshooting  
Use the respective ATM Module Installation and User′s  
Guides  
−
−
Understanding LEDs  
Troubleshooting  
•
IBM 8260/8285 ATM Command Reference Guide,  
SA33-0385  
−
−
−
−
−
−
SHOW MODULE  
SHOW MODULE VERBOSE  
SHOW PORT  
SHOW PORT VERBOSE  
SHOW STATIC_ROUTE  
SHOW LOGICAL_LINK  
6.4 Microcode/Picocode Considerations  
The following section describes:  
•
Reasons for upgrading microcode  
•
How to acquire the latest microcode  
•
How to upgrade the microcode  
6.4.1 Reasons for Upgrading Microcode  
As part of your network operations plan, it is a good practice to include  
maintaining your network devices with the most recent software/microcode  
available. This allows you to take advantage of the newest features, to comply  
with the latest standards, and to interoperate with the widest number of vendors.  
The latest microcode levels for the 8285 ATM Control Point are:  
•
Release 1.3.0  
−
−
Support for the A03-MB155 module.  
Additional LANE support including support for external LECS via either  
configured address or dynamic discovery.  
•
Release 1.4.0  
Release 1.4.0 is a major upgrade. It includes new operating code as well as  
new microcode for the base unit and all available 8285 modules. New and  
enhanced features include:  
−
−
−
Increases the number of connections available per module from 992 to  
4064.  
Allows for variable VPC/VCC value ranges enabling either more paths  
with fewer channels each, or fewer paths with more channels each.  
Supports ATM Forum Available Bit Rate (ABR) Service on the ATM  
12-Port 25 Mbps UTP Concentrator Module, the ATM 3-Port 155 Mbps  
LAN Concentration Module, and on the 12-port 25 Mbps base unit.  
110 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
−
Adds PVC support to its multipoint capabilities which were previously  
SVC only. This includes both permanent virtual circuits and permanent  
virtual paths. Configuration requires only root and leaf addresses;  
intervening switches need not be changed.  
6.4.2 Acquiring the Latest Microcode  
The IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch is designed to easily accommodate  
evolving standards and additional capabilities. All operating code can be easily  
upgraded by downloading the code from a TFTP server, either in-band or via a  
SLIP connection.  
These code updates can be obtained from several sources:  
•
Via the IBM Networking Home Page  
•
From the PC Company′s BBS servers  
•
Via traditional software support by calling 1-800-237-5511 and ordering P/N  
51H4869, EC E28199. Make sure you have your customer number handy.  
•
Via the TOOLS disk (Internal Use Only)  
6.4.2.1 Downloading from the World Wide Web  
To download the microcode from the World Wide Web (WWW), you need the  
following:  
•
TCP/IP installed and operational on your computer.  
•
A Web browser to present HTML documents to you. Popular Web browsers  
include:  
−
−
−
Netscape Navigator (Windows)  
IBM Web Explorer (OS/2)  
Microsoft Internet Explorer (Windows).  
•
A connection to the WWW via your corporate network or an access provider.  
To get the microcode, first load the URL  
http://www.raleigh.ibm.com/82a/82afix.html in to your Web browser and press  
Enter. Your Web browser will download the 8285 Microcode Upgrades page for  
you. You will then be able to:  
•
Register to receive e-mail notification of 8285 microcode upgrades.  
•
Download the 8285 Base Unit/Expansion Unit Installation and User′s Guide in  
3M Adobe Acrobat *.pdf format.  
•
Download the README file for the upgrade package.  
•
Download the 8285 Upgrade Package in ZIP format.  
•
Download the appropriate Unzip EXECS for your operating system.  
•
Download the latest code for the 8285/8260 modules that can be installed in  
the 8285 Expansion Chassis.  
Chapter 6. IBM 8285 Planning and Installing 111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
6.4.2.2 Downloading from a PC Company Bulletin Board  
The PC Company maintains several bulletin boards that contain the latest  
microcode. You can reach them at the following locations:  
1. U.S.:  
(919) 517-0001  
2. Toronto:  
(905) 316-4255 or (416) 956-7877  
3. Vancouver: (604) 664-6464  
4. Montreal: (514) 938-3022  
Look for the string 8285 in the directory 32. The files are the same as on the  
Internet.  
6.4.2.3 Downloading from an Internal VM Site  
8285 microcode is available to IBMers from an internal site. You may access  
this site by:  
•
Entering TOOLS at the PROFS command line, and on the next screen:  
ꢀ
ꢁ
(c) Copyright IBM Corporation 1996 - All Rights Reserved  
Please fill in fields as needed (TOOLS will prompt you for missing values).  
Press ENTER to send request, PF3 to quit, PF5 to send request and then quit.  
Disk/Conference ==> TOOLSꢀ1.ꢁ  
at LGEVMXA)  
(ATMP disk managed by ATMDESK  
Request ==> ?ꢀ2.ꢁ  
Filename/Type ==> ?ꢀ3.ꢁ  
Description ==>  
Details:  
?ꢀ4.ꢁ  
*
ꢂ
ꢃ
Note:  
ꢀ1.ꢁAlter address to:  
d i s k n a m e = = > ATMBIN  
managed by ATMPE  
at LGEVMA  
ꢀ2.ꢁChange ? to GET.  
ꢀ3.ꢁChange ? to one of the following:  
−
−
−
−
−
8285P100 for operational code level 1.0.0  
8285P101 for operational code level 1.0.1  
8285P120 for operational code level 1.2.0  
F85HV130 for operational code level 1.3.0  
F85HV140 for operational code level 1.4.0  
ꢀ4.ꢁChange ? to PACKAGE.  
Press the Enter key, resulting in the screen below. The package will  
be sent to your reader.  
112 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
ꢀ
ꢁ
ꢃ
Disk/Conference ==> ATMPE  
(ATMBIN disk managed by ATMPE at LGEVMA)  
Details:  
Request ==> GET  
Filename/Type ==> 8285P120 PACKAGE  
Description ==>  
*
Requesting a copy of ″8285P120 PACKAGE″  
GET request for disk ATMBIN sent to ATMPE at LGEVMA (2314)  
Any CMS command ==>  
ꢂ
Each package contains a self-extracting .EXE file for:  
−
−
−
−
−
The microcode (both BOOT and OPERATIONAL)  
The FPGA picocode  
Installation instructions  
The release note  
The new 8285 Installation and User′s Guide  
If you replace GET with LIST and package_name with *, you will get a list of  
available packages sent to your reader.  
•
Entering the TOOLS fast path command at the PROFS command line:  
ꢀ
ꢁ
ꢃ
ꢂTOOLS SENDTO LGEVMA ATMPE ATMBIN GET package_name PACKAGE  
where package_name is set to one of the following:  
−
−
−
−
−
8285P100 for operational code level 1.0.0  
8285P101 for operational code level 1.0.1  
8285P120 for operational code level 1.2.0  
F85HV130 for operational code level 1.3.0  
F85HV140 for operational code level 1.4.0  
Each package contains a self-extracting .EXE file for:  
−
−
−
−
−
The microcode (both BOOT and OPERATIONAL)  
The FPGA picocode  
Installation instructions  
The release note  
The new 8285 Installation and User′s Guide  
If you replace GET with LIST and package_name with *, you will get a list of  
available packages sent to your reader.  
The following tables summarize the various code packages available and the  
names of their component files.  
Chapter 6. IBM 8285 Planning and Installing 113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Table 27. Filenames for System Upgrade Microcode (Release 1.0-1.2)  
Component/  
Release 1.0  
Release 1.0.1  
Release 1.2  
Feature Code  
Field P/N  
51H4869  
Package Name  
* PACKAGE  
8285P100  
8285R100  
8285P101  
8285R101  
8285P120  
Release Notes  
(relnote.doc)  
* LIST3820  
R51H4872  
8285I120  
Installation  
Instructions  
(install.doc)  
* LIST3820  
8285I100  
8285I101  
Executable File  
8285O101  
8285O101  
8285O120  
* EXEBIN  
Boot  
boot120.bin  
oper120.bin  
basfpga3.bin  
Operational  
FPGA  
oper100.bin  
oper101.bin  
Table 28. Filenames for System Upgrade Microcode (Release 1.3-1.4)  
Component/  
Release 1.3  
Release 1.4  
Feature Code  
Field P/N  
Package Name  
* PACKAGE  
F85HV130  
I10J1989  
F85HV140  
I10J1994  
Installation Instructions  
(INST8285.DOC)  
* LIST3820  
Release Notes  
(REL8285.DOC)  
* LIST3820  
R10J1990  
R10J1993  
D51H5219  
Executable File  
* EXEBIN  
D10J1991  
D10J2095  
Boot  
boot130.bin  
oper130.bin  
8285LEV3.enc  
boot140.bin  
oper140.bin  
85pgac10.enc  
8285old1.enc  
Operational  
FPGA  
IBM 8285 Base Unit  
(old)  
Table 29 (Page 1 of 2). Filenames for Module Upgrade Microcode (Release 1.4)  
Feature Code/  
Faceplate ID  
Description  
Filename  
5002:A02-MB155  
5003:A03-MB155  
5004:A04-FB100 MIC  
5104:A04-FB100 SC  
5008:VDM  
2-port ATM 155 Mbps  
3-port ATM 155 Mbps  
4-port ATM 100 Mbps  
4-port ATM 100 Mbps  
Video Distribution  
1552pc40.enc  
1553pc40.enc  
100mc40.enc  
100sc40.enc  
cmpga40.enc  
114 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Table 29 (Page 2 of 2). Filenames for Module Upgrade Microcode (Release 1.4)  
Feature Code/  
Faceplate ID  
Description  
Filename  
5012:A12-TP25 RJ  
5204:A04MB-BRG  
5302:A02 WAN  
12-port ATM 25 Mbps  
ATM TR/Enet Bridge  
ATW WAN  
25pga10.enc  
cmpga40.enc  
cmpga40.enc  
25old1.enc  
5012:A12-TP25 RJ  
(old)  
12-port ATM 25 Mbps  
6.4.3 Upgrading the Microcode  
Warning  
Do not proceed without familiarizing yourself with the process detailed in the  
Installation Instructions for your specific upgrade. The process has been  
designed to minimize the upgrade effort and to maximize network availability.  
Use it.  
The Installation Instructions are available from the same sources as the  
microcode.  
The general steps required to upgrade your IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup  
Switch are discussed below. However, be aware that the specific steps and  
sequence vary for different upgrades. You can find the specific steps detailed in  
the Installation Instructions for your upgrade.  
1. Upload the files to your TFTP server. If using a UNIX server, be sure to set  
the permissions properly using the chmod command:  
ꢀ
ꢁ
ꢃ
ꢂchmod a+r <filename>  
2. Upload your current configuration to the TFTP server to ensure that there is  
a backup copy available.  
Reminder  
It is recommended that the following steps be performed with No  
operational traffic flowing in through the 8285. Normally this operation  
would be done during a scheduled maintenance period.  
3. Download the new microcode from the TFTP server by issuing the  
appropriate SET TFTP SERVER_IP_ADDRESSS, SET TFTP FILE_TYPE, SET  
TFTP FILE_NAME, SET TFTP TARGET_MODULE, and DOWNLOAD INBAND  
commands for each of the following:  
•
BOOT microcode  
•
OPERATIONAL microcode  
•
FPGA microcode  
For the 8285 Base Unit, the TARGET_MODULE will be 1.  
Chapter 6. IBM 8285 Planning and Installing 115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Attention  
The BOOT and OPERATIONAL code load very quickly (approximately 1  
minute each). However, because of extensive error-checking on the  
FPGA code, it can take more than 10 minutes. Be patient.  
4. Download the new microcode for any media modules installed in the 8285  
Expansion Chassis by issuing the appropriate SET TFTP  
SERVER_IP_ADDRESSS, SET TFTP FILE_TYPE, SET TFTP FILE_NAME, SET  
TFTP TARGET_MODULE, and DOWNLOAD INBAND commands. In this case  
the TARGET_MODULE number will be slot number that each card is installed  
in. Be sure to check the current FPGA code first, using the SHOW MODULE  
n VERBOSE (where n is the blade′s slot number).  
116 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
ꢀ8285> set tftp server_ip_address 9.100.86.130  
ꢁ
TFTP server set.  
8285> set tftp file_type boot  
File type set  
8285> set tftp file_name  
Enter file name:  
/usr/binatm/boot140.bin  
File name set  
8285> show tftp  
TFTP Parameters:  
Server IP address  
File Name  
File type  
Last Transfer Date : 19 Mar 96.  
: 9.100.86.130.  
: /usr/binatm/boot140.bin.  
: Boot.  
Last Transfer Result : This file has not been transferred yet.  
8285> show device  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
.
.
.
Manufacture id: 53-  
Part Number: 58G9605 EC Level: C38846  
Serial Number: LAG050  
Boot EEPROM version: g.1.0.6  
Flash EEPROM version: v.1.0.0  
Flash EEPROM backup version: Y.1.0.0  
Last Restart : 13:30:25 Tue 1 Oct 96 (Restart Count: 93)  
.
.
.
8285> ping 9.100.86.130  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
Starting ping (hit CTRL-C to stop) ...  
Ping 9.100.86.130: 1 packets sent, 1 received  
Ping 9.100.86.130: 2 packets sent, 2 received  
8285> download inband  
You are about to download a new version.  
Are you sure ? (Y/N) Y  
Download successful.  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
8285> show tftp  
TFTP Parameters:  
Server IP address  
File Name  
: 9.100.86.130.  
: /usr/binatm/boot140.bin.  
: Boot.  
File type  
Last Transfer Date : 1 Oct 96.  
Last Transfer Result : OKAY.  
ꢀ4ꢁ  
8285> show device  
.
.
.
Manufacture id: 53-  
Part Number: 58G9605 EC Level: C38846  
Serial Number: LAG050  
Boot EEPROM version: v.1.4.0  
Flash EEPROM version: v.1.0.0  
Flash EEPROM backup version: Y.1.0.0  
ꢂLast Restart : 13:30:25 Tue 1 Oct 96 (Restart Count: 93)  
ꢃ
Note:  
ꢀ1ꢁCheck current boot and operational microcode levels.  
ꢀ2ꢁCheck to see that the TFTP server is reachable.  
ꢀ3ꢁDownload successful indicates a successful download. Had the  
download been unsuccessful, Download failure : Error. would have  
been the messages.  
ꢀ4ꢁOKAY. indicates a successful download. Had the download been  
unsuccessful, Error. would have been the message.  
Chapter 6. IBM 8285 Planning and Installing 117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Now we repeat the process for the operational code and the FPGA code,  
using the same SET TFTP FILE_TYPE, SET TFTP FILE_NAME, DOWNLOAD  
INBAND sequence as for the boot code.  
Once you have successfully downloaded the FPGA code for the base unit  
(that is, module 1) and for each module, you can use the SHOW MODULE  
VERBOSE command to check each module′s FPGA levels, as shown below:  
ꢀ8285> show module 1 verbose  
ꢁ
.
.
.
P/N:58G9605 S/N:LAG050  
EC level:C38846 Manufacture: 53-  
Operational FPGA version : 2  
Backup FPGA version : C10ꢀ1ꢁ  
8285> show module 2 verbose  
.
.
.
ATM Carrier Module Information:  
--------------------------------  
P/N:51H3862 EC level:E28091 Manufacture:VIME  
Operational FPGA version : B3F3(BAD LEVEL)ꢀ2ꢁ  
Backup FPGA version : B40  
ꢂ
ꢃ
Note:  
ꢀ1ꢁC10 indicates that the correct FPGA code is in the backup FPGA,  
ready to be swapped.  
Other possible values include:  
•
None indicating that no valid code is available to be swapped.  
This may occur on both the IBM 8285 Base Unit and the ATM  
12-Port 25 Mbps UTP Concentrator Module. The correct action to  
take is to download the FPGA code for that module again. Do not  
proceed with swapping microcode until you have valid microcode  
in the backup FPGA for each module to be swapped.  
ꢀ2ꢁ(BAD LEVEL) is indicated because the current and backup  
microcode levels are incompatible. Note that the correct code level is  
in the backup FPGA, ready to be loaded.  
Please note that it is the backup FPGA that is updated, not the operational  
FPGA.  
118 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Table 30. Download Errors and Suggested Fixes  
Symptom  
Possible Cause  
Suggested Actions  
•
Ping failure  
TFTP server  
Check if server is  
unreachable via a  
TCP/IP connection.  
on.  
•
Check if server has  
TCP/IP running.  
•
Validate all cable  
connections  
(continuity, polarity,  
etc.)  
•
Make sure ports are  
properly enabled.  
•
Check if ARP server  
has registered 8285.  
See section **** for  
how to do this.  
•
Check IP subnetting  
to ensure both  
devices are in the  
same subnet.  
Download failure  
TFTP not enabled on the  
server.  
Enable TFTP on server  
and/or start TFTP  
daemon.  
•
R/W permissions  
improperly set on a  
UNIX server.  
Login to the TFTP  
server  
•
Change to the  
directory the  
upgrade files reside  
in  
•
Change the file  
permissions using  
the CHMOD a+r  
<filename>  
command  
Corrupted upgrade files.  
Download the files  
again, making sure that  
you are downloading  
them as binary files.  
5. To activate the new microcode, it is necessary to swap the operational  
microcode with the backup microcode, using the SWAP MICROCODE  
command and the SWAP FPGA_PICOCODE command. Don′t forget to SAVE  
ALL first as the SWAP will reset the subsystem and any unsaved changes  
will be lost.  
Reminder  
This must be performed with No operational traffic flowing in through the  
8285. Normally this operation would be done during a scheduled  
maintenance period.  
Chapter 6. IBM 8285 Planning and Installing 119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
ꢀ8285> save allꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢁ
8285> swap microcode  
You are about to change operational microcode version and reset the hub.  
The saved hub configuration may be lost..  
Are you sure ? (Y/N) Y  
Migration allowed; checking for needed FPGA swaps  
Some SWAP FPGA commands will be executed now...  
Generated command: SWAP FPGA 1 ...ꢀ2ꢁ  
Press Enter  
.
.
.
(system reboots)  
.
.
.
8285> save allꢀ1ꢁ  
8285> swap fpga_picocode 2ꢀ3ꢁ  
You are about to change operational FPGA version..  
Are you sure ? (Y/N) Y  
ꢂProcessing slot 2 ... Swap completed.ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢃ
Note:  
ꢀ1ꢁSave configuration changes before starting.  
ꢀ2ꢁSWAP FPGA message will be generated for each module being  
upgraded.  
ꢀ3ꢁSWAP FPGA_PICOCODE slot command entered to swap microcode  
levels on the module in slot 2.  
Table 31. Swap Errors and Suggested Fixes  
Symptom  
Possible Cause  
Suggested Actions  
Failure.  
The 8285 ATM Control  
Point was unable to find  
FPGA code that was  
valid with its  
operational code, and  
has reverted to  
You must restore the  
8285s operational code  
and configuration.  
Prompt=″ > > nnnn  
> > ″.  
•
Use the SWAP  
ACTIVE command to  
restore the previous  
operational  
maintenance mode.  
microcode.  
•
Use the BOOT  
command to restart  
the system.  
•
Re-enter your  
configuration  
information.  
•
Re-enter your TFTP  
configuration  
information.  
•
Repeat the  
download and swap  
process.  
120 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
ꢀ8285> swap microcode  
ꢁ
ꢃ
You are about to change operational microcode version and reset the hub.  
The saved hub configuration may be lost..  
Are you sure ? (Y/N) Y  
Migration allowed; checking for needed FPGA swaps>> 0050 >>  
>> 0050 >> swap active  
Changed.  
>> 0050 >> boot  
ꢂBooting...  
6. Check the new levels of code, by using the SHOW DEVICE and SHOW  
MODULE slot VERBOSE commands. Items to pay attention to include the:  
•
Boot EEPROM version (see item 2 in the example below)  
•
Flash EEPROM version (just below the Boot EEPROM version)  
•
Operational FPGA version (see item 5 in the example below)  
ꢀ8285> show deviceꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢁ
8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch  
.
.
.
Manufacture id: 53-  
Part Number: 58G9605 EC Level: C38846  
Serial Number: LAG050  
Boot EEPROM version: v.1.4.0ꢀ2ꢁ  
Flash EEPROM version: v.1.4.0  
Flash EEPROM backup version: v.1.0.0ꢀ3ꢁ  
Last Restart : 09:33:50 Fri 4 Oct 96 (Restart Count: 3)  
.
.
.
8285> show module 1 verboseꢀ4ꢁ  
.
.
.
P/N:58G9605 S/N:LAG050  
EC level:C38846 Manufacture: 53-  
Operational FPGA version : C10ꢀ5ꢁ  
Backup FPGA version : 2(BAD LEVEL)  
.
.
.
8285> show module 2 verboseꢀ4ꢁ  
.
.
.
ATM Carrier Module Information:  
-------------------------------  
P/N:51H3862 EC level:E28091 Manufacture:VIME  
Operational FPGA version : B40ꢀ5ꢁ  
Backup FPGA version : B3F3(BAD LEVEL)  
8285> ping 9.100.86.130ꢀ6ꢁ  
Starting ping (hit CTRL-C to stop) ...  
Ping 9.100.86.130: 1 packets sent, 1 received  
ꢂPing 9.100.86.130: 2 packets sent, 2 received  
ꢃ
Note:  
ꢀ1ꢁSHOW DEVICE to check microcode levels.  
ꢀ2ꢁBoth the Boot and the Flash EEPROMs are at the correct level.  
ꢀ3ꢁThe old flash microcode is now stored in the flash backup  
EEPROM.  
ꢀ4ꢁCheck the FPGA levels using the SHOW MODULE VERBOSE  
command.  
ꢀ5ꢁThe FPGA is at the correct level. The old FPGA has been swapped  
to the Backup FPGA. Since it is not compatible with the current code,  
it is indicated as (BAD LEVEL).  
ꢀ6ꢁTest network connectivity by PINGing.  
Chapter 6. IBM 8285 Planning and Installing 121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
122 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Chapter 7. IBM 8285 Configuration  
This chapter provides information on how to configure 8285 Classical IP devices  
and LAN Emulation. ELAN parameters are also listed in this chapter, as well as  
configuration instructions to troubleshoot the LANE.  
7.1 Configuring Classical IP  
To allow the 8285 ATM Control Point to communicate with Classical IP (CIP)  
devices, it is necessary to configure and enable CIP on it.  
7.1.1 Classical IP Parameters  
The minimal set of parameters you will need in order to configure CIP are:  
ATM address  
This is the 20-byte ATM address to be assigned to the  
switch′s CIP interface. This address is comprised of five  
basic parts:  
1. ATM network prefix (bytes 1-11)  
2. ATM cluster number(ACN) (byte 12)  
3. ATM hub number (AHN) (byte 13)  
4. End station identifier (ESI) (bytes 14-19)  
5. ATM selector (byte 20)  
ARP server  
The ATM address of the ARP server with which to register.  
The ARP server will be used for resolving CIP IP  
addresses in to ATM addresses.  
IP address  
The IP address assigned to the switch. This must be  
unique.  
Subnet mask  
Default gateway  
The mask used to allocate the IP address bits. Must  
match the mask used by the default gateway.  
The address to forward packets to to reach other IP  
networks.  
7.1.2 Configuring a Simple CIP Network  
The figures below show a simple CIP network, both physically and logically,  
comprised of an IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch and an ARP server.  
Copyright IBM Corp. 1996  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Figure 38. Simple CIP Network - Physical View  
Figure 39. Simple CIP Network - Logical View  
The parameters we use in our example are listed in Table 32. Because we have  
only a single switch, both the 8285 ATM Control Point and the ARP server are in  
the same logical ATM network and share the same ATM network prefix, cluster  
number, and hub number. They are also part of the same IP subnetwork, so that  
they can communicate directly with each other.  
Table 32 (Page 1 of 2). Necessary Parameters for 8285 #1  
Parameter  
IP address  
Subnet Mask  
Value  
Comments  
9.100.86.150  
FF.FF.FF.C0  
Must be entered in dotted  
hexadecimal.  
Default  
9.100.86.130  
Gateway  
ATM prefix  
ACN  
3999999999999900009999  
First 11-bytes of address.  
12th byte.  
01  
01  
AHN  
13th byte.  
124 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Table 32 (Page 2 of 2). Necessary Parameters for 8285 #1  
Parameter  
ATM ESI  
Value  
Comments  
999999999901  
00  
6-byte MAC address.  
ATM Selector  
Has significance only to local  
workstation. Should be set to  
00.  
ARP Server  
ESI  
08005A99029F  
00  
6-byte MAC address.  
ARP Server  
Selector  
Must explicitly match the ARP  
server′s value.  
The commands we will need are:  
•
SET DEVICE IP_ADDRESS  
•
SET DEVICE DEFAULT_GATEWAY  
•
SET DEVICE ARP_SERVER  
•
SAVE ALL  
•
SET DEVICE ATM_ADDRESS  
•
SET PORT  
The reason why SAVE ALL precedes SET DEVICE ATM_ADDRESS is that the  
latter forces a reset of the ATM subsystem. You will be warned first, but if you  
forget to save the parameters you have just entered, they will be lost; only the  
ATM address will change.  
Below is an annotated transcript of the commands used to configure and test our  
simple network.  
Chapter 7. IBM 8285 Configuration 125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
ꢀ8285> set device ip_address atm 9.100.86.150 FF.FF.FF.C0ꢀ1ꢁ  
IP address and mask set  
ꢁ
8285> set device default_gateway 9.100.86.130ꢀ2ꢁ  
Default gateway set  
8285> set device arp_serverꢀ3ꢁ  
Enter ATM address: 39.99.99.99.99.99.99.00.00.99.99.01.01.08.00.5A.99.02.9F.00  
8285> save allꢀ4ꢁ  
8285> set device ATM_addressꢀ5ꢁ  
Enter ATM address : 39.99.99.99.99.99.99.00.00.99.99.01.01.99.99.99.99.99.01.00  
This call will reset the ATM subsystem.  
Are you sure ? (Y/N) y  
8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch  
(C) Copyright IBM Corp. 1996. All rights reserved.  
Password:  
Welcome to system administrator service on 8285.  
8285> set port 1.13 enable uniꢀ6ꢁ  
8285> show port 1.13  
Type Mode  
Status  
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
1.13:UNI enabled UP-OKAY  
8285> ping 9.100.86.130ꢀ7ꢁ  
Starting ping (hit CTRL-C to stop) ...  
Ping 9.100.86.130: 1 packets sent, 1 received  
Ping 9.100.86.130: 2 packets sent, 2 received  
ꢂPing 9.100.86.130: 3 packets sent, 3 received  
ꢃ
Notes:  
ꢀ1ꢁ Set the 8285 ATM Control Point CIP IP address and subnet mask.  
ꢀ2ꢁ Set the 8285 ATM Control Point CIP IP default gateway.  
ꢀ3ꢁ Set the 8285 ATM Control Point ARP Server ATM address. This is the  
address which ARP requests will be sent to to determine the ATM address of  
other CIP devices.  
ꢀ4ꢁ Save the configuration changes before entering the 8285 switch′s ATM  
address.  
ꢀ5ꢁ Set the 8285 switch′s ATM address. This forces a reset of the 8285 switch.  
ꢀ6ꢁ Enable the port, port 13, that the ARP server is connected to.  
ꢀ7ꢁ Test connectivity by pinging the ARP server.  
7.1.3 Troubleshooting Your CIP Network  
There are relatively few entities in a CIP network that could cause you problems.  
However, should you be unable to reach other CIP devices, the following items  
should be considered:  
•
Check the ARP server to see that you have registered with it. The procedure  
for doing so is described below in 7.1.3.1, “Checking ARP Server for  
Registration” on page 127.  
126 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
•
If so, check the IP parameters you configured on the 8285 ATM Control Point  
to ensure that they are correct. Pay particular attention to your IP subnet  
and your IP subnet mask.  
•
If you are not registered with the ARP server, try the steps outlined in 7.1.3.2,  
“Correcting ARP Registration.”  
7.1.3.1 Checking ARP Server for Registration  
If you are unable to ping the ARP server or any other IP device, check to see if  
the ARP server is properly registering your IP and ATM addresses.  
For AIX ARP servers, this can be checked in two ways:  
1. Using SMIT, the Systems Management Interface Tool  
2. Using the fast path command arp -t atm -a  
Checking ARP Registration via SMIT  
To check ARP registration via SMIT, perform the following steps:  
1. Log on to the server as root.  
2. Key in smit or smitty (the character-based version) and press Enter.  
3. Select the following menu items in sequence:  
•
Communications Applications and Services  
•
TCP/IP  
•
Further Configuration  
•
Network Interfaces  
•
List SVCs over an ATM 100 Network or ″List SVCs over an ATM 155  
Network″ depending on your interface  
Checking ARP Registration via Fast Path Command To check ARP registration  
via the fast path command, perform the following steps:  
1. Log on to the server as root.  
2. Key in the command:  
ꢀ
ꢁ
ꢃ
ꢂarp -t atm -a  
7.1.3.2 Correcting ARP Registration  
If the ARP server is not registering your 8285 CIP information, but is registering  
other CIP devices, try re-initializing the 8285 CIP function by re-entering the SET  
DEVICE ARP_SERVER command. This will force the 8285 ATM Control Point to  
go through the CIP registration process again.  
If you are still not able to register, check the ARP server address you keyed in  
and be sure that all 20 bytes of the address explicitly match the ARP server′s  
address.  
You have now completed a simple CIP network. You could add additional  
workstations to the switch. Or you might choose to extend your network by  
adding another switch.  
Chapter 7. IBM 8285 Configuration 127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
7.1.4 Configuring a Local Multi-Switch Network for CIP  
In this scenario, we add another 8285 to our network, representing perhaps a  
departmental work group on a different floor. To accommodate the new  
high-speed connection, we add an 8285 Expansion Chassis to our base  
configuration. Now our network diagram looks like the following:  
Figure 40. Multi-Switch CIP Network - Physical View  
128 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Figure 41. Multi-Switch CIP Network - Logical View  
The necessary parameters for our second switch are listed below in Table 33.  
Please note that the ACN is the same, indicating that both switches are in the  
same cluster and will therefore communicate using SSI protocols.  
Table 33. Necessary Parameters for 8285 #2  
Parameter  
IP address  
Subnet mask  
Value  
Comments  
9.100.86.151  
FF.FF.FF.C0  
Must be entered in dotted  
hexadecimal.  
Default  
9.100.86.130  
gateway  
ATM prefix  
ACN  
3999999999999900009999  
First 11-bytes of address. Must  
match 8285 #1.  
01  
02  
12th byte. Must match 8285  
#1.  
ATM hub  
number  
13th byte. Must be unique  
within cluster.  
ATM ESI  
999999999902  
00  
6-byte MAC address.  
ATM selector  
Has significance only to local  
workstation.  
ARP server  
ESI  
08005A99029F  
00  
6-byte MAC address.  
ARP server  
selector  
Must explicitly match the ARP  
server′s value.  
We configure the second switch just as we did the first one, however for the sake  
of brevity, we show only the commands that are new for thi s scenario.  
Chapter 7. IBM 8285 Configuration 129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
To enable connectivity between the switches, we configure an SSI connection  
between them. This is done using the SET PORT command:  
ꢀ
ꢁ
ꢃ
ꢂ8285> set port 1.13 enable ssi 155000  
When setting up your SSI parameters, make certain that you satisfy the following  
conditions:  
1. The ATM network address (the first 11 bytes of the ATM address) for each  
switch is the same.  
2. The ATM cluster number (11th byte of the ATM address) is the same on each  
switch.  
3. The hub numbers (13th byte of the ATM address) are different.  
Even though the port may be physically up, that is receiving and transmitting  
properly, if it is misconfigurated, it will be reported as being not in service. If  
this happens, The 8285 will try to provide helpful error messages in the IX Status  
field returned by the SHOW PORT command with the VERBOSE option.  
ꢀ8285> show port 1.13 verbose  
ꢁ
ꢃ
Type Mode  
Status  
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
1.13:SSI enabled UP-NOT IN SERVICE  
SSI Bandwidth  
Connector  
Media  
: 155000 Kbps  
: SC DUPLEX  
: Multimode fiber  
: 155000 Kbps  
Port speed  
Remote device is active  
IX status  
: HUB numbers identical  
: frame and cell  
: internal  
Scrambling mode  
ꢂClock mode  
A list of some of these messages is given in Table 34.  
Table 34 (Page 1 of 2). IX Status Messages and Causes  
IX Status Message  
Possible Causes  
Suggestions  
IX OK  
Link is configured  
None.  
properly and active.  
Attached to non SSI port  
Hub numbers identical  
Remote device is not  
configured to support the  
SSI protocol.  
Disable the remote port,  
then enable it for SSI.  
Both switches have the  
same ATM network  
prefix.  
Change the ATM address  
of one of the switches so  
that at least the hub  
number is different.  
130 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Table 34 (Page 2 of 2). IX Status Messages and Causes  
IX Status Message  
Possible Causes  
Suggestions  
•
ACN mismatch  
Each switch has a  
different ATM cluster  
number.  
Change the ATM  
address of one of the  
switches so that both  
have the same  
cluster number.  
•
Set each end of the  
link to use NNI  
protocols if  
connecting different  
clusters.  
That is basically all that is required to configure a simple ATM CIP network.  
7.2 Configuring LAN Emulation  
The IBM 8285 Control Point can provide the Forum-Compliant LAN Emulation  
server functions (LES/BUS) and the client (LEC) function. To enable these  
functions on the 8285 ATM Control Point, it is necessary to configure and enable  
LAN Emulation on it.  
7.2.1 8285 LAN Emulation Functions Overview  
The IBM 8285 Control Point can provide the Forum-Compliant LAN Emulation  
server functions (LES/BUS) and the client (LEC) function. It supports up to two  
LES/BUSe simultaneously with any combinations of ELAN types, such as two  
token-ring ELANs (TR/LEs), two Ethernet ELANs (ETH/LEs), and one TR/LE and  
one ETH/LE. In addition, it supports both TR and ETH LECs simultaneously but it  
cannot have two LECs with the same ELAN type.  
7.2.2 LAN Emulation Parameters  
The only parameters you will need in order to configure LAN Emulation functions  
are:  
•
ATM Address  
This is the 20-byte ATM address to be assigned to the switch′s LEC and  
LES/BUS components as well as its to CIP interface. This address is  
comprised of five basic parts:  
1. ATM network prefix (bytes 1-11)  
2. ATM cluster number (ACN) (byte 12)  
3. ATM hub number (HN) (byte 13)  
4. End station identifier (ESI) (bytes 14-19)  
5. ATM selector field (SEL) (byte 20)  
In the IBM 8285 there is only one command, SET DEVICE ATM_ADDRESS, to  
define the ATM address and it is to configure the ATM address for the CIP  
interface. The addresses of LAN Emulation components are automatically  
assigned based on the CIP interface address by changing the selector field  
of it. Table 35 on page 132 shows the Forum-Compliant LAN Emulation  
addresses are assigned.  
Chapter 7. IBM 8285 Configuration 131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Table 35. Address Assignment Rule for the IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup  
Switch LAN Emulation Components  
ATM Component  
Selector Value  
Example  
CIP address  
00  
39999999999999000099  
99010999999999990900  
Ethernet LEC  
Token-Ring LEC  
1st LES/BUS  
2nd LES/BUS  
00  
01  
02  
03  
39999999999999000099  
99010999999999990900  
39999999999999000099  
99010999999999990901  
39999999999999000099  
99010999999999990902  
39999999999999000099  
99010999999999990903  
As a result, the LES and BUS on an ELAN use the same ATM address and  
the CIP interface address may be in conflict with one of the LANE  
components′ addresses. These ATM address duplications are supported by  
the IBM 8285 and also by the The ATM Forum standard.  
Note  
As to the ATM address sharing of LANE servers, The ATM Forum  
standard is defined as follows:  
An LES may share an ATM address with an ATM address with a BUS on  
the same ELAN. An operational LES must not share an ATM address with  
any LANE components other than a BUS, even if two LANE components  
are co-located and share the use of a UNI. In particular, two LES for  
different ELANs must not share an ATM address.  
•
LES/BUS Parameters  
The integrated LES/BUS supports Forum-Compliant LAN Emulation LES/BUS  
functions with or without an external LECS. It supports all higher layer  
protocols of Forum-Compliant LAN Emulation, such as TCP/IP, IEEE 802.2  
protocols and NetWare.  
To configure the LES/BUS, use the SET LAN_EMUL SERVER command with  
the following parameters:  
−
−
−
Server ID  
Specify the designated LES/BUS identifier to issue the command. The  
valid options are 1 or 2.  
START / STOP  
Start or stop the designated LES/BUS. When the command is to stop the  
server, the following parameters are not needed.  
ELAN Type  
Specify the ELAN type of the designated LES/BUS. The valid options are  
ETH (Ethernet LANE) or TR (token-ring LANE). When the ELAN type of  
the LES/BUS is Ethernet, it always supports both Ethernet types, 802.3  
and DIX/Ethernet V2; you cannot make it support only either type.  
−
Maximum Number of the Clients  
132 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Specify the maximum number of LECs supported by the designated  
LES/BUS. The maximum number is 128 and is the sum of both  
LES/BUSes when two LES/BUSes are configured.  
−
Maximum SDU Size  
Specify the maximum AAL-5 service data unit (SDU) size supported by  
the designated LES/BUS. The SDU is the information part of AAL-5  
protocol data unit (PDU). The possible values are 1516, 4544, 9234 and  
18190 (default: 1516) regardless the ELAN type.  
Note  
On a real Ethernet network, the maximum data frame length is 1492  
or 1500 bytes. However, up to 18190-byte frames are supported on an  
ELAN as stated above. You may know the inconsistency with the  
length field in an IEEE 802.3 frame which should be less than 1536  
(X′0600′). But the inconsistency is resolved on the the IEEE 802.3  
LANE by placing the value 0 in the length field when the IEEE 802.3  
LANE frame is longer than 1536.  
On the other hand, you must specify 1516 for the maximum SDU size  
when your ATM network attached to a real Ethernet network via an  
ATM bridge which doesn′t have fragment capability.  
−
ELAN Name  
Specify the Emulated LAN name. The default value is  
IBM_lantype_LANn, with lantype set to ETHERNET or TOKEN_RING based  
on the ELAN type, and n set to 1 or 2 based on the server ID. For  
example, the default ELAN name for the Ethernet LES/BUS with server ID  
1 is IBM_ETHERNET_LAN1.  
•
LEC Parameters  
The integrated LEC function supports the TCP/IP protocol over  
Forum-Compliant LAN Emulation and provides a node management interface  
to a Telnet station or to a SNMP manager.  
To configure the LEC, use the SET DEVICE LAN_EMULATION_CLIENT  
command with the following parameters:  
−
ELAN Type  
Specify the ELAN type to which the LEC belongs. The valid options are  
ETH (Ethernet LANE) or TR (token-ring LANE).  
−
Ethernet Type  
Specify the Ethernet type when the ELAN type is Ethernet. The default  
setting is 802.3 and the Ethernet type should be the same as the  
communicating device. Note that there are many devices that have the  
other Ethernet type (DIX/Ethernet V2) as the default.  
−
IP Address  
The IP address to be assigned to the switch. This must be unique. And  
if the IBM 8285 is configured with multiple IP addresses, they have to be  
on different IP networks because they are treated as the IP interfaces of  
an IP node.  
Chapter 7. IBM 8285 Configuration 133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Note  
There is a well-known restriction that the IP interfaces of the IBM  
8285 and the IBM 8260 should not use IP network number 10 because  
it is use d on their internal network. This restriction applies not only  
to the CIP interface of the IBM 8285 but also to that of the LECs. It is  
planned to remove this restriction when the control point code  
supports PNNI phase 1, expected in 1997.  
−
−
Subnet Mask  
The mask used to allocate the IP address bits. Must match the mask  
used by the default gateway.  
Default Gateway  
Specify the address to forward packets to to reach other IP networks  
when communicating with an IP device beyond the IP network. In the  
LANE network, the default gateway should be an IP router on the same  
ELAN of the IP device or on a legacy LAN via a LANE bridge on the same  
ELAN.  
−
−
Individual MAC Address  
Specify the individual MAC address of the LEC. The address format  
should be canonical for Ethernet ELAN and non-canonical for token-ring  
ELAN and both universal and local administered address (UAA/LAA) are  
supported. It should be unique throughout the transparent bridging  
network and in a source routing bridging segment just like the MAC  
address on a legacy LAN.  
Associated LES or LECS ATM address  
Specify the ATM address of the LES with which to register or the LECS  
which knows the ATM address of a designated LES. The LES will be  
used for resolving ELAN MAC addresses in to ATM addresses.  
To get the designated LES ATM address, the following options are  
offered:  
-
Use a pre-defined LES ATM Address  
If you don′t have the LECS on the ELAN, you have to specify the LES  
ATM address in each LEC definition.  
When the 8285 LEC is attached to this type of ELAN, the SET DEVICE  
LAN_EMULATION_CLIENT command with the parameter  
NO_LECS_WITH_LES followed by the LES ATM address is used to  
pre-define the LES ATM address.  
-
Use a pre-defined LECS ATM address  
If you have the LECS on the ELAN but don′t want to use dynamic  
address resolution, you can specify the LECS ATM address on each  
LEC definition.  
When the 8285 LEC is attached to this type of ELAN, the SET DEVICE  
LAN_EMULATION_CLIENT command with the parameter  
NO_LES_WITH_LECS followed by the LECS ATM address is used to  
pre-define the LECS ATM address.  
-
Use a dynamic LECS ATM address  
134 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
It is not necessary to pre-define the LECS′ address on each LEC  
definition if you have a LECS since the mechanisms by which the  
LECs dynamically use a specific ATM address of the LECS are  
standardized.  
When the 8285 LEC is attached to this type of ELAN, the SET DEVICE  
LAN_EMULATION_CLIENT command with the parameter  
NO_LES_WITH_LECS followed by NONE is used to get the LECS ATM  
address dynamically. The IBM 8285 will search for the LECS ATM  
address, first using ILMI. If it does not find it, then it will try using the  
LECS well-known address (WKA) as specified in the standard. To  
use the dynamic LECS ATM address resolution, you must not forget  
to define the specific ATM address of LECS in the IBM 8285 definition  
using the SET LAN_EMUL CONFIGURATION_SERVER command.  
The LEC automatically starts when the SET DEVICE  
LAN_EMULATION_CLIENT command is issued and it cannot be stopped after  
starting. If you really need to clear the LEC parameters, you should clear the  
parameters using CLEAR CONFIGURATION command in maintenance mode.  
•
LECS / IBM 8285 Addressing  
The IBM 8285 doesn′t have the LECS but does interwork with the external  
LECS. When you have an external LECS and resolve the specific ATM  
address of LECS dynamically, such as using ILMI and well-known Address  
(WKA), you have to define the real ATM address of it to register it on the  
LECS address table in the IBM 8285.  
To register the real ATM address of LECS, use the SET LAN_EMUL  
CONFIGURATION_SERVER command with the following parameter:  
−
ACTIVE_WKA or INACTIVE_WKA  
The LECS address table contains an ATM address to be substituted for  
the WKA. You can define the specific ATM address of WKA as Active  
WKA. In an 8285, you can define only one active WKA entry. But you  
can also define 4 Inactive WKA entries in addition. The ACTIVE_WKA or  
INACTIVE_WKA option is followed by the specific ATM address of it. The  
ACTIVE_WKA option replaces current Active WKA.  
Note  
As described above, the SET LAN_EMUL CONFIGURATION_SERVER  
command is used to define the specific ATM address of LECS for ILMI  
MIB. Then the active WKA has no meaning and all entries defined on  
the table are included in the MIB in the order of index (Index 1 should  
be top of the ILMI MIB entries). It means that you can have LECS  
redundancy by defining multiple LECSs, which have the same  
configuration on the IBM 8285/8260s in your campus ATM network.  
7.2.3 Configuring a Simple LANE Network  
Figure 42 on page 136 and Figure 43 on page 136 show a simple LANE network,  
both physically and logically, comprised of an IBM 8285 and workstations.  
Chapter 7. IBM 8285 Configuration 135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Figure 42. A Simple LANE Network - Physical View  
Figure 43. A Simple LANE Network - Logical View  
To configure a simple LANE network, the following parameters are needed:  
•
8285 ATM address  
136 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
•
8285 LEC parameters  
•
•
8285 Integrated LES parameters  
ATM module and port parameters  
The parameters we use in our example are listed in Table 36.  
Table 36. Necessary Parameters for 8285#1  
Parameter  
ATM Address  
ATM Prefix  
ACN  
Value  
Comments  
3999999999999900009999  
First 11 bytes of address  
12th byte, should not be 0  
13th byte, should not be 0  
6-byte MAC address  
20th byte  
01  
HN  
09  
ESI  
999999999901  
00  
SEL  
8285 Integrated LES parameters  
Server ID  
ELAN type  
1
Ethernet  
64  
Max # of  
clients  
Max SDU size  
ELAN name  
1516  
Default  
Default  
IBM_ETHERNET_LAN1  
8285 LEC parameters  
ELAN type  
Ethernet  
Ethernet type  
IP address  
DIX  
9.100.86.200  
FF.FF.FF.C0  
0.0.0.0  
Subnet Mask  
Default  
Not specified because not used  
in this configuration  
Gateway  
MAC address  
0200CCCCCCCC  
Canonical format  
Associated  
LES or LECS  
ATM address  
39999999999999000099  
99010999999999990102  
Use pre-defined LES ATM  
address (NO_LECS_WITH_LES)  
The commands we need are:  
•
SET DEVICE ATM_ADDRESS  
•
SET LAN_EMUL SERVER  
•
SET DEVICE LAN_EMULATION_CLIENT  
•
SET PORT  
The SET DEVICE ATM_ADDRESS command causes the ATM subsystem to reset,  
so you have to save the configuration using SAVE ALL command if there are  
unsaved parameters.  
Figure 44 on page 138 is an annotated transcript of the commands used to  
configure and test our simple LANE network.  
Chapter 7. IBM 8285 Configuration 137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
ꢀ8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch  
(C) Copyright IBM Corp. 1996. All rights reserved.  
ꢁ
Password:  
Welcome to system administrator service on 8285.  
8285> set device atm_address  
Enter ATM address : 39.99.99.99.99.99.99.00.00.99.99.01.09.99.99.99.99.99  
This call will reset the ATM subsystem.  
Are you sure ? (Y/N) Y  
Press Enter ꢀ1ꢁ  
8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch  
(C) Copyright IBM Corp. 1996. All rights reserved.  
Password:  
Welcome to system administrator service on 8285.  
8285> set device lan_emulation_client  
Enter lan type: eth ip_address:9.100.86.200 subnet_mask:ff.ff.ff.c0  
Some parameters are missing. Client state unchanged. ꢀ2ꢁ  
8285> set device lan_emulation_client  
Enter lan type: eth no_lecs_with_les:  
Enter address : 39.99.99.99.99.99.99.00.00.99.99.01.09.99.99.99.99.99.01.02  
Some parameters are missing. Client state unchanged.  
8285> set device lan_emulation_client  
Enter lan type: eth mac_address:0200CCCCCCCC  
Client starting. ꢀ3ꢁ  
8285> set device lan_emulation_client eth eth_type:DIX ꢀ4ꢁ  
Client starting.  
8285> set lan_emul server 1 start eth 64  
Enter emulated LAN name:  
Starting server. ꢀ5ꢁ  
8285> set port 1.1 enable uni  
1.01:Port set  
8285> set port 1.8 enable uni  
1.08:Port set ꢀ6ꢁ  
8285> ping 9.100.86.192  
Starting ping (hit CTRL-C to stop) ...  
Ping 9.100.86.192: 1 packets sent, 1 received  
Ping 9.100.86.192: 2 packets sent, 2 received  
ꢂ8285>  
ꢃ
Figure 44. The Console Screen of a Simple LANE Network Configuration  
Notes:  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
With control point V1.3 or later, the 8285 switch uses this message to  
tell you when the ATM subsystem reset is finished.  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
The LEC in the IBM 8285 doesn′t start until you define the necessary  
parameters and this message appears. But the parameters you  
define are reflected.  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
ꢀ4ꢁ  
The LEC in the IBM 8285 starts as soon as it gets the necessary  
parameters.  
You may change the Ethernet type of the LEC in the IBM 8285  
because the default is 802.3 and many devices use DIX as the default.  
138 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
ꢀ5ꢁ  
ꢀ6ꢁ  
The integrated LES/BUS is started. The LEC in the IBM 8285  
automatically registers with it.  
The ports attached the LECs are enabled. They are now ready to  
connect ATM devices. Note that many LECs should be started after  
the LES/BUS has been up because they have retry counts which limit  
how many times they may issue the LANE registration request.  
7.2.4 Troubleshooting Your LANE Network  
There are relatively few entries in a LANE network that could cause you  
problems. The following sections describe the typical items that should be  
considered:  
•
Check the Physical (ATM) Connection  
•
Check the LANE Registration  
•
Other Considerations  
For more information about troubleshooting your LANE network, refer to the  
troubleshooting chapter of IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch: Installation  
and User′s Guide.  
7.2.4.1 Check the Physical (ATM) Connection  
When you connect an ATM device to the IBM 8285, you have to connect the  
physical cabling to the device and configure its ATM parameters. Then the  
device should be connected to the ATM network and you can check the status  
from the IBM 8285 console using SHOW PORT command.  
Figure 45 on page 140 shows a sample console screen when the commands  
issued.  
Chapter 7. IBM 8285 Configuration 139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
ꢀ8285> show port 1.1 verbose ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢁ
Type Mode  
Status  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------  
1.01:UNI enabled UP-NO ACTIVITY ꢀ2ꢁ  
Signalling Version : with ILMI  
Flow Control  
VPI.VCI range  
Connector  
Media  
: Off  
: 3.1023 (2.10 bits)  
: RJ45  
: copper twisted pair  
Remote device is inactive ꢀ2ꢁ  
IX status  
Port speed  
: IX KO ꢀ2ꢁ  
: 25600 kbps  
8285>  
8285> show port 1.1 verbose ꢀ3ꢁ  
Type Mode  
Status  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------  
1.01:UNI enabled UP-OKAY ꢀ4ꢁ  
Signalling Version : with ILMI  
Flow Control  
VPI.VCI range  
Connector  
Media  
: Off  
: 3.1023 (2.10 bits)  
: RJ45  
: copper twisted pair  
Remote device is active ꢀ4ꢁ  
IX status  
Port speed  
: IX OK ꢀ4ꢁ  
: 25600 Kbps  
8285>  
Figure 45. The Sample Console Screen to Check the Physical Connection  
Notes:  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
This SHOW PORT command was issued when the physical cabling  
has been done but the remote device is power off.  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
You can get the status shown in several lines, but the main status is  
shown in the first line. The UP-NO ACTIVITY means the status  
physical cabling is done but no physical layer activity is detected.  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
ꢀ4ꢁ  
This SHOW PORT command was issued when the physical connection  
was up and the remote device is been ready.  
The UP-OKAY means the remote device is attached to the ATM  
network.  
The typical reasons an ATM device might be unable to make a physical  
connection are as follows:  
•
Cabling  
If a fiber cable is used, check to see if the each end of the cable is  
connected to the appropriate connector, transmit or receive. And if a copper  
cable is used, check to see that the pinouts of the cable and each end of the  
cable are matched, especially when you use a non-Forum-compliant adapter  
or the connection is between ATM switches.  
140 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
If the pinouts are mismatched, the status should be UP-NO ACTIVITY which  
means physical activity isn′t detected on the port.  
•
ATM Connection Parameters  
Check if the ATM connection parameters used in the switch and the device  
are matched, such as:  
−
−
−
−
−
Connection type (SVC/PVC)  
VPC/VCC number  
UNI Version (3.0/3.1/4.0)  
Service type (CBR/VBR/UBR/ABR)  
Required and available bandwidth if RB connection  
If this information is mismatched, the status should be UP-NOT IN SERVICE  
which means physical activity is detected on the port but that the device  
cannot access to the network.  
7.2.4.2 Check the LANE Registration  
When the physical layer connection is established, then the device requests to  
register with a LANE network. You can check the status from the IBM 8285  
console using SHOW LAN_EMUL SERVERS and SHOW DEVICE commands.  
Figure 46 and Figure 47 on page 142 show a sample console screen when the  
SHOW LAN_EMUL SERVERS command is issued.  
ꢀ8285> show lan_emul servers 1 ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢁ
--------------------------------------------------------------------------  
--------------------------- LAN Emulation Server 1 ----------------------  
Status  
: Running.  
LAN type  
: Ethernet.  
: ″IBM_ETHERNET_LAN1″ .  
: ″ ″ .  
Actual ELAN name  
Desired ELAN name  
Actual max frame size : 1516.  
Desired max frame size: 1516.  
ATM address : 39.99.99.99.99.99.99.00.00.99.99.01.09.99.99.99.99.99.01.02  
Max number of clients : 64.  
Current number of operational clients : 3. ꢀ2ꢁ  
Local : 39.99.99.99.99.99.99.00.00.99.99.01.09  
99.99.99.99.99.01.00 (port 0.0) OPERATIONAL NonProxy ꢀ3ꢁ  
00.20.35.34.20.87.81 (port 1.1) OPERATIONAL NonProxy ꢀ3ꢁ  
02.00.88.88.88.88.81 (port 1.8) OPERATIONAL NonProxy ꢀ3ꢁ  
8285>  
Figure 46. The Sample Console Screen to Check the LANE Registration  
Notes:  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
This SHOW LAN_EMUL SERVERS command was issued when the  
server was up and the clients have requested to be registered.  
The number of clients registered with the IBM 8285 integrated LES are  
shown on this line.  
The clients registered with the IBM 8285 integrated LES are shown in  
these lines. This information only appears when you specify either of  
the servers using the server ID.  
Chapter 7. IBM 8285 Configuration 141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
ꢀ8285> show device ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢁ
8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch  
Name : 8285  
Location :  
For assistance contact :  
Manufacture id: 53-  
Part Number: 58G9605 EC Level: C38846  
Serial Number: LAG050  
Boot EEPROM version: v.1.4.0  
Flash EEPROM version: v.1.4.0  
Flash EEPROM backup version: v.1.0.0  
Last Restart : 14:57:56 Thu 17 Oct 96 (Restart Count: 1)  
A-8285  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------  
ATM address: 39.99.99.99.99.99.99.00.00.99.99.01.09.99.99.99.99.99.01.00  
> Subnet atm:  
IP address: 0.0.0.0. Subnet mask: 00.00.00.00  
> Subnet lan emulation ethernet/802.3 ꢀ2ꢁ  
Up ꢀ3ꢁ  
Name :″IBM_ETHERNET_LAN1″ ꢀ3ꢁ  
MAC Address: 0200CCCCCCCC  
IP address : 9.100.86.200. Subnet mask: FF.FF.FF.C0  
ATM address  
:39.99.99.99.99.99.99.00.00.99.99.01.09.99.99.99.99.99.00  
Config LES addr:39.99.99.99.99.99.99.00.00.99.99.01.09.99.99.99.99.99.02  
Actual LES addr:39.99.99.99.99.99.99.00.00.99.99.01.09.99.99.99.99.99.02 ꢀ3ꢁ  
BUS ATM address:39.99.99.99.99.99.99.00.00.99.99.01.09.99.99.99.99.99.02 ꢀ3ꢁ  
Config LECS add:none  
Actual LECS add:00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00  
LEC Identifier: 1. Maximum Transmission Unit: 1492 ꢀ3ꢁ  
> Subnet lan emulation token ring  
Not Started  
Name :″″  
MAC Address: 000000000000  
IP address : 0.0.0.0. Subnet mask: 00.00.00.00  
ATM address  
:39.99.99.99.99.99.99.00.00.99.99.01.09.99.99.99.99.99.00  
Config LES addr:none  
Actual LES addr:00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00  
BUS ATM address:00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00  
Config LECS add:none  
Actual LECS add:00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00  
LEC Identifier: 0. Maximum Transmission Unit: 0  
Default Gateway :  
----------------------------------------------------------------------------  
IP address: 0.0.0.0  
ARP Server:  
----------------------------------------------------------------------------  
ATM address: 00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00.00  
Dynamic RAM size is 8 MB. Migration: off. Diagnostics: enabled.  
8285>  
Figure 47. The Sample Console Screen to Check the LANE Registration  
Notes:  
142 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
ꢀ1ꢁ  
ꢀ2ꢁ  
This SHOW DEVICE command was issued when the server was up  
and the clients have requested to be registered. This command can  
be used to check the status of each LEC on the IBM 8285, especially if  
they are registered with an external LES.  
This line shows the ELAN type and Ethernet type of the LEC. The  
ethernet/802.3 means the ELAN type is Ethernet and the Ethernet type  
is 802.3. Don′t make the mistake of thinking that ethernet/802.3  
means that both DIX and 802.3 Ethernet types are supported. The  
LEC on the IBM 8285 can support either of them and the status should  
be ethernet/DIX when the Ethernet type is DIX.  
ꢀ3ꢁ  
The appropriate values in these fields means that the registration  
process has been successfully completed since these values are  
returned by the LES.  
The typical reasons a LEC might be unable to register with the LES are as  
follows:  
•
ATM switch connection  
If the LECs are attached to a different switch, check to see if the connection  
between the switches has been established.  
•
Designated LES address  
Check if the designated LES ATM address specified for the LEC, especially  
the SEL field, is correct.  
•
Max SDU size/ELAN name  
Check if the same maximum SDU size and ELAN name are defined on the  
LEC and LES. If these values don′t match, the registration process fails.  
And some LECs, such as IBM 8285 internal LEC, don′t have specific values  
for itself, but instead gets the values from its LES.  
•
Registration sequence  
Reissue the LANE registration request from the LEC. Several devices have  
limited retry counts to issue the registration request and only do so during  
the initialization phase. Therefore, they won′t register when the LES is  
restarted. And the network or the LES congestion may prevent them from  
the successfully completing the registration process within the allowed  
period.  
For example, PCs using the IBM ATM device driver have retry count limit for  
the registration request but IBM 8281 and 8285 internal LECs do not.  
7.2.4.3 Other Considerations  
When the communication between LECs is unable to be established even though  
both LECs are registered with the LES, the typical reasons are as follows:  
•
Ethernet type  
Check to see if the same Ethernet type is configured for both LECs. For  
LECs to communicate with each other, they should be configured with the  
same Ethernet type, 802.3 or DIX/Ethernet V2.  
If one of the LECs that is unable to communicate is the IBM 8285′s, you can  
check the Ethernet type from the console using SET DEVICE command as  
shown in Figure 45 on page 140.  
•
IP network number  
Chapter 7. IBM 8285 Configuration 143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
If one of the LECs that is unable to communicate is the IBM 8285′s, check to  
see if the IP interfaces, CIP, Ethernet LEC and token-ring LEC, have been  
defined with different subnetworks. If the IP interfaces are on the same  
subnetwork, only the CIP interface is used.  
144 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Chapter 8. IBM 8285 Management  
This chapter describes the SNMP-based management functions that are  
available with an IBM 8285 ATM network. It provides a brief overview of the  
MIBs that are available, functions of Nways Campus Manager ATM and an  
explanation of how to perform some of the functions that we have found useful in  
configurating and monitoring the IBM 8285 ATM network.  
For more information about ATM campus network management, refer to the ATM  
Campus Network Management, SG24-5006.  
8.1 Management Information Bases (MIBs)  
The IBM 8285 control point provides full SNMP support with the use of standard  
SNMP commands, Get, GetNext, Set and Trap. Below is a list of all the MIBs an  
IBM 8285 ATM network supports that any SNMP-based management can use:  
•
MIB-II (RFC 1213)  
The IBM 8285 ATM subsystem fully supports this MIB described in RFC 1213,  
Management Information Base for Network Management of TCP/IP-Based  
Internets: MIB-II. For the purposes of the system group, ATM is treated as a  
data link protocol. The interface group describes the ATM cell layer  
interface. This group only concerns itself with the ATM cell layer as a whole  
and not the individual connections. Here the amount of traffic that was  
transmitted and received can be found. Also the number of cells dropped  
due to an incorrect HEC and invalid ATM cell header will be found.  
•
IETF AtoM MIB (RFC 1695)  
This MIB is described in RFC 1695, Definitions of Managed Objects for ATM  
Management Version 8.0 using SMIv2 and also called AtoMIB. It describes  
objects used for managing ATM-based interfaces, devices, networks and  
services. The following are descriptions of the various groups:  
−
The ATM Interface Configuration Group  
This group describes the type of ATM traffic on a particular interface. It  
contains ATM interface configuration parameters, such as the status of  
the interface, maximum number of VPCs and VCCs supported on an  
interface, the number of configured VPCs and VCCs, the number of active  
VPI and VCI bits, VPI/VCI of ILMI (if at all) and the ATM address type.  
−
−
−
−
The DS3 PLCP Group  
This group has configuration and state information for those ATM  
interfaces that use DS3 for carrying ATM cells.  
The ATM Traffic Descriptor Parameter Group  
This group has information relating the ATM traffic parameters, including  
the QoS class.  
ATM Virtual Path Link (VPL) Group  
This group contains configuration and state information of a bi-directional  
VPL. Here VPs can be created, deleted or modified.  
ATM Virtual Channel Link (VCL) Group  
Copyright IBM Corp. 1996  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
This group contains configuration and state information of a bi-directional  
VCL. Here VCs can be created, deleted or modified here. Also,  
information can be found on the AAL that is in use on a VC specific  
information can be found if AAL5 is used, such as the type of data  
encapsulation.  
−
The Virtual Path (VP) Cross Connect Group  
This group contains configuration and state information of all  
point-to-point and point-to-multipoint VP cross connects. In other words,  
it gives information on the VP swapping table. With this group VP  
cross-connects can be established and removed.  
−
−
The Virtual Channel (VC) Cross Connect Group  
This group performs the same functions as in the VP cross connect  
group but for the VCs.  
The AAL5 Virtual Channel Connection Performance Statistics Group  
This group contains the AAL5 performance statistics of a VCC.  
•
•
OSPF MIB  
Since the TRS function uses OSPF with very few modifications to the original  
code, the IBM 8285 ATM network supports the OSPF MIB (RFC 1253)  
unchanged.  
ILMI MIB  
This MIB is defined by The ATM Forum in the UNI specification. Following is  
a brief description of the groups defined in these MIBs:  
−
Physical Port Group  
This group gives information on a particular port such as the status,  
transmission types and cable type.  
−
ATM Layer Group  
This group has the maximum number of supported VPs and VCs on the  
UNI, the number of VPs and VCs configured on the UNI and the number  
of active VP and VC bits on the interface.  
−
−
−
−
−
ATM Statistics Group  
Here you will find the number of cells received, dropped and transmitted  
on the UNI.  
Virtual Path Group  
This group gives information on the VPs on the UNI. This includes  
status, traffic shaping, policing and QoS parameters.  
Virtual Channel Group  
This group performs the same functions as the virtual path group but for  
the VCs.  
Network Prefix Group  
This group has information on the network prefix in use on the user side  
of the UNI and its validity.  
Address Group  
This group has information on the ATM address in use on the user side  
of the UNI and its validity.  
146 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
•
IBM Hub-Specific MIB Extensions  
This MIB is an enterprise-specific MIB for the IBM Campus ATM Hubs.  
Following is a brief description of the groups defined in these MIBs:  
−
−
−
Traps Control Group  
This group allows you to configure what traps are sent.  
Switch Control Group  
This group determines which slots are controlled by the switch.  
ATM Modules Group  
This group gives details on the modules, such as the maximum number  
of supported VPs and VCs, the number of VPs and VCs in use and the  
type of module.  
−
−
ATM Port Group  
Information can be found here on the number of ports on a module,  
cable type, status and what interfaces it supports (UNI, NNI or SSI).  
ATM Interface Group  
This group maps for each ATM port the MIB-II interface index and the  
physical slot/port numbers.  
−
−
Cross Connect Group  
Information on the label swapping tables for VPs and VCs is stored here.  
Neighbor Devices Group  
Here information can be found on the ATM devices connected on ports,  
such as the IP address and description.  
−
−
TFTP Group  
This group controls the parameters for TFTP download functions.  
Statistics Group  
Statistics for individual VP and VC connections are found here.  
•
IBM Signalling Extensions  
This IBM MIB extension defines ATM signalling support on the device.  
Below is a brief list of the information that can be accessed via this MIB:  
−
−
−
−
−
−
Number of supported signalling channels  
Range of reserved VPs and VCs  
VPI/VCI used for the signalling channel on a port  
The state of the Q2931 interface  
Q2931 statistics, such as the number of call attempts and rejections  
Information about Q2931 calls in progress, such as calling and called  
party  
−
Details of cleared called including the ATM interface involved, calling  
and called party, date and time, cause of clearing, QoS requested and  
the bandwidth requested  
−
Details and statistics on the SAAL  
•
IBM PVC Management MIB Extensions  
Chapter 8. IBM 8285 Management 147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
•
IBM ATM Statistics MIB Extensions  
These IBM MIB extensions are fully listed in Appendix E, “ IBM ATM Campus  
Switch Private MIBs” on page 195.  
8.2 IBM Nways Campus Manager ATM Overview  
This chapter describes an introduction to the Nways Campus Manager ATM.  
This is a state-of-the-art network manager for ATM campus network. Nways  
Campus Manager ATM is a fully integrated package of network management  
applications for campus ATM networks. This application provides a complete  
ATM topology and management package for all ATM-capable IBM devices, such  
as ATM switches, ATM concentrators, and ATM bridges. This application is  
available on IBM and HP platforms.  
Nways Campus Manager ATM provides management of IBM ATM subsystems  
and provides device management applications, also called product-specific  
modules (PSMs), for stand-alone or integrated (as an ATM module) IBM ATM  
hardware devices. Nways Campus Manager ATM provides device configuration  
and ATM network topology views that enable network administrators to quickly  
determine the status of the network and its components. Also, an ATM  
management function is included providing the capability to graphically display  
ATM connections on each user-device port (UNI port) of ATM switches. This  
feature allows network administrators to perform a visual connection tracking  
from one endpoint to another.  
The Nways Campus Manager ATM is supported on the following platforms:  
Nways Campus Manager ATM for AIX  
This package implements three major components:  
•
The functionality sets from the former ATM Campus Manager for AIX:  
−
−
−
−
−
ATM Network Topology Management  
ATM Resource Configuration  
ATM Fault Management  
ATM Change Management  
ATM Network Monitoring and Statistics Management  
•
•
The Management Application Transporter (MAT)  
ATM device management applications (PSMs)  
Nways Campus Manager ATM for HP-UX  
This is the HP-UX version of Nways Campus Manager ATM and is similar to  
it in terms of implementation and functionality.  
Nways Manager for Windows  
This is a simple, straightforward product, but with limited functions. It is best  
suited for small ATM networks, such as for the management of stand-alone  
ATM workgroup switches.  
The main difference to the others are:  
148 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
•
Very limited management function support for IBM 8260 ATM subsystem.  
For example, it does not recognize any ATM modules and can display  
only a few characteristics of these modules.  
•
Limited management function support for ATM logical resources. For  
example, it does not allow connection tracking.  
8.3 IBM Nways Campus Manager ATM for AIX  
The following sections describe the information about Nways Campus Manager  
ATM for AIX, especially for the IBM 8285 management.  
8.3.1 Overview  
Nway Campus Manager ATM for AIX, which is referred to as NCM-A in this book,  
is a program that runs under NetView for AIX. It combines the former ATM  
Campus Manager for AIX (ATMC) with the new PSMs. It allows seamless  
navigation between ATMC functions and graphic ATM device management  
applications. This package integrates ATM device management and the display  
of ATM connections that were not previously available on individual application  
products. For instance, the product-specific views of IBM ATM products, such as  
IBM 8285, 8281 and 8282, are shown in an ATM topology submap. It can be  
coupled with Nways Campus Manager LAN for AIX to provide management of  
the ATM modules in the IBM 8260 and of the legacy LANs via ATM  
bridge/routers. Coupling involves the topology integration used by each  
application.  
Although Nways Campus Manager ATM is not mandatory to configure and set up  
an IBM 8285 ATM network, it is highly recommended because the information  
and functions that it provides will make it significantly easier to work with the  
ATM network.  
The new version of Nways Campus Manager ATM V2, which provides some  
enhancements for IBM 8285 ATM network management, was announced in  
October 1996 and is now available in addition to V1.  
8.3.1.1 Nways Campus Manager ATM V1 for AIX  
Nways Campus Manager ATM V1 is composed of the following components:  
•
ATM Campus Manager Application  
ATM Campus Manager application is the functionality sets provided by the  
former ATM Campus Manager product. It provides a graphical user interface  
for controlling ATM resources, such as IBM 8285, 8260, 8281 and 8282. It  
allows you to manage your ATM environment from a single management  
station based on graphic views showing network topology views with  
easy-to-identify and color-coded icons.  
•
Management Application Transporter (MAT)  
MAT is shipped as a PTF for NetView for AIX and provides the framework to  
install and run product-specific modules (PSMs) to manage subsystems  
using device-specific functions.  
•
Product-specific modules (PSMs)  
A PSM allows you to have device-specific management by device-specific  
graphic views. PSMs are made based on object-oriented technology. The  
original PSMs are easy to transport different platform.  
Chapter 8. IBM 8285 Management 149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
The functional highlights of Nways Campus Manager ATM V1 are as follows:  
ATM Network Topology Management  
The Nways Campus Manager ATM is fully integrated in the NetView for AIX  
or HP OpenView topology database. This means that it is possible to  
navigate from NetView for AIX or HP OpenView IP map to the ATM topology  
map using the protocol switching function. This reduces the time network  
operators need to perform their most current tasks and also gives status  
correlation among the following different domains:  
•
ATM Topology Map  
•
IP Topology Map, which means ATM IP nodes (correlated with ATM  
objects)  
•
Hub Expanded View, which comes with Nways Campus Manager LAN  
package. This means an IBM 8260 ATM node is correlated with a  
physical hub view from Nways Campus Manager LAN.  
The following topology features are provided as well:  
•
Automatic discovery of ATM nodes and physical links between elements  
ATM nodes, such as IBM 8285, 8260, 8281 and 8282, are automatically  
discovered, placed in the submap and monitored. When the  
configuration of the network changes, the discovery capability indicates  
the changes and updates the corresponding network submap.  
•
Dynamic display of the topology hierarchy of ATM nodes and their  
operating status  
The graphical topology display uses a color code to represent the status  
of the following levels of resources displayed in submaps:  
−
−
−
−
ATM Campus  
ATM Clusters  
ATM Nodes  
ATM Interfaces  
ATM Resource Configuration  
The Nways Campus Manager ATM provides easy access to various submap  
levels allowing users to set and change the ATM switch and node  
configuration. The following resources can be configured or displayed:  
•
ATM physical resources, such as ATM interface ports  
•
PVC, including create, delete, set up and tear down (UNI)  
•
SVC, including tracking and forced clearing (UNI)  
•
VP and VC link  
ATM Fault Management  
The Nways Campus Manager ATM provides a complete set of messages,  
traps and event notifications. The integration of this information into NetView  
for AIX enables retrievability and more efficient problem determination. The  
user can customize the events in such a way to reduce the amount of  
information to manage large networks effectively.  
The Nways Campus Manager ATM allows the recognition of network  
management information, which is described in 8.1, “Management  
Information Bases (MIBs)” on page 145, from different sources, supporting:  
150 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
•
Display of traps  
•
•
Color coding of status information  
Logging of call failures  
ATM Change Management  
The Nways Campus Manager ATM provides a quick way to download code  
upgrades in the IBM ATM switches through the network (inband). Then it  
allows easy problem fixes or function enhancements on the IBM ATM  
switches that have the control point code.  
ATM Network Monitoring and Statistics Management  
The ATM Campus Manager application provides key performance counters.  
Nways Campus Manager ATM allows you to collect statistical information  
and display it in a more readable graphical format. Below is a list of some  
of the different types of information that it can collect:  
•
Logging of calls  
All calls, that is calls in progress and calls that have been cleared, on a  
node can be logged with information, such as calling and called number,  
creation time, clear time and clear cause.  
•
Traffic  
Statistics on an interface′s traffic can be gathered with information, such  
as received and transmit cells, discarded cells and invalid cells.  
•
Bandwidth  
Information about the amount of bandwidth that is utilized on a port can  
be found.  
•
Q2931 Status  
Information on the incoming and outgoing calls in progress can be  
collected.  
•
SAAL Errors  
Information on the various errors detected by SAAL can be collected.  
The data can be saved in a file as well. The availability of performance  
information from the Nways Campus Manager ATM enhances the ATM  
network by facilitating network tuning.  
ATM Connection Tracking  
Connections can be selected and tracked. The endpoints and all the  
intermediate nodes used by a connection can be graphically displayed.  
Nways Campus Manager ATM allows you to perform the following  
connection tracking functions:  
•
List and delete SVCs  
•
Show the characteristics of SVCs, such as the calling and called party  
and QoS parameters  
•
List, delete and create PVCs  
•
Show the characteristics of a PVC  
•
Track the connection including the VPI/VCI labels of each segment of the  
connection and what physical ports the connection goes through  
Chapter 8. IBM 8285 Management 151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Product Specific Module (PSM) Support  
The following PSMs are supported corresponding with MAT function:  
•
IBM 8224 Ethernet Stackable Hub  
•
IBM 8230 Token-Ring Concentrator (Model 003, 013, 213 04A,04P)  
•
IBM 8238 Token-Ring Stackable Hub  
•
IBM 8271 Nways Ethernet LAN Switch  
•
IBM 8272 Nways Token-Ring LAN Switch  
•
IBM 8281 ATM LAN Bridge  
•
IBM 8282 ATM Workgroup Concentrator  
•
IBM 8285 ATM Workgroup Switch (Base Unit)  
8.3.1.2 IBM Nways Campus Manager ATM V2 for AIX  
Nways Campus Manager ATM V2 provides the following functional  
enhancements in addition to V1:  
•
New PSMs support  
The PSMs (views) for the following devices are newly supported:  
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
IBM 8210 MSS Server Release 1.5  
IBM 8285 Expansion Unit  
ATM 4-port 100 Mbps MIC or SC Fiber Module  
ATM 12-Port 25 Mbps UTP Concentrator Module  
ATM 2-Port 155 Mbps Flexible Media Module  
ATM 4-Port TR/Ethernet Bridge Module  
Utopia 1 ATM Carrier 1 or 2-slot Module  
•
PSM functional enhancements  
In addition to the new PSMs support, the following functional enhancements  
are provided to the PSM:  
−
−
−
−
−
LAN Emulation trap support  
Ability to display ATM-attached devices  
Ability to backup and restore configuration  
Ability to display SVCs  
Ability to manage SVC log files  
•
•
New control point code support  
New ATM module support  
The following ATM modules (MIBs) are newly supported:  
−
−
−
ATM 3-Port 155 Mbps LAN Concentration Module  
ATM 4-Port TR/Ethernet Bridge Module  
MSS Server Module Release 1.5  
•
LAN Emulation  
Automatic discovery of LAN Emulation entities, such as servers, clients  
(proxy or non-proxy)  
−
152 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
−
−
Dynamic display of LAN Emulation topology, such as administrative  
domains, ELANs, lists of clients and related servers  
Configuration of LANE entities and services, such as domains, policies,  
LANE clients and servers  
−
−
−
ELAN status reflected in an ATM device′s color state  
ELAN fault management  
ELAN security for preventing unauthorized station to connect a given  
ELAN group.  
−
−
−
Central point for accessing servers error log (LECS/BUS/LES)  
Drag and drop operations for add/remove/change on configuration  
Use of templates to ease the ELAN management  
Templates are predefined automated scenarios that hide the complexity  
of each ELAN elementary configuration action. The user will be helped  
with pop-up windows in case of errors. Examples follow:  
-
-
-
Create/remove ELANs to/from a domain  
Move a client from an ELAN to another one  
Administer/un-administer an ELAN  
•
Generic support of non-IBM (OEM) devices:  
−
Automatic discovery of OEM devices (switches or edge devices)  
For example, the ATM uplink of any LAN switch or bridge will be  
managed.  
−
−
Dynamic display of OEM devices with hook to specific management  
Generic profile, such as configuration and fault management of OEM  
devices (standard SNMP MIBs)  
•
Automatic discovery enhancement  
The automatic discovery process can be relied on:  
−
−
For the discovery of specific SNMP agents, such as OEM devices  
To filter the devices that are discovered, based on their IP address or  
device type  
−
To optimize polling by tuning its period for ATM devices  
•
Display of ATM workstations (node expanded view)  
−
−
Automatic discovery of ATM workstations attached to IBM ATM switches  
when the station adapter supports ILMI MIB variables, such as the IP  
address and ATM address.  
Generic profile, configuration and fault management of ATM  
standard-compliant workstations with SNMP agents.  
•
•
Command line interface  
Support of shell script-initiated commands for LANE.  
Global services  
−
Save and restore IBM ATM switches configuration through single-slot  
configuration, using configuration files.  
Chapter 8. IBM 8285 Management 153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
−
Global download of code updates for IBM ATM switches, bridges and  
concentrators; multiple selection list from EUI or flat file.  
•
Search facility  
Leverage of ObjectStore database used already by the Nways Campus  
Manager LAN:  
−
Automatic search of ATM devices on miscellaneous criterion, such as IP  
address, ATM address, user name and ELAN name.  
−
Same end user interface as Nways Campus Manager LAN.  
8.3.2 Prerequisites  
This section lists the recommended hardware and software requirements for the  
installation and operation of Nways Campus Manager ATM.  
Hardware Requirements: ISC System/6000 POWERstations or POWERservers  
(minimum 50 MHz CPU) with the following options:  
•
An IBM compatible mouse  
•
Swap space twice the amount of RAM. For a machine with 96 MB of  
memory, for example, the recommendation is 192 MB of free disk space  
for paging space.  
•
A 256-color (8-bit plane) display device of at least 16 inches.  
•
A display/graphic card that supports 1280*1024*8 pixels resolution, which  
is set to this mode. If your display is configured for 1024*760*8 pixels,  
push buttons at the bottom of some panels may not be displayed.  
•
At least 96 MB of RAM, if you do not install LAN Network Manager.  
•
At least 128 MB of RAM, if you install LAN Network Manager. The exact  
amount of RAM depends on the size of the network you are managing  
and the number of other applications and X-stations you may be  
supporting.  
•
At most 280 MB of free disk space if all components are installed.  
•
For Router and Bridge Manager you require the following:  
−
−
−
−
At least 60 MB of disk space for database files. Default location is  
/usr/rabmv2.  
At least 30 MB of disk space for program files for the server.  
Location must be /usr/rabmv2.  
At least 20 MB of disk space for program files for the client. Location  
must be /usr/rabmv2.  
For the server, you must have at least 32 MB of free disk space in  
the /tmp file system for the ObjectStore cache. You can change the  
location of this cache by setting the OS_CACHE_DIR and  
OS_COMMSEG_DIR environment variables to another directory.  
Both variables must be set in the same directory.  
−
For the client, you must have at least 16 MB of free disk space for in  
the /tmp file system for the ObjectStore cache. You can change the  
location of this cache by setting the OS_CACHE_DIR and  
OS_COMMSEG_DIR environment variables to another directory.  
Both variables must be set in the same directory.  
154 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
−
−
ObjectStore requires 8 MB of paging space beyond the paging space  
requirements of any existing applications.  
One of the following to install the software:  
-
-
-
-
4mm tape drive  
8mm tape drive  
1/4-inch tape drive  
CD-ROM drive  
•
A physical connection for running TCP/IP between IBM 8285 and Nways  
Campus Manager ATM station  
The requirements for the connection is as follows:  
−
−
Either Nways Campus Manager ATM directly attaches an ATM  
network to the IBM 8285 or attaches a legacy LAN via an ATM  
bridge/router.  
The following protocols are supported between the IBM 8285 and the  
ATM edge device, the Nways Campus Manager ATM workstation or  
the ATM bridge/router. The same protocol should be supported on  
both ends:  
-
-
CIP (RFC1577)  
Ethernet (DIX/Ethernet or IEEE 802.3) LAN Emulation  
(Forum-Compliant LAN Emulation V1.0)  
-
Token-Ring LAN Emulation (Forum-Compliant LAN Emulation  
V1.0)  
Note  
As no Forum-Compliant LAN Emulation driver is currently  
available for the AIX environment, the Nways Campus Manager  
ATM station should attach a legacy LAN and have the connection  
via an ATM bridge/router that supports Forum-Compliant LAN  
Emulation when Forum-Compliant LAN Emulation is used.  
Software Requirements:  
•
AIX V4.1.4 or AIX V4.2 for Campus Manager - ATM  
•
AIX V4.1.3, V4.1.4 or AIX V4.2 for Campus Manager - LAN and Router and  
Bridge Manager  
•
AIX Windows Environment/6000 V11R5  
In order to have drag and drop functions working properly under AIX  
V3.2.5, the PTF U442598 (x11rte.obj) and U441397 (x11rte.motif1.2) are  
required.  
•
OSF/Motif Version 1.2  
•
IBM SystemView NetView for AIX, V3R1, V4R1 Server, Client with latest  
PTFs, namely:  
−
−
With NetView for AIX V3, PTF U444911 is required.  
With NetView Server for AIX V4, PTF U444912 is required.  
•
ObjectStore 4.0.2 Runtime (shipped with Campus Manager Suite, Campus  
Manager - LAN, and Campus Manager - ATM packages) is required for:  
Chapter 8. IBM 8285 Management 155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
8250 and 8260/8285 Hub Manager  
Router and Bridge Manager  
Router and Bridge Manager  
FDDI Application (LAN Network Manager)  
LNM OS/2 Agent Application (LAN Network Manager)  
SNMP Bridge Application (LAN Network Manager)  
SNMP Token-Ring Application (LAN Network Manager)  
ATM Manager and LAN Emulation Manager  
•
The following is required for Router and Bridge Manager:  
Mid-Level Manager Version 2.3 or higher. (Mid-Level Manager is  
shipped with the Campus Manager Suite and Campus Manager - LAN  
packages.)  
−
For the server:  
-
-
AIX V4.1.3, V4.1.4, or V4.2  
NetView Version 4.1 server  
−
For all clients:  
-
-
AIX V4.1.3, V4.1.4, or V4.2  
NetView Version 4.1 client  
•
•
DynaText Browser V2.3 or later (shipped with the Campus Manager  
Suite, Campus Manager - LAN, and Campus Manager - ATM packages).  
For PSMs, the additional prerequisite software you will need is:  
−
−
−
Management Application Transporter (MAT) V2.1:  
For NetView for AIX V3, PTF U444148  
For NetView for AIX V4, PTF U444149  
8.3.3 Using Nways Campus Manager ATM for AIX with IBM 8285  
This chapter describes how to manage an IBM 8285 ATM network using Nways  
Campus Manager for AIX.  
8.3.3.1 Submap Hierarchy  
When you navigate through Nways Campus Manager ATM for AIX, you get the  
following submaps in a hierarchical level:  
•
Root submap  
•
ATM Campus submap  
•
Cluster submap  
You can get ATM Switch View by double-clicking on an ATM switch on the  
cluster submap. And also, several panels are available for each switch, such as  
device view (PSM), profile and configuration management. The following  
sections provide brief explanations of each submap and view.  
156 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
8.3.3.2 Root Submap  
The NetView for AIX Root submap shown in Figure 48 is the access point when  
using NCM-A.  
Figure 48. NetView for AIX Root Submap  
From the Root submap you can:  
•
Manage the ATM Campus  
When the ATM campus is managed, each node of the ATM campus will be  
polled in the amount of time provided in the Polling Interval field.  
•
Unmanage the ATM Campus  
An unmanaged ATM campus is not managed by the NCM-A, meaning that  
none of nodes in this campus will be polled by the NCM-A.  
•
Explode the ATM Campus icon  
This allows you to display the ATM cluster level view in the ATM Campus  
submap.  
8.3.3.3 ATM Campus Submap  
The ATM Campus submap shown in Figure 49 on page 158 displays all the  
clusters in your ATM campus. From this submap you can choose to have a  
cluster managed or unmanaged by NCM-A.  
Chapter 8. IBM 8285 Management 157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Figure 49. ATM Campus Submap  
8.3.3.4 ATM Cluster Submap  
The ATM Cluster submap shown in Figure 50 on page 159 displays the  
node-level view and contains the icons representing the IBM ATM switches and  
the ATM physical links between them.  
158 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Figure 50. ATM Campus Submap  
From this submap, you can manage or unmanage ATM switches. Also, from the  
pull-down list of CMA shown above, you can choose the following for each node:  
•
Open ATM View  
•
Profile  
•
Configuration  
•
Fault  
•
Device  
•
Monitor  
•
SLIP Configuration  
•
Download  
•
Call Logging  
•
LAN Emulation  
These options are explained in 8.3.4, “IBM 8285 Node Related Information.”  
8.3.4 IBM 8285 Node Related Information  
The following sections describe the options for IBM 8285 node-related  
information.  
Chapter 8. IBM 8285 Management 159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
8.3.4.1 8285 ATM View  
The ATM View shown in Figure 51 allows you to display the interface-level view  
and contain icons representing the physical ATM ports of the IBM 8285 and the  
ATM node internal interface. The interface number shown for each port is slot(1  
byte decimal)port(2 byte decimal). For example, the interface number for slot 3  
port 1 is 301. This view replaces the ATM Node submap provided by the ATMC.  
Figure 51. IBM 8285 ATM Node View - Star  
You can choose the type of view from the following:  
•
Star  
•
Row/Column  
•
List  
You can go to the other node management options described below by selecting  
an option from the pull-down list of ATM Node.  
8.3.4.2 Profile  
The profile panel shown in Figure 52 on page 161 allows you to modify the  
following:  
•
Contact Person  
•
Administratively-assigned Name  
•
Location  
160 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Figure 52. IBM 8285 Node Profile Panel  
8.3.4.3 Configuration  
The configuration panel shown in Figure 53 on page 162 can be used to:  
•
Display configuration information  
•
Lock and unlock selected ATM nodes  
This is done to ensure that the operator cannot unintentionally disable the  
port for exchanging network management information between the NCM-A  
and the switch.  
•
List the interfaces on the selected ATM node  
•
From the services option in the menu bar you can select any of two items:  
−
−
File Transfer  
Trace and Dump (System Trace, TRS Trace, System Dump, TRS Dump)  
Chapter 8. IBM 8285 Management 161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Figure 53. IBM 8285 Node Configuration Panel  
8.3.4.4 Fault  
The fault panel allows you to display the events received from the IP address of  
the selected IBM 8285.  
162 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
8.3.4.5 Device (8285 PSM)  
The device view shown in Figure 54 allows you to display the physical graphic  
view (PSM) of the IBM 8285 and to manage the device and related parameters.  
Figure 54. IBM 8285 Device View  
The view above shows three menu items. The Tool entry is not used. The next  
screens are organized with the same main bullets as used by the PSM, and are  
presented as follows:  
•
Edit  
This allows you to modify/update the TCP/IP and SNMP general parameters  
used by the IBM 8285 device to communicate with the SNMP managers.  
•
Management  
This allows you to perform the actual IBM 8285 device management. The  
following sub-items are also presented:  
−
Configuration  
This option allows you to perform IBM 8285 device configuration, such as  
IP configuration, microcode download, module configuration, and so on.  
−
−
Performance  
Fault  
This option allows you to set up traps to be sent to SNMP managers  
when a fault situation occurs.  
Chapter 8. IBM 8285 Management 163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
−
−
Accounting  
This option allows you to display and modify the MIB-II system  
information parameters.  
Security  
This option is not available for IBM 8285.  
•
Options  
This allows you to edit a memo file or controlling the polling rate to update  
the IBM 8285 graphic view.  
The IBM 8285 device graphic view has some hot spots where you can  
single-click or double-click to obtain a more detailed information and/or access  
configuration panels. The following describes some of those areas on the view:  
ATM Ports When you single-click on any port, the port is highlighted and the  
corresponding port configuration panel is displayed in the status area  
(the description box just below the IBM 8285 graphic view).  
When you double-click on any port, the port configuration dialog  
appears. This dialog enables you to manage the selected port.  
Console Port When you single-click on the console port, the port is highlighted,  
and the corresponding data is displayed in the status area.  
When you double-click on the console port, the file transfer dialog  
panel appears for the IP address of the TFTP server and the path of  
the file name for the microcode module last downloaded to the  
managed device.  
Reset  
When you double-click on the Reset button, the switch reset dialog  
box appears, enabling you to confirm the reset operation on the  
managed device.  
Background surface of the managed device When you single-click on the  
background surface of the managed device graphic the data  
describing the managed device will be displayed.  
When you double-click on the background surface of the managed  
device, the general information dialog panel appears and the general  
information data about the managed device is displayed.  
Refresh  
Selecting the Refresh button initiates a poll to the subsystem. Once  
the poll is completed, it displays the current configuration and status  
of the subsystem.  
PVC Configuration When you single-click on the PVC Configuration button, the  
PVC configuration panel appears. It allows you to display the PVCs  
currently defined to track the connection and to create a new PVC.  
SVC List When you single-click on the SVC List button, the SVC list panel  
appears. It allows you to display the SVCs currently established to  
show the characteristics to track the connection and to delete.  
File Transfer When you single-click on the File Transfer button, the file transfer  
panel appears. It allows you to use TFTP for the switch management,  
such as downloading the microcode and FPGA picocode from the  
management station to the switch.  
164 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Telnet  
When you single-click on the Telnet button, the management station  
establishes a telnet connection to the switch and provides you the  
console interface.  
Attached Device When you single-click on the Attached Device button, the  
attached device panel appears. It allows you to display the ATM  
devices attached to the switch.  
The color of a port on the managed device is a visual indication of its status and  
has the following meaning:  
Red  
The port is disabled.  
Yellow  
Gray  
Blue  
The port is enabled but not connected.  
The port is administratively disabled.  
The port state is unknown.  
Green  
The port is enabled and in service.  
The color of the console port indicates the status of the last file transfer and has  
the following meaning:  
Red  
Transfer failed.  
Blue  
Green  
Download status unknown.  
No transfer since startup, transfer in progress, or transfer successfully  
completed.  
A blue border around the managed device graphic means that the device is not  
responding or that communication to the device has encountered problems. The  
status and configuration information presented on the subsystem window  
represents the status before communication to the device was lost.  
8.3.4.6 Monitor  
The ATM monitor panel allows you to display an overview of the traffic rate  
going through the selected ATM subsystem.  
8.3.4.7 SLIP Configuration  
The SLIP Configuration panel allows you to add/modify SLIP configuration  
communicating with the switch.  
8.3.4.8 Download  
The Download panel allows you to download the microcode and FPGA picocode  
to the switch.  
8.3.4.9 Call Logging  
The call logging panel shown in Figure 55 on page 166 provides you to display  
the call log information corresponding to the IBM 8285 ports.  
Chapter 8. IBM 8285 Management 165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Figure 55. IBM 8285 Node Call Logging Panel  
8.3.4.10 LAN Emulation  
The LAN Emulation panel shown in Figure 56 displays the LANE components  
information corresponding to the IBM 8285 ports, such as the integrated  
LES/BUS, internal LEC and external LECS.  
Figure 56. IBM 8285 Node LAN Emulation Panel  
166 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Figure 57 on page 167 displays the new LAN Emulation application.  
Figure 57. ELAN View  
8.4 Nways Manager for Windows  
The following sections describe the information about Nways Manager for  
Windows, especially for the IBM 8285 management.  
8.4.1 Overview  
Nways Manager for Windows provides a low-cost, easy-to-use network  
management solution that allows you to proactively manage your campus  
network.  
Chapter 8. IBM 8285 Management 167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
As described above, Nways Manager for Windows provides very limited  
functions compared with Nways Campus Manager ATM for AIX to manage an  
ATM network but would be a good solution for management of stand-alone ATM  
workgroup switches.  
The new version of Nways Manager for Windows, V2, which supports IBM 8285,  
was announced in October 1996 and is now available in addition to V1.  
8.4.1.1 Nways Manager for Windows V1  
The Nways Manager for Windows V1 is a competitively priced integrated suite of  
network management applications that work seamlessly with the IBM NetView  
for Windows management platform to remotely control and monitor the following  
networking devices:  
•
IBM 8224 Ethernet Stackable Hub  
•
IBM 8230 Token-Ring Concentrator (Models 003, 013, 213, 04A, 04P)  
•
IBM 8271 Ethernet LAN Switch Model 001  
•
IBM TURBOWAYS 8282 ATM Workgroup Concentrator  
•
IBM 8281 ATM LAN Bridge  
•
IBM 8250 Multiprotocol Intelligent Hub  
•
IBM 6611 Network Processor  
•
IBM 2210 Nways Multiprotocol Router  
The Nways Manager for Windows program provides integrated and easy-to-use  
graphical interfaces for configuration, fault, and performance management  
solution for networks and can be used to manage a variety of SNMP managed  
devices in addition to those above mentioned.  
The suite is packaged with NetView for Windows V2 at a competitive price.  
Nways Manager for Windows has been enhanced via PTF UR44773 to support the  
following IBM networking devices:  
•
IBM 8238 Nways Token-Ring Stackable Hub  
•
IBM 8271 Ethernet LAN Switch Models 108  
•
IBM 8260 Multiprotocol Intelligent Switching Hub  
8.4.1.2 Nways Manager for Windows V2  
Nways Manager for Windows V2 is packaged with the NEWT TCP/IP stack and  
NetView for Windows as well as V1 but the versions are the latest (NEWT V4.6  
and NetView for Window V2.1).  
Nways Manager for Windows V2 provides the following functional enhancements  
in addition to V1:  
•
New PSMs Support  
The PSMs for the following devices are newly supported:  
−
−
−
IBM 8210 Multiprotocol Switched Services Server  
IBM 8225 Fast Ethernet Stackable Hub  
IBM 8230 Token-Ring Concentrator Model 04x RI/RO Module  
168 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
−
−
IBM 8235 DIALS Server (Models 001, 002, 011, 012, 021, 022, 031, 032, 051,  
052)  
IBM 8250 Multiprotocol Intelligent Hub feature:  
-
8250 Token-Ring 18-port Active Media Module  
−
IBM 8260 Multiprotocol Intelligent Switching Hub features:  
-
-
-
-
-
-
8250 Token-Ring 18-port Active Media Module  
Ethernet Flexible Concentration Module  
ATM Control Point Switch Module  
4-port 100 Mbps ATM Concentration Module  
12-port 25 Mbps ATM Concentration Module  
2-port 155 Mbps ATMFlex Concentration Module  
−
−
−
IBM 8271 Nways Ethernet LAN Switch Model 216  
IBM 8272 Nways Ethernet LAN Switch Model 216  
IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch features:  
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
8285 Expansion Unit  
8285 Base Unit 155 Mbps SMF I/O Card  
ATM 4-port 100 Mbps MIC or SC Fiber Module  
ATM 12-Port 25 Mbps UTP Concentrator Module  
ATM 2-Port 155 Mbps Flexible Media Module  
ATM 4-Port TR/Ethernet Bridge Module  
Utopia 1 ATM Carrier 1 or 2-slot Modules  
•
IBM 8285 Configuration Options  
PSMs for IBM 8285 also supports the following configuration options  
associated with above modules, but will not display the module in the IBM  
8285 graphic.  
−
−
−
−
−
−
LAN Emulation Trap Support  
Ability to display ATM attached devices  
Ability to backup and restore a configuration  
Ability to display SVCs  
Ability to manage SVC log files  
Ability to telnet into the 8285  
•
RMON Coupling  
IBM Nways RMON for Windows V1 is offered as a separate product that  
seamlessly integrates with Nways Manager for Windows through the use of  
its RMON PSM.  
Chapter 8. IBM 8285 Management 169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
8.4.2 Prerequisites  
This section lists the recommended hardware and software requirements for the  
installation and operation of Nways Manager for Windows.  
Hardware Requirements:  
•
Minimum 80486 DX processor at a minimum 33 MHz  
•
SVGA high-resolution workstation monitor support  
An SVGA adapter is required only if SVGA support is not built into the  
motherboard.  
•
16 MB RAM (24 MB for large networks)  
•
156 MB free hard disk (240 MB recommended) which includes:  
−
−
−
8 MB free hard disk for NETMANAGE NEWT V4.6  
125 MB free hard disk for NetView for Windows V2.1  
25 MB free hard disk for Nways Manager for Windows V2 and 14 MB  
for V1  
•
•
•
•
Network interface card with NDIS or ODI support  
CD-ROM drive  
3.5-inch diskette drive  
Mouse supported by Microsoft Windows  
Software Requirements:  
•
DOS 5.0 or later  
•
MIcrosoft Windows 3.1 or later  
•
NDIS or ODI device driver for the Network interface card  
8.4.3 Using Nways Manager for Windows with IBM 8285  
Please refer to Campus ATM Network Management Guidelines, SG24-5006 for  
network management using the latest software.  
170 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Appendix A. 8285 ATM Control Point Commands  
This appendix describes the various functions and features that are supported by  
the 8285 Control Point.  
A.1 Command Line Interface  
To be able to configure and manage the 8285 and the ATM media modules  
installed in the expansion unit, the 8285 provides a command line interface that  
can be accessed via an ASCII terminal connected locally (or via a modem) to the  
RS-232 port on the front panel of the module.  
The command line interface allows you to configure and display the status of the  
various components of the 8285 ATM switch system. Additionally it allows you to  
maintain the various software components of the 8285 by downloading new  
levels of microcode for these components. Finally, the command line interface  
provides you with the ability to collect traces and dumps of the various  
components in the event of problems that may occur in the ATM switching  
subsystem.  
A.1.1 How to Access the Command Line Interface  
To be able to access the command line interface, you need to connect an ASCII  
terminal (VT100 or compatible) to the RS-232 port on the 8285 base unit. This  
connection can be either a local connection or through a telecommunication line  
using a pair of modems. In the 8285 shipping group, you will find an attachment  
cable with adapters to be used for connecting the ASCII terminal to the RS-232  
port. You must ensure that the ASCII terminal is configured according to the  
following factory default settings for the RS-232:  
•
9600 baud  
•
8 data bits  
•
No parity  
•
1 stop bit  
These settings can be changed once a terminal with the previous configuration  
is connected. The process of how to change these settings is discussed in A.1.5,  
“How to Change Terminal Settings” on page 174.  
The command line interface has the following characteristics:  
•
The commands are not case-sensitive. The system interprets ABC  
(uppercase) the same as abc (lowercase).  
•
The 8285 command line accepts abbreviated command input, which enables  
you to enter a command by typing the minimum number of characters (that  
uniquely identifies the command) followed by the space bar. Pressing the  
space bar automatically fills the rest of the command.  
•
The system prompts you if you forget to enter a mandatory command.  
•
To get help, simply type ? on the command line. Also, when entering a  
command you get the system to display the next available options by  
entering ?.  
Copyright IBM Corp. 1996  
171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
•
All the commands can be abnormally terminated by pressing the Ctrl and C  
keys simultaneously.  
The following table is a quick reference to the procedures required to configure  
the ATM subsystem of the 8285. Some of them are mandatory; others are  
recommended.  
Table 37. 8285 Configurations SET Commands Quick Reference List  
Procedure  
8285 Commands  
Configure user and administrator passwords  
Configure 8285 terminal settings  
SET DEVICE PASSWORD  
SET TERMINAL BAUD  
SET TERMINAL DATA_BITS  
SET TERMINAL PARITY  
SET TERMINAL STOP_BITS  
SET TERMINAL PROMPT  
SET TERMINAL TIME_OUT  
SET TERMINAL HANGUP  
SET TERMINAL CONSOLE_PORT_PROTOCOL  
Configure 8285 device configuration  
SET CLOCK  
SET DEVICE NAME  
SET DEVICE LOCATION  
SET DEVICE CONTACT  
SET DEVICE DIAGNOSTICS  
Configure 8285 ATM address  
SET DEVICE ATM_ADDRESS  
Configure Classical IP parameters for 8285  
SET DEVICE IP_ADDRESS  
SET DEVICE DEFAULT_GATEWAY  
SET DEVICE ARP_SERVER  
Configure LEC IP parameters for 8285  
Configure SLIP parameters for 8285  
SET DEVICE LAN_EMULATION_CLIENT  
SET TERMINAL CONSOLE_PORT_PROTOCOL  
SET TERMINAL SLIP_ADDRESS  
SET TERMINAL BAUD  
Configure LE server parameters (LECS and  
LES/BUS) for 8285  
SET LAN_EMUL CONFIGURATION_SERVER  
SET LAN_EMUL SERVER  
Configure SNMP parameters for 8285  
SET COMMUNITY  
SET ALERT  
Configure ATM media modules  
SET MODULE  
SET PORT  
Configure ATM ports  
Configure NNI connection between Hubs  
Configure NNI connections ATM subnetworks  
Configure ESI for ATM stations  
SET LOGICAL_LINK  
SET STATIC_ROUTE  
SET ATM_ESI  
SET PVC  
Configure PVCs and PVPs  
Configure TFTP parameters for download/upload  
SET TFTP FILE_NAME  
SET TFTP FILE_TYPE  
SET TFTP SERVER_IP_ADDRESS  
SET TFTP TARGET_MODULE  
Configure trace/dump facilities  
SET TRACE  
172 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
A.1.2 Access Mode  
There are three levels of access mode to 8285 via the console port:  
•
•
•
User Mode  
When you are logged on as a user, you have access to some 8285  
commands with read-only access. This allows you to view ATM subsystem  
status, get help, clear counters, and log off. The factory default user  
password is a null string.  
Administrator Mode  
When you are logged on as administrator, you have access to all the 8285  
commands with read-write access, which allows you to display and modify  
the ATM switching subsystem in the 8285. The factory default administrator  
password is 8285.  
Maintenance Mode  
When you are logged on as administrator and enter the MAINTAIN command  
in administrator mode, you have access to maintenance functions, such as  
downloading out-of-band and clearing the ATM subsystem configuration. No  
password is required to access the maintenance mode from the  
administrator mode. To quit the maintenance mode, you have to enter the  
BOOT command to reset the ATM subsystem.  
Note  
You can access the maintenance mode only if you logged on with the  
administrator password from a local ATM control point session via the  
RS-232 port. You cannot access the maintenance mode from a remote  
session started with the TELNET command.  
There are no user IDs associated with these modes. Once you connect to the  
8285, you will be prompted to enter a password. The password that you enter  
determines if you get administrator or user.  
A.1.3 How to Change Administrator and User Password  
After logging in to 8285 for the first time, you are strongly advised to change the  
default password for the administrator, so you can prevent unauthorized users  
from being able to log on to the 8285 to view or modify your ATM network  
configuration.  
Figure 58 shows how you can change the administrator password. For security  
purposes, the values you enter are not displayed on the screen.  
ꢀ8285> set device password administrator  
ꢁ
Enter current administrator password:  
New password:  
Re-enter password:  
Password changed.  
ꢂ8285>  
ꢃ
Figure 58. Changing Administrator Password  
Appendix A. 8285 ATM Control Point Commands 173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Note  
8285 passwords are case-sensitive.  
You can also change the user password. Figure 59 shows an example of how it  
is changed.  
ꢀ8285> set device password user  
ꢁ
Enter current administrator password:  
New password:  
Re-enter password:  
Password changed.  
ꢂ8285>  
ꢃ
Figure 59. Changing User Password  
A.1.4 Resetting the Password to Factory Default  
If you forget the administrator password for the 8285, you can use the following  
procedure to reset the password to the factory default:  
1. Enter FORCE at the password prompt.  
2. Select the ATM Reset button on the 8285 front panel.  
A.1.5 How to Change Terminal Settings  
You can customize the terminal settings of the 8285 if you are logged on as  
administrator. The following commands are provided:  
•
Set Terminal Baud  
This command allows you to set the baud rate at which the 8285 will  
communicate with the attached console or modem. The following example  
shows you how to change the baud rate to 2400 bps:  
ꢀ
ꢁ
ꢃ
ꢂ8285> set terminal baud 2400  
Figure 60. Changing the Terminal Baud Rate  
•
Set Terminal Data_Bits  
This command lets you configure the 8285 to the number of data bits used by  
the attached console. For example, the following command allows you to  
change the number of data bits to 7:  
ꢀ
ꢁ
ꢃ
ꢂ8285> set terminal data_bits 7  
Figure 61. Changing the Terminal Data Bits  
•
Set Terminal Parity  
This command lets you configure the 8285to the same parity used by the  
attached console. The following example shows you how to change the  
parity bit to even:  
174 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
ꢀ
ꢁ
ꢃ
ꢂ8285> set terminal parity even  
Figure 62. Changing the Terminal Parity  
Note  
When you change the settings for the baud, data_bits, or parity  
parameters, a mismatch will result between your ASCII terminal and the  
8285. This mismatch will result in you not being able to access the 8285  
until you change the configuration of your terminal.  
•
Set Terminal Stop_Bits  
This command allows you to configure the 8285 to the number of stop bits  
used by the attached console or modem. The following example shows you  
how to change the number of stop bits to 2:  
ꢀ
ꢁ
ꢃ
ꢂ8285> set terminal stop_bits 2  
Figure 63. Changing the Terminal Stop Bits  
•
Set Terminal Prompt  
This command allows you to customize the prompt that is displayed when  
you are connected to the 8285. An example of this this command and the  
result is shown in Figure 64:  
ꢀ8285> set terminal prompt ATMWKGP>  
ꢁ
ꢃ
ꢂATMWKGP>  
Figure 64. Changing the Terminal Prompt  
This command is useful for identifying the 8285 to which you are connected.  
The factory default prompt is 8285>. It is recommended that you set the  
prompt to the device name you specify for the 8285. Refer to the SET  
DEVICE NAME command to show how to configure the 8285 device name.  
This will help you to identify the 8285 to which you are connected when using  
Telnet.  
•
Set Terminal Hangup  
This command allows you to configure 8285 to automatically disconnect the  
modem (drop DTR) when you log off. To do so, you must issue the following  
command:  
ꢀ
ꢁ
ꢃ
ꢂ8285> set terminal hangup disable  
Figure 65. Disabling the Terminal Auto Hangup  
The default is disable, which means that the modem will not hang up, and an  
unauthorized user may pick up your 8285 modem session.  
•
Set Terminal Time_Out  
This command allows you to set the number of minutes that you can remain  
logged on to an 8285 session without keyboard activity. This is a security  
Appendix A. 8285 ATM Control Point Commands 175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
measure that prevents unauthorized users from accessing and working in an  
open 8285 session when the 8285 console is left unattended. The default  
value is 0, which means that the terminal will never time out. An example of  
this command is as follows:  
ꢀ
ꢁ
ꢃ
ꢂ8285> set terminal time_out 10  
Figure 66. Changing the Terminal Timeout  
The value previously specified is in minutes and can go up to 30.  
After setting all the parameters for the terminal, you must ensure that you save  
them using the following command:  
ꢀ
ꢁ
ꢃ
ꢂ8285> save terminal  
Figure 67. Saving the Terminal Settings  
You can display the current settings for the terminal using the following  
command:  
ꢀ
ꢁ
ꢃ
ꢂ8285> show terminal  
Figure 68. Showing the Terminal Settings  
An example of the output you could get is shown in Figure 69.  
ꢀTerminal Parameters:  
ꢁ
ꢃ
Baud  
9600  
Data bits  
Hangup  
8
DISABLE  
NONE  
1
Parity  
Stop bits  
Timeout time 0  
ꢂ8285>  
Figure 69. Output from Show Terminal Command  
A.2 IBM 8285 ATM Command List  
Table 38 on page 177 shows the list of ATM commands supported by the IBM  
8285. For more information about the commands, refer to the IBM 8260 Nways  
Multiprotocol Switching Hub IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch ATM  
Command Reference Guide, SA33-0385 and the release note for ATM switch  
microcode you are using. The release note includes the latest information not  
described in the manual.  
176 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Table 38 (Page 1 of 2). IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch ATM Command List  
Command  
Access Mode  
Comments  
?
User  
Displays all available  
commands/parameters for next entering  
BOOT  
Maintenance  
Maintenance  
Administrator  
Administrator  
Maintenance  
Administrator  
Administrator  
CLEAR ALL  
CLEAR ATM_ESI  
CLEAR COMMUNITY  
CLEAR CONFIGURATION  
CLEAR ERROR_LOG  
CLEAR LAN_EMUL  
CONFIGURATION_SERVER  
CLEAR LOGICAL_LINK  
CLEAR PVC  
Administrator  
Administrator  
Administrator  
Administrator  
Maintenance  
Administrator  
User  
CLEAR STATIC_ROUTE  
DOWNLOAD INBAND  
DOWNLOAD OUT_OF_BAND  
DUMP TRS  
LOGOUT  
MAINTAIN  
Administrator  
User  
PING  
RESET ATM_SUBSYSTEM  
RESET MODULE  
Administrator  
Administrator  
For the module installed in the expansion  
unit  
REVERT  
Administrator  
Administrator  
Administrator  
Administrator  
Administrator  
Administrator  
Administrator  
Administrator  
SAVE  
SET ALERT  
SET ATM_ESI  
SET CLOCK  
SET COMMUNITY  
SET DEVICE  
SET LAN_EMUL  
CONFIGURATION_SERVER  
SET LAN_EMUL SERVER  
SET LOGICAL_LINK  
SET MODULE  
Administrator  
Administrator  
Administrator  
Administrator  
Administrator  
Administrator  
Administrator  
Administrator  
Administrator  
Administrator  
SET PORT  
SET PVC  
SET STATIC_ROUTE  
SET TERMINAL  
SET TFTP FILE_NAME  
SET TFTP FILE_TYPE  
SET TFTP SERVER_IP_ADDRESS  
Appendix A. 8285 ATM Control Point Commands 177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Table 38 (Page 2 of 2). IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch ATM Command List  
Command  
Access Mode  
Administrator  
Administrator  
User  
Comments  
SET TFTP TARGET_MODULE  
SET TRACE  
SHOW ALERT  
SHOW ATM_ESI  
SHOW CLOCK  
User  
User  
SHOW COMMUNITY  
SHOW DEVICE  
SHOW ERRORS  
SHOW FLASH  
User  
User  
Maintenance  
Maintenance  
User  
SHOW LAN_EMUL  
CONFIGURATION_SERVER  
SHOW LAN_EMUL SERVERS  
SHOW LOGICAL_LINK  
SHOW MODULE  
SHOW PORT  
User  
User  
User  
User  
SHOW PVC  
User  
SHOW STATIC_ROUTE  
SHOW TERMINAL  
SHOW TFTP  
User  
User  
User  
SHOW TRACE  
Administrator  
Maintenance  
Administrator  
Administrator  
User  
SWAP ACTIVE  
SWAP FPGA_PICOCODE  
SWAP MICROCODE  
TELNET  
UPLOAD  
Administrator  
Maintenance  
Administrator  
USER BAUD  
WRAP  
178 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Appendix B. Pinouts for Ports and Cables  
This appendix gives information on ports and cables PIN assignments.  
B.1 Pinouts for ATM25 and Other Common Network Connectors  
Most networking standards have developed specifications for using shielded or  
unshielded twisted-pair cabling with RJ-45 modular plugs to connect devices  
together. Table 39 illustrates the differences between the following cabling  
specifications:  
•
ATM25.6 (ATM Forum Standard)  
IBM adapters for this standard have an orange dot with a white line across it  
to easily distinguish from the next two types.  
•
ATM25.6 (Pre-Standard--Used by some early ATM devices)  
This adapter has a green dot on it indicating that it uses standard token-ring  
pinouts.  
•
Token-Ring  
This adapter has a green dot on it indicating that it uses standard token-ring  
pinouts.  
•
Ethernet (10Base-T)  
Table 39. RJ-45 Pin Assignments by Network Type  
Pin Number  
ATM25  
ATM25  
Token Ring  
Ethernet  
(Forum-  
Compliant)  
(Pre-Standard)  
(10Base-T)  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
RD +  
RD −  
TD +  
TD −  
RD +  
TD +  
RD +  
RD −  
TD −  
TD +  
RD +  
RD −  
TD −  
RD −  
TD +  
TD −  
B.2 Other Cabling Considerations  
Special cables are required in two specific instances:  
•
When connecting to pre-standard devices  
•
When connecting between two ATM switches  
Both of these instances are discussed below.  
Copyright IBM Corp. 1996  
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
B.2.1 Converter Cables  
Some early ATM 25-Mbps adapters, such as the IBM TURBOWAYS 25 ATM  
adapter (P/N 04H7370), use a pre-standard pin assignment schema based on the  
token-ring network cabling standard. To make these adapters compatible with  
the Forum-compliant ports of the 8285 switch, it is necessary to use a  
token-ring-to-ATM converter cable, available from IBM as P/N 10H3904. The  
pinouts for this cable are shown in Table 40.  
Table 40. Pin Assignments for Converter Cable (P/N 10H3904)  
Signal  
RD +  
RD −  
TD +  
Port Pin  
Adapter Pin  
1
2
7
8
4
5
3
6
TD −  
B.2.2 Crossover Cables  
The 8285 ports are designed to connect user devices and require a  
switch-to-switch crossover cable to connect to other ATM switches, just as a  
10Base-T hub does. The pinouts for this cable are shown in Table 41.  
Table 41. Pin Assignments for Switch-to-Switch Crossover Cable  
Signal  
RD +  
RD −  
TD +  
Port Pin  
Adapter Pin  
1
2
7
8
7
8
1
2
TD −  
180 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Appendix C. Part Numbers for Key Components  
Table 42. Spare Parts and Accessories  
Component  
8285 Base Part  
Number  
8285 Expansion  
Part Number  
Chassis  
51H4028  
47H2422  
47H2424  
29H4256  
58G9929  
Power supply  
51H4030  
51H4031  
51H4036  
51H4029  
51H3861  
51H4037  
Fan Unit  
Planar  
155 Mbps multimode I/O card  
155 Mbps monomode I/O card  
25 Mbps 4 Ports Expansion Card  
Rear Panel  
58G9831  
58G9863  
ATM 2-Port 155 Mbps Flexible Media  
Module  
ATM 3-Port 155 Mbps LAN Concentration  
Module  
51H4474  
ATM 4-Port 100 Mbps MIC Fiber Module  
ATM 4-Port 100 Mbps SC Fiber Module  
Video Distribution Module  
58G5845  
51H3650  
37H7725  
51H3829  
ATM 12-Port 25 Mbps UTP Concentrator  
Module  
ATM 4-Port TR/Ethernet Bridge Module  
ATM WAN Module  
58G9858  
51H4328  
58G9860  
47H2402  
51H4335  
51H4338  
51H4558  
51H4673  
51H4557  
51H4674  
58G9667  
ATM 1-Slot Carrier Module  
ATM 2-Slot Carrier Module  
1-port E3 I/O card  
1-port DS3 I/O card  
1-port OC3 I/O card (SMF)  
1-port OC3 I/O card (MMF)  
1-port STM1 I/O card (SMF)  
1-port STM1 I/O card (MMF)  
1-port ATM 155Mbps Multi-mode Fiber  
I/O card  
1-port ATM 155 Mbps Single-mode Fiber  
I/O card  
58G9855  
58G9858  
1-port ATM 155 Mbps UTP/STP I/O card  
(RJ-45)  
Interposer 25-pin F/M shielded  
Cable DTE/DCE 3.0m  
58G6756  
58G6757  
58G6758  
Cable DTE/DCE 13.5m  
Copyright IBM Corp. 1996  
181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
182 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Appendix D. Hints and Tips for the ATM 4-Port TR/Ethernet Bridge  
Module  
The ATM 4-Port TR/Ethernet Bridge Module is treated somewhat different from  
most of the other modules since it requires its own configuration program and is  
not configurable through the 8285 console.  
The following is a collection of useful information concerning the ATM 4-Port  
TR/Ethernet Bridge Module:  
_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/  
_/  
_/  
_/  
_/  
_/  
_/  
_/  
_/  
_/  
_/  
_/  
_/  
_/  
_/  
_/  
_/  
_/  
_/  
Nways 8285 ATM LAN Bridge module  
Operational Code Release 2.1  
Configurator  
Release 2.1  
September 1996  
_/ The Nways 8285 ATM LAN Bridge module is an integrated version _/  
_/ for the 8285 switch of the stand alone 8281 ATM LAN bridge: as _/  
_/ a consequence, the 8281 product number may still appear in the _/  
_/ documentation or in the configurator program menus of the Nways_/  
_/ 8285 ATM LAN Bridge Module.  
_/  
_/  
_/  
_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/_/  
--------------------------------------------------------------------  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
--------------------------------------------------------------------  
1. Important Notices  
1.1 Operational Software Versions  
1.1.1 Where to Get Updates  
1.1.2 What to do if operational code FLASH is corrupted.  
1.2 Configuration Utility Program Installation  
1.3 TCP/IP Slip Connection Setup  
1.3.1 IBM DOS TCP/IP  
1.3.2 Chameleon TCP/IP  
1.4 Configuration Utility Program and OS/2 with TCP/IP V2.0  
1.5 Configuration Utility Program and OS/2 with TCP/IP V3.0  
1.6 SNMP MIB Browser′ s Handling of Octet Strings  
1.7 OS/2 Japan  
1.8 NWays Campus Manager  
1.9 Problems with older ATM adapter code.  
1.10 Migrating from Release 1 to Release 2 code  
2. Release Notes  
2.1 Prerequisites  
2.1.1 8285 microcode version  
2.1.2 ATM server with IBM 100Mbits adapter TW100 Ballpeen OS/2 driver  
2.2 Network Management.  
2.3 Problems with memory dump utility on PCs with less than 8M RAM.  
2.4 User filter clarification.  
2.5 How to connect to the bridge using a modem.  
2.6 Problem w/ Configurator when bridge Max Frame Size is reduced.  
Copyright IBM Corp. 1996  
183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
2.7 Recovering from corrupted 8281 configuration.  
--------------------------------------------------------------------  
1. IMPORTANT NOTICES  
--------------------------------------------------------------------  
WARNING: PLEASE NOTE THAT BOTH THE CONFIGURATION UTILITY PROGRAM  
DISKETTE IMAGE AND THE OPERATIONAL SOFTWARE FILE FOR THE NWAYS  
8285 ATM LAN BRIDGE MODULE ARE DIFFERENT FROM THE STAND ALONE  
8281 ATM LAN BRIDGE MODULE. IN ORDER TO CLEARLY DISTINGUISH BETWEEN  
BOTH PRODUCTS, ALL THE NWAYS 8285 ATM LAN BRIDGE MODULE FILES ARE  
PREFIXED WITH AN ″H″ (LIKE HUB).  
THE CONFIGURATION UTILITY DISKETTE IMAGE FILE IS NAMED H8281CXY.DSK  
(X,Y being the release and subrelease levels), AND THE BRIDGE  
OPERATIONAL SOFTWARE FILE IS NAMED HX_YY.OPR (same notice for X,Y).  
1.1 Operational Software Versions  
For logistical reasons, the version of software loaded on  
the bridge may differ from the version shipped on the accompanying  
diskette. You will need to locally attach the Configurator,  
via RS-232 null-modem cable, to the bridge and examine the  
software Vital Product Data (VPD) returned by the bridge. Go to  
Utilities->Additional Utilities->Retrieve Bridge Status Report  
and view the status report which contains the VPD.  
The software versions are identified, primarily, by a Release and  
Subrelease. For example, Release 2, Subrelease 1 would be identified  
by the dot decimal number : v2.1 .  
If the software VPD returned to the Configurator from the bridge  
shows Release and Subrelease information that is vastly different  
(eg, 4.15) from the version information on the ″Operational Software  
and MIB″ diskette label, then new Operational Software needs to  
be loaded onto the bridge. The existing code is under a different  
(older) versioning scheme.  
If the software VPD returned to the Configurator from the bridge  
has the same Release information as on the diskette but the Subrelease  
is higher then the bridge has the later version. The version of  
code already on the bridge is more recent than the version of code  
on the diskette. You should acquire backup copies of the most recent  
version of Operational Software (See ″1.1.1 Where to Get Updates″ ) .  
1.1.1 Where to Get Updates  
The most recent versions of the ATM LAN Bridge module software  
(Configurator and Operational) can be gotten from the following  
sources:  
1) The ATMBIN disk on ATMPE user at LGEVMA system (Consult your IBM  
service representative).  
2) The IBM Networking World Wide Web home page:  
http://www.raleigh.ibm.com/826/826fix.html  
Select ″ATM TR/Ethernet LAN Bridge module (FC 5204)″ entry.  
Further instructions are provided online.  
184 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
1.1.2  
What to do if operational code FLASH is corrupted.  
If code download terminates abnormally then operational code FLASH  
may become corrupted. If this happens then bridge can not forward frames,  
or respond to most configurator commands. However, bridge can still  
communicate with configurator to load operational code via the serial  
port.  
1 - Select ″Load new code image via serial port″ from ″Utilities″ menu.  
2 - Choose the image to load.  
3 - Select OK.  
The configurator will automatically determine that the FLASH is corrupted  
and print a message stating that fact.  
1.2 Configuration Utility Installation  
Before you can use the ATM LAN Bridge Module Configuration Utility  
program you have to run the ATM LAN Bridge Module Configuration  
install setup program so it will work properly on your computer.  
You cannot just copy the files from the Installation disk to your  
hard disk. The files on the distribution disk are packed to save space.  
The install program unpacks those files and builds them on your working  
disk.  
1. Make Windows′ ″Program Manager″ the active window.  
2. From Windows′ ″Program Manager″, select ″File″, then  
select ″Run″. This will open the ″Run″ dialog box.  
Place the ATM LAN Bridge Module Configuration Utility Installation  
disk in your floppy drive. Type in the dialog box the  
command that will run the install program.  
If your floppy disk goes in your Drive ″A″, type:  
A:INSTALL  
If your floppy disk goes in your Drive ″B″, type:  
B:INSTALL  
Leave the ″Run Minimized″ box un-selected, and click the  
″OK″ command button (or press ″Enter″ ) .  
3. After a brief moment you will be prompted by a dialog box  
to enter the desired location for the ATM LAN Bridge Module  
Configuration Utility. This is the location that you want your  
Configuration files to be placed. It will suggest a drive and  
directory of ″C:\IBM8281″ .  
If you want the ATM LAN Bridge Module Configuration program files  
installed on a different drive or directory, just click the pointer to  
the right of the characters you want to change, backspace over  
the ones you want to erase, then type in the new designation.  
4. The install program will unpack the necessary files and  
place them into your directory. The status of the operation  
will be displayed as the setup program does this work.  
Appendix D. Hints and Tips for the ATM 4-Port TR/Ethernet Bridge Module 185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
5. The ATM LAN Bridge Module Configuration Utility will be automatically  
added to the program manager.  
6. The setup program will notify you when the installation is  
complete.  
1.3 TCP/IP SLIP Connection Setup  
In order to communicate with the ATM LAN Bridge Module hardware, the Configuration  
Utility uses TCP/IP via the winsock.dll. The configurator has been thoroughly  
tested with the IBM versions of TCP/IP (DOS and OS/2). However it has been  
demonstrated to work with the Chameleon TCP/IP protocol stack from NetManage  
and Win95 from Microsoft.  
*************************************************************************  
*** You will need a NULL modem cable to directly attach to the bridge ***  
*** using the SLIP interface.  
***  
*************************************************************************  
End to end the cable needs the following lines:  
25 pin  
======  
======== ( 25 pin female  
PC ‘-------------------------------• 8281 cable connector)  
====== ========  
-----------------  
----------------  
Pin Number Line  
Line Pin Number  
RD ---------------------------- TD 2  
3
2
7
TD ---------------------------- RD  
COMMON ---------------------------- COMMON  
3
7
9 PIN  
======  
======== ( 25 pin female  
PC ‘-------------------------------• 8281 cable connector)  
======  
----------------  
Pin Number Line  
========  
-----------------  
Line Pin Number  
RD ---------------------------- TD 2  
2
3
7
TD ---------------------------- RD  
3
7
COMMON ---------------------------- COMMON  
NULL MODEM CABLES  
NOTICE: The Transmit and Receive line #′ s are reversed on the 9 and 25  
connectors (on the PC side).  
******************************************************************  
****  
IMPORTANT NOTE REGARDING - UART TYPE  
****  
******************************************************************  
>>>NOTE: It is HIGHLY recommended that you use a workstation  
that has a Type 2 UART to ensure reliable transfer of  
data between the workstation and the ATM LAN Bridge Module.  
If you are not sure what type of UART your machine has  
SLIP will display the UART type on bringup. When SLIP  
186 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
is started it will display a line of information  
in a box across the screen. The UART type will be  
presented in this display.  
If you can locate the UART chip, it′ s type can be determined  
from the table below:  
TYPE 1: 8250, 16450  
TYPE 2: 16550, 16550A, 16550AF, 16550AFN  
Type 1 UART′ s only have single character buffer while the  
Type 2 UART′ s have a 16 character buffer. The problem is  
that Windows applications have trouble fetching characters  
fast enough to prevent the next incoming character from  
overwriting the single character buffer, resulting in  
″comm overrun″ errors. Sometimes running Windows in the  
″standard″ mode will permit the configurator to work on a  
Type 1 UART. To start Windows in the ″standard″ mode bring  
it up by typing:  
C:\win /s  
Also, certain TSR′ s, screen savers, and some video cards  
can aggravate this problem. This is a well documented  
problem and much discussion can be found by searching the  
world wide web for the keyword ″UART″ .  
1.3.1 IBM DOS TCP/IP SLIP Connection Setup  
IBM TCP/IP with CSD 2.1.1.4 MUST be already installed on the workstation.  
This version or later of IBM TCP is required! Use the TCP/IP CUSTOM  
application to set and enable the COM# port as a SLIP interface with the  
following configuration:  
IP Address: 1.2.3.6  
Destination Address: 1.2.3.5  
Modem speed: 19200 bps  
Port: COM#  
Note: # is the number of the COM port to be used.  
Because communications may be over a SLIP connection, running with  
Microsoft Windows, statements MUST be added to the SYSTEM.INI file  
to prevent Windows from taking over the COM ports. Add the following  
3 statements to the •386Enh‘ stanza of SYSTEM.INI for each COM  
COM port which is to be used by SLIP:  
•386Enh‘  
Com#AutoAssign=0  
Com#Base=0  
Com#Irq=-1  
Note: # is the number of the COM port to be disabled.  
AFTER YOU MAKE THESE CHANGES, YOU MUST RESTART WINDOWS!  
************************************************************  
Appendix D. Hints and Tips for the ATM 4-Port TR/Ethernet Bridge Module 187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
*** Test your SLIP connection by making sure you can ***  
*** ping the bridge (ping 1.2.3.5).  
***  
************************************************************  
Note: You must start TCP/IP (with tcpstart command )before  
starting Windows.  
1.3.2 Chameleon TCP/IP SLIP Connection Setup  
After Chameleon TCP/IP is installed, use the CUSTOM application to set  
and enable the COM# port as a SLIP interface with the following configuration:  
IP Address: 1.2.3.6  
Gateway: 1.2.3.5  
Modem : direct connection  
Modem speed: 19200 bps  
Port: COM#  
Flow control: ″none″  
Note: # is the number of the COM port to be used.  
The following statement MUST be added to the WIN.INI file  
to setup the mtu size.  
•TCPIP‘  
slipmtu=1500  
You will need a NULL modem cable if you are directly attached to  
the bridge using the SLIP interface.  
************************************************************  
*** Test your SLIP connection by making sure you can ***  
*** ping the bridge (ping 1.2.3.5).  
***  
************************************************************  
1.4 Configuration Utility Program and OS/2 with TCP/IP V2.0  
The TCP/IP V2.x for OS/2 must be installed including  
DOS/Windows access. The latest OS/2 TCP/IP 2.x CSDs must  
also be applied including the DOS/Windows access CSD.  
The TCP/IP SLIP interface must be enabled and configured  
by running tcpipcfg.  
check the enable box  
MTU size:  
VJ compression:  
IP address:  
1500  
off  
1.2.3.6  
destination IP address : 1.2.3.5  
The speed of the com port is not set through tcpipcfg.  
You must explicitly change the com port speed by issuing  
a mode command from the OS/2 prompt.  
188 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
mode com1: 19200, none, 8  
After setting these parameters and restarting TCP you should  
first attempt to ping the 8281 bridge to prove connectivity before  
using the 8281 configurator.  
ping 1.2.3.5  
If the ping is successful you may then use the 8281 configurator  
serially attached.  
1.5 Configuration Utility Program and OS/2 with TCP/IP V3.0  
1.You must have the following installed.  
- Multi-Protocol Transport Services (MPTS V2.0).  
... with the Dos\Windows Access Kit selected.  
... Configure LAN adapter with TCP/IP protocol.  
NOTE: If you don′ t have a LAN adapter you must  
add the following lines to your CONFIG.SYS  
following the line containing  
″DEVICE=C:\MPTN\PROTOCOL\AFOS2.SYS″ .  
.
.
DEVICE=C:\MPTN\PROTOCOL\AFINET.SYS  
DEVICE=C:\MPTN\PROTOCOL\IFNDIS.SYS  
.
- TCP/IP V3.0 for OS/2  
2. The serial port and TCP/IP SLIP interface must be enabled and configured.  
MTU size:  
VJ compression:  
IP address:  
1500  
off  
1.2.3.6  
destination IP address : 1.2.3.5  
You may want to create a command file ...  
( NOTE: example shows connection to COM2)  
Line 1 => mode com2: 19200,n,8  
Line 2 => slip -com2 -ifconfig 1.2.3.6 1.2.3.5 -mtu 1500 -speed 19200  
After setting these parameters and restarting TCP you should  
first attempt to ping the 8281 bridge to prove connectivity before  
using the 8281 configurator.  
ping 1.2.3.5  
If the ping is successful you may then use the 8281 configurator  
serially attached.  
1.6  
SNMP MIB Browser′ s Handling of Octet Strings  
When using some MIB Browsers (eg, NetView for AIX), don′ t be  
alarmed when queries for octet string MIB objects yield *strange*  
results. Typically, the browser is not able to distinguish  
between octet strings that are supposed to be human-readable  
Appendix D. Hints and Tips for the ATM 4-Port TR/Ethernet Bridge Module 189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
(ie, ASCII data) and those that are merely hexadecimal data  
(ie, MAC addresses). Therefore, you may be dealing with a  
MAC address whose bytes happen to map to the ASCII character  
set and your browser will reflect readable characters on the  
screen!  
The MIB Browser shipped with the current version of NetView for  
AIX applies the following logic:  
IF vector contains all human-readable bytes  
THEN represent as DisplayString.  
IF all but the last byte of the vector are human-readable bytes  
AND the last byte is the null terminator (ie, ′ \0′ )  
THEN represent as DisplayString.  
ELSE  
respresent as hexadecimal data.  
For example, a MIB variable that is a 6 byte octet string having the  
value 0x616263313233 will be represented by the browser as ″abc123″ .  
The expectation is that additional features of SNMPv2 will allow  
browsers to better determine the intended representation of octet  
string data. Until that time, please be aware of this potentially  
ambiguous situation when using MIB Browser applications.  
1.7 OS/2 Japan  
This section provides instructions on how to run the Configuration  
Utility Program in a Japanese OS/2 WARP environment.  
The Configurator should be installed on the workstation the same way  
as any other Windows application. This is accomplished by invoking  
WIN-OS/2 (fullscreen or Windows-on-OS/2-desktop) and installing according  
to the instructions in ″1.2 Configuration Utility Installation″  
section of this README file.  
Once installed, certain WIN-OS/2 DOS settings need to be set. The below  
steps are applied in the context of the WIN-OS/2 Fullscreen icon.  
1) From the WIN-OS/2 Fullscreen icon, open the Settings dialog by double  
clicking the right mouse button and selecting the ″Settings″ popup menu item.  
2) From the Settings dialog, select the ″Session″ tab. From the Session  
dialog, select the ″All DOS and WIN-OS/2 Settings″ radio button and  
click OK.  
3) From the All DOS and WIN-OS/2 Settings dialog, select the DOS_DEVICE  
item from the settings list (on left) and set the value (on right) to  
″C:\TCPIP\BIN\VDOSTCP.SYS″ . Click on Save.  
The above steps should also be applied if you desire to run the Configurator  
in the context of a OS/2 program icon (directly on desktop) or  
Windows-on-OS/2-desktop icon.  
Be sure to read, and follow, the ″1.4 Configuration Utility Program  
and OS/2″ section of this README in order to insure TCP/IP  
communication over SLIP.  
190 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
1.8  
NWays Campus Manager  
The ATM Forum Compliant version of the 8281 requires version  
1.0.5 or above of the 8281 PSM to provide device management  
under NWays Campus Manager for Windows, NWays Campus Manager  
for AIX, and NWays Campus Manager for HP-UX.  
1.9  
Problems with older ATM adapter code.  
The first GA code for the IBM Token Ring FC LAN Emulation ATM adapters  
had a bug that caused RI fields to be incorrectly constructed. This  
error resulted in token ring connectivity problems across the 8281  
bridge. You should obtain the latest GA drivers for the adapters.  
1.10  
Migrating from Release 1 to Release 2 code  
If you have an 8281 bridge which has Release 1 code and configuration,  
perform the following steps to migrate to Release 2 (Forum Compliant) code:  
- Download Release 2 operational code.  
- Reset the 8281 bridge (to activate Release 2 code).  
- Setup Release 2 configuration using Release 2 Configurator.  
- Send Release 2 profile using Release 2 Configurator.  
- Reset the 8281 bridge (to activate Release 2 configuration).  
--------------------------------------------------------------------  
2. RELEASE NOTES  
--------------------------------------------------------------------  
2.1 Prerequisites  
2.1.1 8285 Microcode Version  
The 8285 boot microcode must be at version 1.2 (or higher) and the  
8285 operationalmicrocode must be at version 1.2 (or higher).  
Use the SHOW DEVICE command on the CPSW console and contact your  
IBM service representative if required.  
2.1.2 ATM server with IBM 100M bits adapter TURBOWAYS 100 OS/2 driver  
If this adapter is used on the ATM server with the OS/2 device  
driver, the CSD level of the driver must be 1.22 or higher.  
If this is not the case, the MAX FRAME SIZE parameter in the OS/2  
device driver PROTOCOL.INI file must be increased from 4096 to 4200  
bytes. MAX FRAME SIZE value of 4096 is not compatible with NETBIOS  
and can create a problem if this protocol is used between the LAN  
clients and the ATM server.  
2.2 Network Management.  
The 8285 ATM LAN Bridge Module is now fully supported by the Network  
Management applications (up to release 1.14 of the Operational code  
software, the 8285 ATM LAN Bridge was handled by the Network management  
applications strictly in the same way as the Stand Alone 8281 ATM LAN Bridge).  
ATMC PTF NUMBER UR45751 MUST BE INSTALLED AS A PREREQUISITE FOR THE 8285  
ATM LAN BRIDGE SUPPORT BY THE NETWORK MANAGEMENT APPLICATIONS WITH THE BRIDGE  
OPERATIONAL CODE STARTING FROM LEVEL 1.15.  
2.3 Problems with memory dump on machines with less than 8M RAM.  
Appendix D. Hints and Tips for the ATM 4-Port TR/Ethernet Bridge Module 191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Memory dump for error log sector aborts with a system error before it  
completes. Memory dump should be done only at the request of product  
support. In most cases the partially received dump file contains enough  
information for analysis.  
2.4 User filter clarification.  
- ATM bridge supports only inbound filters.  
- In Token Ring mode ATM bridge applies filters only on broadcast frames.  
- In Ethernet mode ATM bridge applies filters on every frame.  
- ATM bridge performs the following computation to determine whether  
to apply a user filter: if (frame and filter_mask) equal filter_value then  
apply filter.  
2.5 How to connect to the bridge using a modem.  
The following paragraphs explain how to configure telephone modems  
and TCP/IP software to enable communications via telephone lines.  
The ATM bridge configurator program can be used via telephone modems.  
The only modem command issued by ATM bridge is ATE0 to turn echo off.  
The modem must be configured before it is attached to the bridge. We  
tested several modems, and found that the following configuration works  
well for Hayes compatible modems:  
AT &F  
- Restore to factory setting.  
AT &K0 - Disable flow control.  
AT &D0 - Allow phone connection to stay up when bridge  
resets.  
AT S0=2 - Auto-Answer on second ring.  
AT &W  
- Save configuration.  
Since ATM bridge communicates via TCP/IP, the SLIP protocol must  
be configured to dial remote modem. The dial string must be set to  
ATDTXXXXXXXX where ″XXXXXXXX″ is the telephone number, and the ″Auto-Dial″  
option must be enabled. For some reason not enabling Auto-Dial option  
and using SLIPDIAL after TCP/IP is started does not work.  
Once connection is established between modems, ping the bridge at  
1.2.3.5 to verify connectivity. We noticed that it may take up to  
30 seconds for some modems to forward pings successfully. The delay is  
probably due to auto learning of DTE speed between modem and ATM bridge.  
The bridge communicates on it′ s serial port at 19200, 8 data, 1 stop,  
no parity.  
To insure that your modem is compatible with the bridge, reset the  
bridge while modem is attached and powered on, but does not have phone  
connection. After the bridge resets verify that you can dial in and  
ping the bridge. One modem we tested, Motorola Codex 3260, did not pass this  
test. The problem was most likely caused by ATM bridge sending various  
messages out the serial port while it is resetting.  
2.6 Problem: Configurator communication errors when Max Frame Size  
is reduced below 1500 bytes.  
Release 1 versions of the bridge and Configurator would allow IP frames  
as large as 1518 bytes. If the bridge′ s ″Max Frame Size″ is set lower than this  
the 8281 bridge will throw away the IP frames (and subsequent retries) to  
and from the configurator. Thus the configurator and bridge could not complete  
Profile sends or retrievals successfully. Release 2 of the 8281 and configurator  
should work with ″Max Frame Size″ set to 1112 bytes or higher. If there is a  
192 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
requirement to set the ″Max Frame Size″ lower than 1112, then you will need to  
use the serial port for communicating with the bridge.  
2.7  
Recovering from corrupted 8281 configuration.  
If you observe unusual problems after loading bridge profile or loading  
new operational code then it is possible that 8281 configuration is  
corrupted. To return the bridge into it′ s ″uninitialized″ state use  
the configurator utilities menu to erase the configuration.  
Appendix D. Hints and Tips for the ATM 4-Port TR/Ethernet Bridge Module 193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
194 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Appendix E. IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs  
This appendix shows the latest version (Version 1.6, Oct 1996) of IBM ATM  
campus switch private MIBs:  
•
IBM Hub-Specific MIB Extensions  
•
IBM Signalling Extensions  
•
IBM PVC Management Extensions  
•
IBM ATM Statistics MIB Extensions  
--  
-- Copyright (c) 1995 International Business Machines Corp.  
-- All Rights Reserved.  
--  
-- ====================================================================  
-- Version: 1.1 - 07/07/95  
-- + agents OID for different products  
-- + administrative OID for test types  
-- + interface new administrative state wrap-reply  
-- + interface new operational states for wrap & failing  
-- + interface clocking, scrambling, subslot  
-- + interface available and reserved bandwidth  
-- + swap microcode  
-- + switch statistics  
--  
-- Version: 1.2 - 08/17/95  
-- + interface new operational states for bandwidth configuration  
-- + switch max bandwidth  
-- + version of backup microcode  
--  
-- Version: 1.3  
-- + new tftp error code: file-already-exists  
-- + new interfaceMediaType: coaxial-cable and backplane  
-- + switchStatistics: rename into globalThroughput  
-- + atm kit (utopia) carrier module support  
-- + interfaceTable: new attribute maxBandwidth  
-- + interfaceTable: new attribute frame format  
-- + interfaceTable: new value for interfaceOperState:  
-- disabled-no-bandwidth  
-- + interfaceTable: interfaceScrambling becomes read-only  
--  
-- Version: 1.4  
-- + support for the 8285: expansion group, featureTable  
-- + moduleTable: support for the daughter cards on the atm kit  
-- + support for the redundant switch  
-- + support for config filetype and the save/revert option  
--  
-- Version: 1.5  
-- + expansion group  
-- + 25M module support  
-- + LAN Emulation group  
-- + integrated MSS server  
-- + WAN interfaces  
-- + functionsConfiguration  
Copyright IBM Corp. 1996  
195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
-- + Hub Chassis: chassisAgents, conc, env, modules, ocPower, ocInventory.  
-- + moduleOperState: incompatible-level  
-- + interfaceTable: interfaceScrambling becomes read-write  
--  
-- Version: 1.6  
-- + 3x155M module support  
-- + chassis traps  
-- + PVC multicast calltype added  
-- + PVC multicast : Add createAndWait value for atmPvcEpRowStatus  
-- ====================================================================  
ATM-SWITCHING-NODE-MIB DEFINITIONS ::= BEGIN  
IMPORTS  
Counter, Gauge, IpAddress, DisplayString, enterprises,  
TimeTicks  
FROM RFC1155-SMI  
OBJECT-TYPE  
FROM RFC-1212  
sysObjectID, ifPhysAddress, ifIndex  
FROM RFC1213-MIB;  
ibm  
OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { enterprises 2 }  
OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { ibm 6 }  
ibmProd  
atmSw  
OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { ibmProd 33 }  
-- Contact JB. Schmitt (SCHMITT at LGEPROFS)  
-- TEXTUAL CONVENTIONS =====================================================  
DateAndTime ::= OCTET STRING (SIZE(8))  
-- A date and time specification, from SNMPv2 RFC 1443  
--  
-- Octets Contents  
-- ====== ========  
-- 1-2 year  
Range  
=====  
0..65535  
-- 3  
-- 4  
-- 5  
-- 6  
-- 7  
-- 8  
month  
1..12  
day  
1..31  
hour  
0..23  
minutes  
seconds  
deci-seconds  
0..59  
0..60 (use 60 for leap-second)  
0..9  
RowStatus ::= INTEGER {  
active(1),  
notInService(2),  
notReady(3),  
createAndGo(4),  
createAndWait(5),  
destroy(6)  
}
-- A way of creating/deleting rows in tables,  
-- from RMON RFC 1271 and SNMPv2 RFC 1443  
196 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
--  
-- active: row available for use by the managed device  
-- notInService: row exists but is unavailable for use  
-- notReady: row exists but some information is missing  
-- createAndGo: create and use row  
-- createAndWait: create row but do not use it now  
-- destroy: remove row  
NetPrefix ::= OCTET STRING (SIZE(0..13))  
-- A network prefix part, as defined in the UNI V3.0 specification  
AtmAddress ::= OCTET STRING (SIZE(0..20))  
-- An ATM Address, as defined in the UNI V3.0 specification  
-- It consists of a network prefix part and an End-User part  
--  
-- Three types of format exist for the network prefix part:  
-- a = DCC Format  
-- b = ICD Format  
-- c = E.164 Format  
--  
-- The End-User part consists of an ESI and a SEL area.  
--  
--  
--  
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20  
-- a=AFI!.DCC.!DFI!..AA...!RSRVD!.RD..!AREA.!.....ESI........!SEL  
-- b=AFI!.ICD.!DFI!..AA...!RSRVD!.RD..!AREA.!.....ESI........!SEL  
-- c=AFI!....E.164..............!.RD..!AREA.!.....ESI........!SEL  
-- IBM-8260 ATM MIB ========================================================  
-- ATM sub-system: ATM switch + ATM modules  
node OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { atmSw 1 }  
-- Agent Identification  
agents OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { atmSw 2 }  
ibm8260 OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { agents 1 }  
ibm8285 OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { agents 2 }  
-- Administrative Objects  
admin OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { atmSw 3 }  
testType OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { admin 1 }  
internalLoopback OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { testType 1 }  
externalLoopback OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { testType 2 }  
-- Node Objects  
base OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { node 1 }  
dateTime OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX DateAndTime  
ACCESS read-write  
Appendix E. IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The local date and time in the ATM agent.″  
::= { base 1 }  
lastChange OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX DateAndTime  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS deprecated  
DESCRIPTION  
″The date and time of the last major change detected:  
- date and time reset  
- agent IP address(es), subnet mask(s), default gateway changed  
- LAN Emulation or IP ARP server address(es) changed  
- system parameters (name, contact, location) changed  
- module Changed  
-- module added/removed  
-- administrative State changed (isolate/attached)  
- interface changed:  
-- administrative State changed (enabled/disabled)  
-- operational state changed  
This variable is updated in relation with the following traps:  
- hello trap  
- change trap  
- linkUp/linkDown traps.″  
::= { base 2 }  
lock OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER {  
secured (1),  
unlock (2),  
disabled (3)  
}
ACCESS read-write  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The purpose of this variable is to protect the path between  
the hub and the network management station.  
When set to secure (1), it is not possible to:  
- disable a port:  
-- if the SNMP request was received on this port  
-- if a LAN Emulation or an IP ARP server is on this port  
- isolate a module:  
-- if the SNMP request was received on this port  
-- if a LAN Emulation or an IP ARP server is on this port  
When set to unlock (2), the parameters referenced  
above can be modified for a limited time (30 seconds).  
When set to disabled (3), no protection is provided.  
Trying to modify one of these parameters results in a  
genErr error code in the Get-Response and a trap is  
returned to the agent.″  
::= { base 3 }  
ipArpServerAtmAddress OBJECT-TYPE  
198 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
SYNTAX AtmAddress  
ACCESS read-write  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The ATM address of the ARP server used when communicating  
with the switch agent using Classical IP over ATM (RFC 1577).″  
::= { base 4 }  
-- base.5 intentionnally left unused  
systemState OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER {  
reset (1),  
switch-a (2),  
switch-b (3),  
base-only (4)  
}
ACCESS read-write  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″This variables indicates the currently active switch.  
When the active switch is in slots 9/10, switch-a is returned.  
When the active switch is in slots 11/12, switch-b is returned.  
On a 8285 ATM workgroup, when there is no expansion  
installed, base-only is returned; when there is an  
expansion installed, switch-a is returned.  
When reset is set, the complete atm-subsystem is reset and a  
switch swap over may occur if the switch electing conditions  
have changed since the last reset.″  
::= { base 6 }  
backupMode OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER {  
noBackUp (1),  
primary (2),  
secondary (3)  
}
ACCESS read-write  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″This variable controls the way the active switch  
will be elected at the next reset of the atm subsystem,  
and controls also the reset of the atm-subsystem.  
When set to primary, the switch module currently in use  
is defined as the primary switch to elect as the active  
switch, if possible, at the next reset of the atm subsystem.  
When set to secondary, the switch module currently in use  
is defined as the secondary switch. If another switch  
module is present, and can be elected then this  
other switch will become the active  
switch, at the next reset of the atm subsystem.  
noBackUp is returned for the atm subsystems which do  
not support the redundant switch function.″  
::= { base 7 }  
functionsConfiguration OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER {  
dynamicRouting-noLanEmulationServer (1),  
staticRouting-LanEmulationServer (2),  
Appendix E. IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
dynamicRouting-LanEmulationServer (3)  
}
ACCESS read-write  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″This variable controls the configuration of the  
functions in the control point.  
This attribute cannot be set in the 8285, when read,  
on a 8285 functionsConfiguration is always equal to  
dynamicRouting-LanEmulationServer.  
When this attribute is set, the configuration of  
the functions is saved in the non volatile memory  
and the atm subsystem is automatically reset.  
When dynamicRouting-noLanEmulationServer is set  
the dynamic routing function is active. The selection  
of the routes when a connection is established  
will be automatic through the SSI ports.  
The LAN emulation servers cannot be started if  
functionsConfiguration is equal to  
dynamicRouting-noLanEmulationServer.  
When staticRouting-LanEmulationServer is set, no automatic  
route selection accross the SSI ports will be performed  
by the atm-subsystem.  
The routing will be performed only through the  
defined static routes.  
The ports cannot be set with the atm access equal to SSI.  
All the ports previously configured as SSI ports are  
changed to UNI, when the atm-subsystem is restarts after  
the change of functionsConfiguration into  
staticRouting-LanEmulationServer.  
dynamicRouting-LanEmulationServer cannot be set on an  
8260.″  
::= { base 8 }  
-- Traps Control  
traps OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { node 2 }  
hello OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER {  
enabled (1),  
disabled (2)  
}
ACCESS read-write  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″When disabled, the hello trap is neither sent.  
When enabled, the hello trap can be sent by the agent when the  
appropriate trap condition is detected.″  
::= { traps 1 }  
-- Physical Description  
physical OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { node 3 }  
-- Switch Control  
switchTable OBJECT-TYPE  
200 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF SwitchEntry  
ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″This table controls slot attachement to the ATM switch.  
An ATM module is operational only when inserted in a slot which  
is defined as attached to the switch.″  
::= { physical 1}  
switchEntry OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX SwitchEntry  
ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″Entries of switchTable. Each entry corresponds to a slot that  
is physically wired to the switch. These slots may be attached  
to or isolated from the ATM switch.″  
INDEX { switchSlotIndex }  
::= { switchTable 1 }  
SwitchEntry ::= SEQUENCE {  
switchSlotIndex  
INTEGER,  
switchAdminState  
INTEGER,  
switchOperState  
INTEGER  
}
switchSlotIndex OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER (1..64)  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″A slot number controlled by the switch.″  
::= { switchEntry 1 }  
switchAdminState OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER {  
isolate (1),  
attach (2)  
}
ACCESS read-write  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The desired state of the slot connection to the switch.  
When a slot is isolated from the switch, the switch traffic  
from this slot to the switch is disabled. As a result, if  
an ATM module is plugged in this slot, it will not be  
operational.  
When a slot is attached to the switch, the switch is ready  
to receive ATM traffic from this slot. As a result, if an  
ATM module is plugged in this slot, it can be used for  
ATM traffic.″  
::= { switchEntry 2 }  
switchOperState OBJECT-TYPE  
Appendix E. IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
SYNTAX INTEGER {  
isolated (1),  
attached (2)  
}
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The actual state of the slot connection to the switch.  
When the administrative state is set to ISOLATE, the  
operational state becomes ISOLATED.  
When the operational state is set to ATTACH, the operational  
state may become either ATTACHED or ISOLATED depending on  
the hardware current status of the slot.″  
::= { switchEntry 3 }  
-- ATM modules  
moduleTable OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF ModuleEntry  
ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″This table provides the list of ATM modules in the hub.″  
::= { physical 2}  
moduleEntry OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX ModuleEntry  
ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″Entries of moduleTable.″  
INDEX { moduleSlotIndex }  
::= { moduleTable 1 }  
ModuleEntry ::= SEQUENCE {  
moduleSlotIndex  
INTEGER,  
moduleType  
INTEGER,  
moduleDescription  
DisplayString,  
moduleSerialNumber  
DisplayString,  
moduleSoftwareVersion  
DisplayString,  
moduleHardwareVersion  
INTEGER,  
moduleAdminState  
INTEGER,  
moduleOperState  
INTEGER,  
moduleErrors  
Counter,  
moduleMaxVpc  
INTEGER,  
moduleUsedVpc  
INTEGER,  
202 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
moduleMaxVcc  
INTEGER,  
moduleUsedVcc  
INTEGER  
}
moduleSlotIndex OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER (1..64)  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The slot number for this module.″  
::= { moduleEntry 1 }  
moduleType OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER {  
unknown (1),  
switch (2),  
atm-100-Mbps (3),  
atm-155-Mbps-2-ports-LAN (4),  
atm-kit (5),  
atm-base (6),  
atm-lan-bridge (51),  
atm-25-Mbps (7),  
atm-wan (52),  
atm-mss-server (53),  
atm-155-Mbps-3-ports-LAN (8)  
}
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The type of module attached to the ATM switch in this  
slot.  
The ′ unknown′ value is used when the ATM agent  
is unable to get information for this module (the  
module is isolated from the switch or is not operational).″  
::= { moduleEntry 2 }  
moduleDescription OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX DisplayString (SIZE (0..255))  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″A textual description of this module.  
This description is blank when no description is available.″  
::= { moduleEntry 3 }  
moduleSerialNumber OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX DisplayString (SIZE (0..13))  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The serial number for this module.″  
::= { moduleEntry 4 }  
moduleSoftwareVersion OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX DisplayString  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
Appendix E. IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
DESCRIPTION  
″The version and release number for this module  
firmware (microcode).″  
::= { moduleEntry 5 }  
moduleHardwareVersion OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX DisplayString  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The Part Number (P/N) and Engineering Change (EC) level  
for this module and Plant Location.″  
::= { moduleEntry 6 }  
moduleAdminState OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER {  
ready (1),  
reset (2)  
}
ACCESS read-write  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The administrative state of this module.  
On an 8260, when set to reset for an entry associated to  
the active switch/control point module, the whole atm subsystem is  
reset and a switch swap over may occur if the backupMode  
criterium has been changed since the last reset.  
When set to reset for an entry associated to a module  
which is not the active Control Point/Switch module,  
only this module is reset.″  
::= { moduleEntry 7 }  
moduleOperState OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER {  
unknown (1),  
operational (2),  
not-operational (3),  
standby (4),  
maintenance (5),  
testing (6),  
switch-error (7),  
incompatible-level (8)  
}
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The operational state of this module.  
When unknown, the module cannot be accessed  
by the Control Point.  
When operational, the module is operational.  
When not-operational, the module is not operational.  
When standby, the module is a redundant switch module  
ready to be used.  
When maintenance, the module is a redundant switch  
module currently in maintenance mode.  
When testing, the module is a redundant switch module  
currently running diagnostics.  
When switch-error, the module is a redundant switch module  
not operational, not ready to be used because an error  
204 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
has been detected.  
When incompatible-level the module is a redundant switch module  
operational, but its microcode level is not compatible with  
the microcode level of the active control point switch  
module and the active configuration is not copied in the  
redundant module. If a switch over is performed, the  
current configuration is not restored. To guarantee a  
good restoration, the back level switch must be upgraded.  
″
::= { moduleEntry 8 }  
moduleErrors  
OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX Counter  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The number of errors detected by this module on the traffic  
from the switch to this module.″  
::= { moduleEntry 9 }  
moduleMaxVpc OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The maximum number of VPC supported by this module.  
The current number of VPC that can be used is the difference  
between moduleMaxVpc and moduleUsedVpc.″  
::= { moduleEntry 10 }  
moduleUsedVpc OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The number of VPCs currently in use for this module.  
The current number of VPCs that can be used is the difference  
between moduleMaxVpc and moduleUsedVpc.″  
::= { moduleEntry 11 }  
moduleMaxVcc OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The maximum number of VCCs supported by this module.  
The current number of VCCs that can be used is the difference  
between moduleMaxVcc and moduleUsedVcc.″  
::= { moduleEntry 12 }  
moduleUsedVcc OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The number of VCC currently in use for this module.  
The current number of VCC that can be used is the difference  
between moduleMaxVcc and moduleUsedVcc.″  
::= { moduleEntry 13 }  
Appendix E. IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
-- ATM ports  
portTable OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF PortEntry  
ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″This table provides the list of ports attached to  
the ATM switch (ATM ports). These ports belong to ATM modules  
inserted in slots that are attached to the ATM switch.″  
::= { physical 3}  
portEntry OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX PortEntry  
ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″Entries of portTable. Each entry corresponds to a port that  
belongs to an ATM module. This module must be inserted in a  
slot that is attached to the ATM switch.″  
INDEX { portSlotIndex,  
portIndex }  
::= { portTable 1 }  
PortEntry ::= SEQUENCE {  
portSlotIndex  
INTEGER,  
portIndex  
INTEGER,  
portInterface  
INTEGER  
}
portSlotIndex OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER (1..64)  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The slot number of this port′ s module.″  
::= { portEntry 1 }  
portIndex OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER (1..64)  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The port number for this module.″  
::= { portEntry 2 }  
portInterface OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The interface number of this port.″  
::= { portEntry 3 }  
-- ATM interfaces  
206 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
interfaceTable OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF InterfaceEntry  
ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″For each ATM port, this table maps the MIB-II interface index for  
this port with its physical slot and port numbers.″  
::= { physical 4}  
interfaceEntry OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX InterfaceEntry  
ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″Entries of the interfaceTable.  
Each entry corresponds to a port that belongs to an ATM module.  
This module must be inserted in a slot  
that is attached to the ATM switch.″  
INDEX { interfaceIndex }  
::= { interfaceTable 1 }  
InterfaceEntry ::= SEQUENCE {  
interfaceIndex  
INTEGER,  
interfaceSlot  
INTEGER,  
interfacePort  
INTEGER,  
interfaceConnector  
INTEGER,  
interfaceAdminState  
INTEGER,  
interfaceOperState  
INTEGER,  
interfaceAtmAccess  
INTEGER,  
interfaceMediaType  
INTEGER,  
interfaceMediaSpeed  
INTEGER,  
interfaceMediaErrors  
Counter,  
interfaceSubSlot  
INTEGER,  
interfaceClocking  
INTEGER,  
interfaceScrambling  
INTEGER,  
interfaceAvailableBandwidth  
INTEGER,  
interfaceAllocatedBandwidth  
INTEGER,  
interfaceMaxBandwidth  
INTEGER,  
interfaceFrameFormat  
INTEGER  
}
Appendix E. IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
interfaceIndex OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The interface number of the port represented by this entry.  
This is the same number as the index used to represent this  
interface in the MIB-II interface table.″  
::= { interfaceEntry 1 }  
interfaceSlot OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER (1..64)  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The slot number of this ATM port′ s module.″  
::= { interfaceEntry 2 }  
interfacePort OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER (1..64)  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The port number of this ATM port.″  
::= { interfaceEntry 3 }  
interfaceConnector OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER {  
unknown (1),  
internal (2),  
mic (3),  
sc-Duplex (4),  
monomode (5),  
db-9 (6),  
rj45 (7),  
bnc (8),  
db-15 (9)  
}
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″Whether this port is an internal port (on the backplane)  
or an external connector.″  
::= { interfaceEntry 4 }  
interfaceAdminState OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER {  
enabled (1),  
disabled (2),  
wrap-reply (3),  
wrap-far-end (4)  
}
ACCESS read-write  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The administrative state for this port.  
When set to disabled, no ATM traffic can pass on this  
port; all connections (SVC and PVC) are cleared.  
When set to wrap-reply, this interface is wrapped so that  
208 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
all the traffic received from the attached line is sent  
back on this line. If the interface state is not changed,  
it will automatically go back to the disabled state after  
one minute.  
When interfaceAdminState is equal to wrap-far-end,  
then the interface located on the other side of the  
link is now wrapped.  
wrap-reply can only be set for 155 and wan ports.  
wrap-far-end cannot be set.″  
::= { interfaceEntry 5 }  
interfaceOperState OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER {  
unknown (1),  
disabled-nosignal (2),  
disabled-idle (3),  
no-signal (4),  
idle (5),  
in-service (6),  
pvcOnly (7),  
failing-internal (8),  
misConfigured (9),  
wrongNetworkPrefix (10),  
wrongNodeNumber (11),  
disabled-failing (12),  
failing-line (13),  
wrap-no-signal (14),  
wrap-idle (15),  
wrap-failing-internal (16),  
wrap-failing-line (17),  
idle-no-bandwidth (18),  
idle-internal-error (19),  
disabled-no-bandwidth (20),  
wrap-far-end-no-signal (21),  
wrap-far-end-idle (22),  
wrap-far-end-failing (23),  
wrap-far-end-failing-line (24)  
}
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The operational state for this port:  
- unknown: the status of this port is unknown (this can  
be the result of a module in error)  
- disabled-nosignal: no activity is detected at the physical  
layer while the port is disabled.  
If the port is a SSI port, the  
bandwidth configuration is valid.  
- disabled-idle:: activity from the remote device  
attached to this port has been  
detected by the physical layer.  
The port is disabled.  
If the port is a SSI port, the bandwidth  
configuration is valid.  
- failing: an internal hard error has been detected on  
this port while the port is enabled  
- no signal: no activity is detected at the physical  
layer while the port is enabled  
- idle: activity from the remote device attached to this  
Appendix E. IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
port has been detected by the physical layer.  
The port is enabled.  
- in-service: the remote device successfully acknowledges  
ILMI polling requests and SVC registration  
- pvcOnly: the remote device succesfully acknowledges  
ILMI polling requests but it rejects the ATM  
prefix registration. Only PVCs are supported.  
- misConfigured: an SSI to UNI or an SSI to NNI configuration  
has been detected  
- wrongNetworkPrefix: the switches on each end of an SSI link  
have incompatible network prefixes (the  
12 first bytes have different values)  
- wrongNodeNumber: the switches on each end of an SSI link  
have the same ATM node Numbers.  
- failing-line: the port is enabled and a invalid  
signal is detected on the line  
- disabled-failing: the port is disabled and an  
anomaly is detected, either internal  
or external.  
- wrap-no-signal: the port is internally wrapped so that  
all the traffic received on the attached line is  
returned unchanged on the line.  
No activity is detected at the physical  
layer.  
- wrap-idle: the port is internally wrapped so that  
all the traffic received on the attached line is  
returned unchanged on the line and  
a valid signal is detected on the line.  
- wrap-failing-internal: an internal failure has been  
detected when the port has been  
turned into the wrap-reply state.  
The actual state of the port is  
undefined.  
- wrap-failing-line: the port is internally wrapped so that  
all the traffic received on the attached  
line is returned unchanged on the line  
and an invalid signal is detected  
on the line.  
- idle-no-bandwidth: the port is enabled and activity  
from the remote device is detected but  
there is not enough bandwidth to operate  
the port with its current configuration.  
This state does not apply for UNI port.  
- idle-internal-error: The port is enabled and activity  
from the remote device is detected but  
an internal error has occurred during  
the checking of the bandwidth configuration.  
This may be due to a lack of connection  
ressources in the module where this port is  
located.  
- disabled-no-bandwidth:  
the enabling of the port is not  
possible because  
there is not enough bandwidth to operate  
the port with its current configuration.  
This state applies only for a SSI port.  
- wrap-far-end-no-signal:  
the port is in wrap-far-end  
mode, ie the remote end of the line is  
210 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
wrapped, and no signal is detected on the  
line.  
- wrap-far-end-idle:  
the port is in wrap-far-end  
mode, ie the remote end of the line is  
wrapped, and a valid signal is detected  
on the line.  
- wrap-far-end-failing:  
the port is in wrap-far-end  
mode, ie the remote end of the line is  
wrapped, and an internal error is detected.  
- wrap-far-end-failing-line:  
the port is in wrap-far-end  
mode, ie the remote end of the line is  
wrapped, and an invalid signal is detected  
on the line.  
When disabled, the port may be in only one of the following  
states:  
- unknown, disabled-failing, disabled-nosignal or  
disabled-idle, disabled-no-bandwidth.″  
::= { interfaceEntry 6 }  
interfaceAtmAccess OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER {  
unknown (1),  
uni (2),  
ssi (3),  
nni (4)  
}
ACCESS read-write  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The type of ATM access offered on this port:  
- UNI: User Network Interface  
- SSI: Switch-to-Switch interface  
- NNI: Network-to-Network interface.  
The ATM access can be modified only when the  
port is disabled.″  
::= { interfaceEntry 7 }  
interfaceMediaType OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER {  
unknown (1),  
monomode-fiber (2),  
multimode-fiber (3),  
twistedPair (4),  
utp (5),  
stp (6),  
coaxial-cable (7),  
backplane (8),  
long-range-fiber (9)  
}
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The type of media supported on this port.″  
::= { interfaceEntry 8 }  
Appendix E. IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
interfaceMediaSpeed OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The speed of this interface, in bits per second.″  
::= { interfaceEntry 9 }  
interfaceMediaErrors OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX Counter  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The number of physical layer errors detected on this media  
such as violation errors and length errors.″  
::= { interfaceEntry 10}  
interfaceSubSlot OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″When equal to 0, this interface (and its physical connector)  
is directly located on the module identified by the slot  
number.  
When equal to a non-zero value, this number identifies a  
feature card of the module that is used by this interface.″  
::= { interfaceEntry 11}  
interfaceClocking OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER {  
internal (1),  
external (2)  
}
ACCESS read-write  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The source of the bit clock used for data transmission.  
When set to external, the source is the clock received  
from the line.  
The clocking can be modified only when the  
port is disabled.  
The clocking can only be modified on 155 Mbits ports  
for which the atm access is UNI or NNI.″  
::= { interfaceEntry 12}  
interfaceScrambling OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER {  
off (1),  
cell (2),  
frame (3),  
cell-and-frame (4),  
cell-in-receive-only (5),  
cell-in-transmit-only (6)  
}
ACCESS read-write  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″Whether data scrambling is used when transmitting on this  
212 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
line. Scrambling may be applied at the cell level,  
at the frame level or at cell and frame level.  
The scrambling configuration can only be modified  
for a wan interface.  
cell-in-receive-only applies only for a wan interface.  
In this case, the cells are descrambled when received,  
and are not scrambled when transmitted.  
cell-in-transmit-only can only be set for a wan interface.  
In this case, the cells are not descrambled when received,  
and are scrambled when transmitted.″  
::= { interfaceEntry 13}  
interfaceAvailableBandwidth OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″For a UNI or a NNI port: the current bandwidth available  
for the reserved bandwidth connections on this port.  
For a SSI port: the current bandwidth available  
on this port.  
It is in bits per second.″  
::= { interfaceEntry 14}  
interfaceAllocatedBandwidth OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″For a UNI or a NNI port: the bandwidth, in bits per second,  
currently used by the reserved bandwidth connections  
on this port.  
For a SSI port: the bandwidth, in bits per second,  
currently reserved on this port.″  
::= { interfaceEntry 15}  
interfaceMaxBandwidth OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-write  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″For a SSI port: the maximum bandwidth usable on this port.  
Out of this defined bandwidth: at most 85% are usable for  
the reserved bandwidth connections and at least 15% are  
usable for the non reserved bandwidth connections.  
The interfaceMaxBandwidth must not exceed the  
physical bandwidth of this port: interfaceMediaSpeed.  
The minimum valid value to set for the  
interfaceMaxBandwidth is 60000 bps, which is the  
bandwidth requested to set a non-reserved bandwidth  
connection on this ssi link.  
The interfaceMaxBandwidth must be equal on each side  
of an SSI link to avoid route computation deadlocks.  
The default value is equal to interfaceMediaSpeed.  
For a port which is not a SSI port, the maximum  
bandwidth cannot be changed and remains equal to  
interfaceMediaSpeed.  
The interfaceMaxBandwidth is given in bits per second.  
The interfaceMaxBandwidth can be modified only when the  
Appendix E. IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
port is disabled.″  
::= { interfaceEntry 16}  
interfaceFrameFormat OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER {  
none (1),  
sonet-sts-3c (2),  
sdh-stm-1 (3),  
ds3 (4),  
e3 (5)  
}
ACCESS read-write  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The format of the frames exchanged on this port.  
For a 155 Mbits LAN port, 2 formats are supported:  
sonet-sts-3c and sdh-stm-1. It can only be  
modified if the port atm access is UNI or NNI.  
The frame format of a wan port cannot be modified.  
For the other ports, the frame format cannot be  
modified and is always returned as none.  
The frame format can be changed only when the port  
is disabled.″  
::= { interfaceEntry 17}  
-- switch statistics  
globalThroughputStats OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { physical 5 }  
globalThroughputMonitoring OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER {  
on (1),  
off (2)  
}
ACCESS read-write  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″When on, the switch throughput is monitored.  
When off, the switch thoughput is not monitored.  
Note that the monitoring decreases the system  
overall performances.″  
::= { globalThroughputStats 1 }  
globalThroughputAggregateOutCells OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX Counter  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The total number of cells transmitted from the  
switch.  
Note that this value is the aggregate throughput  
of all the ports on several minutes.″  
::= { globalThroughputStats 2 }  
receiveTopList OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX DisplayString  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
214 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
″The ifindexes of the five most receiving interfaces.  
The first ifindex given is the one corresponding to  
the interface which has received the more cells  
during the last polling interval.  
All ifIndexes are separated by a blank character.  
If there are less than 5 interfaces receiving data,  
there are less than 5 ifindexes listed.″  
::= { globalThroughputStats 3 }  
transmitTopList OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX DisplayString  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The ifindexes of the five most transmitting interfaces.  
The first ifindex given is the one corresponding to  
the interface which has sent the more cells  
during the last polling interval.  
All ifIndexes are separated by a blank character.  
If there are less than 5 interfaces transmitting data,  
there are less than 5 ifindexes listed.″  
::= { globalThroughputStats 4 }  
globalMaximumCellThroughput OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The maximal number of cells that can be transmitted  
through the switch in one second.″  
::= { globalThroughputStats 5 }  
-- ATM optional features  
optionalFeatureTable OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF OptionalFeatureEntry  
ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″This table provides the list of the optional ATM features  
installed in the ATM subsystem.″  
::= { physical 6 }  
optionalFeatureEntry OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX OptionalFeatureEntry  
ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″Entries of the optionalFeatureTable.″  
INDEX { optionalFeatureSlotIndex,  
optionalFeatureSubslotIndex }  
::= { optionalFeatureTable 1 }  
OptionalFeatureEntry ::= SEQUENCE {  
optionalFeatureSlotIndex  
INTEGER,  
optionalFeatureSubslotIndex  
INTEGER,  
Appendix E. IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
optionalFeatureHardwareVersion  
DisplayString,  
optionalFeatureNumberOfPorts  
INTEGER,  
optionalFeatureDescription  
DisplayString  
}
optionalFeatureSlotIndex OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER (1..64)  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The slot number for this optional feature card.″  
::= { optionalFeatureEntry 1 }  
optionalFeatureSubSlotIndex OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER (1..16)  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The sub-slot number for this optional feature card.″  
::= { optionalFeatureEntry 2 }  
optionalFeatureHardwareVersion OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX DisplayString  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The Part Number (P/N) and Engineering Change (EC) level  
and Plant Location for this optional feature card.″  
::= { optionalFeatureEntry 3 }  
optionalFeatureNumberOfPorts OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The number of ports present on this feature card.″  
::= { optionalFeatureEntry 4 }  
optionalFeatureDescription OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX DisplayString (SIZE (0..255))  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″A textual description of this optional feature.  
This description is blank when no description is available.″  
::= { optionalFeatureEntry 5 }  
-- Cross-Connect Table  
connections OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { node 4 }  
-- VCL Cross Connect Table  
vcXConnectTable OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF VcXConnectEntry  
216 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″This table contains the cross-connections set-up in  
the switch for all existing VCL-based PVCs and SVCs.″  
::= { connections 1}  
vcXConnectEntry OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX VcXConnectEntry  
ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″Entries of vcXConnectTable.″  
INDEX { vcXInIndex ,  
vcXInVpi,  
vcXInVci,  
vcXOutIndex,  
vcXOutVpi,  
vcXOutVci }  
::= { vcXConnectTable 1 }  
VcXConnectEntry ::= SEQUENCE {  
vcXInIndex  
INTEGER,  
vcXInVpi  
INTEGER,  
vcXInVci  
INTEGER,  
vcXOutIndex  
INTEGER,  
vcXOutVpi  
INTEGER,  
vcXOutVci  
INTEGER,  
vcXType  
INTEGER,  
vcXDirection  
INTEGER  
}
vcXInIndex OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The interface number for this ATM port.″  
::= { vcXConnectEntry 1 }  
vcXInVpi OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The VPI value for this connection.″  
::= { vcXConnectEntry 2 }  
vcXInVci OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
Appendix E. IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The VCI value for this connection.″  
::= { vcXConnectEntry 3 }  
vcXOutIndex OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The interface number for this ATM port.″  
::= { vcXConnectEntry 4 }  
vcXOutVpi OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The VPI value for this connection.″  
::= { vcXConnectEntry 5 }  
vcXOutVci OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The VCI value for this connection.″  
::= { vcXConnectEntry 6 }  
vcXType OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER { unicast (1),  
multicast (2)  
}
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″Whether this cross-connection is part of a unicast or a  
multicast connection.″  
::= { vcXConnectEntry 7 }  
vcXDirection OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER { upstream (1),  
downstream (2)  
}
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″Whether this entry identifies this cross-connection in  
the upstream or downstream flow, as seen from the root.  
Downstream means that the connection was set up from the  
in parameters (interface, VPI, VCI) to the out parameters  
(interface, VPI, VCI).  
In particular, for a multicast SVC, this means that the  
call initiator (the root in this case) is on the interface  
side labeled vcXInIndex.  
Upstream means that the connection was set up from the  
218 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
out parameters (interface, VPI, VCI) to the in parameters  
(interface, VPI, VCI).  
As a result, any cross-connection is modeled in this table  
as two entries, depending on whether it is seen in the  
up or down stream.″  
::= { vcXConnectEntry 8 }  
-- VPL Cross-Connect Table  
vpXConnectTable OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF VpXConnectEntry  
ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″This table contains the cross-connections set-up in  
the switch for all existing VPL-based PVCs and SVCs.″  
::= { connections 2}  
vpXConnectEntry OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX VpXConnectEntry  
ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″Entries of vpXConnectTable.″  
INDEX { vpXInIndex ,  
vpXInVpi,  
vpXOutIndex,  
vpXOutVpi}  
::= { vpXConnectTable 1 }  
VpXConnectEntry ::= SEQUENCE {  
vpXInIndex  
INTEGER,  
vpXInVpi  
INTEGER,  
vpXOutIndex  
INTEGER,  
vpXOutVpi  
INTEGER,  
vpXType  
INTEGER,  
vpXDirection  
INTEGER  
}
vpXInIndex OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The interface number for this ATM port.″  
::= { vpXConnectEntry 1 }  
vpXInVpi OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
Appendix E. IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
DESCRIPTION  
″The VPI value for this connection.″  
::= { vpXConnectEntry 2 }  
vpXOutIndex OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The interface number for this ATM port.″  
::= { vpXConnectEntry 3 }  
vpXOutVpi OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The VPI value for this connection.″  
::= { vpXConnectEntry 4 }  
vpXType OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER { unicast (1),  
multicast (2)  
}
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″Whether this cross-connection is part of a unicast or a  
multicast connection.″  
::= { vpXConnectEntry 5 }  
vpXDirection OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER { upstream (1),  
downstream (2)  
}
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″Whether this entry identifies this cross-connection in  
the upstream or downstream flow, as seen from the root.  
Downstream means that the connection was set up from the  
in parameters (interface, VPI) to the out parameters  
(interface, VPI).  
Upstream means that the connection was set up from the  
out parameters (interface, VPI) to the in parameters  
(interface, VPI).  
As a result, any cross-connection is modeled in this table  
as two entries, depending on whether it is seen in the  
up or down stream.″  
::= { vpXConnectEntry 6 }  
-- Neighbor Devices  
neighbor OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { node 5 }  
220 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
nbrTable OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF NbrEntry  
ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″This table contains basic characteristics on adjacent  
ATM devices attached to this switch.″  
::= { neighbor 1}  
nbrEntry OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX NbrEntry  
ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″Entries of neighborTable. Each entry corresponds to a port that  
belongs to an ATM module. This module must be inserted in a slot  
that is attached to the ATM switch.″  
INDEX { nbrIndex }  
::= { nbrTable 1 }  
NbrEntry ::= SEQUENCE {  
localIndex  
INTEGER,  
nbrIpAddress1  
IpAddress,  
nbrIpAddress2  
IpAddress,  
nbrAtmAddress  
AtmAddress,  
nbrIndex  
INTEGER,  
nbrDescriptor  
DisplayString,  
nbrOid  
OBJECT IDENTIFIER,  
nbrName  
DisplayString,  
nbrLocation  
DisplayString,  
trunkId  
INTEGER }  
localIndex OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The interface number for the port represented by this  
entry.″  
::= { nbrEntry 1 }  
nbrIpAddress1 OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX IpAddress  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″One of the IP addresses of the ATM SNMP agent of the node  
attached to the port/slot defined by this entry.  
When not available, 0.0.0.0 is returned.″  
Appendix E. IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
::= { nbrEntry 2 }  
nbrIpAddress2 OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX IpAddress  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″One of the IP addresses of the ATM SNMP agent of the node  
attached to the port/slot defined by this entry.  
When not available, 0.0.0.0 is returned.″  
::= { nbrEntry 3 }  
nbrAtmAddress OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX AtmAddress  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The ATM identification of the node attached to the  
port/slot defined by this entry.  
When not available, a null string is returned.″  
::= { nbrEntry 4 }  
nbrIndex OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The interface number of the adjacent node to which the  
connection defined by this entry is attending.  
When not available, 0 is returned.″  
::= { nbrEntry 5 }  
nbrDescriptor OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX DisplayString (SIZE (0..255))  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The value of the MIB-II sysDescr as reported by the  
device attached to this port.  
When not available, a null string is returned.″  
::= { nbrEntry 6 }  
nbrOid OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX OBJECT IDENTIFIER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The value of the MIB-II sysOID as reported by the  
device attached to this port.  
When not available, a null string is returned.″  
::= { nbrEntry 7 }  
nbrName OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX DisplayString (SIZE (0..255))  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The value of the MIB-II sysName as reported by the  
device attached to this port.  
222 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
When not available, a null string is returned.″  
::= { nbrEntry 8 }  
nbrLocation OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX DisplayString (SIZE (0..255))  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The value of the MIB-II sysLocation as reported by the  
device attached to this port.  
When not available, a null string is returned.″  
::= { nbrEntry 9 }  
trunkId OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The internal identifier for this trunk.  
Set to 0 if not a trunk.″  
::= { nbrEntry 10 }  
-- TFTP  
tftp OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { node 6 }  
transferControl OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER {  
ready (1),  
download (2),  
upload (3)  
}
ACCESS read-write  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″A file transfer is initiated through a start command.″  
::= { tftp 1 }  
transferDate OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX DateAndTime  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The date and time of the last transfer.″  
::= { tftp 2 }  
serverIpAddress OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX IpAddress  
ACCESS read-write  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The IP address of the server used for file transfer.″  
::= { tftp 3 }  
fileName OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX DisplayString (SIZE(0..128))  
ACCESS read-write  
STATUS mandatory  
Appendix E. IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
DESCRIPTION  
″The name of the file to transfer.″  
::= { tftp 4 }  
fileType OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER {  
unknown (1),  
bootCode (2),  
operationalCode (3),  
errorLog (4),  
systemTrace (5),  
trsTrace (6),  
-- (7) intentionnally left unused  
trsDump (8),  
configuration (9)  
}
ACCESS read-write  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The type of file to transfer.  
Boot and operational codes can only be dowlnoaded.  
Logs, traces and dumps can only be uploaded. ″  
::= { tftp 5 }  
fileTarget OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-write  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The module target to which the transfer applies.  
When set to 0, the transfer applies to the agent itself.″  
::= { tftp 6 }  
transferResult OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER { not-initialized (1),  
transfer-successful (2),  
upload-in-progress (3),  
download-in-progress (4),  
generic-error (5),  
no-response-from-host (6),  
connection-lost (7),  
file-not-found (8),  
file-empty (9),  
file-too-big (10),  
access-rights-violation (11),  
invalid-file-header (12),  
checksum-error (13),  
transfer-error (14),  
hardware-error (15),  
file-already-exists(16),  
config-unreadable-version(17),  
config-file-empty(18),  
config-impossible(19),  
config-internal-error(20),  
config-applied-ok(21)  
}
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
224 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
″The result of the latest file transfer.  
When one of the TFTP variables is modified, this  
variable is reset to not-initialized.  
When a configuration file is downloaded, the content of  
the configuration file is checked. If the file is valid  
and if a reset is mandatory then the atm subsystem is  
reset automatically.  
If the configuration file is not valid or if a reset  
is not required, the following values are returned in  
transferResult:  
- config-unreadable-version: the control point  
does not support the version of configuration file.  
This configuration file has probably been built  
by a further version of control point.  
- config-file-empty: the configuration file is not valid  
- config-impossible: the configuration file cannot  
be applied (internal error, or file corrupted)  
- config-internal-error: internal error detected while  
checking the configuration file.  
- config-applied-ok: the configuration file is valid  
and a reset is not mandatory.″  
::= { tftp 7 }  
-- Service  
service OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { node 7 }  
-- Traces  
traces OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { service 1 }  
sysTrace OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER { on (1),  
off (2)  
}
ACCESS read-write  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″When on, the hub general trace facility is started.  
Messages are stored in the hub in a file that can be  
retrieved through TFTP.  
When off, the general trace facility is stopped and  
messages are no longer logged.″  
::= { traces 1 }  
trsTrace OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER { on (1),  
off (2)  
}
ACCESS read-write  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″When on, the Topology and Routing Selection trace is  
started.  
Messages are stored in the hub in a file that can be  
retrieved through TFTP.  
When off, the control point trace facility is stopped and  
messages are no longer logged.″  
::= { traces 2 }  
Appendix E. IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
-- Dumps  
dumps OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { service 2 }  
-- dumps.1 intentionnally left unused  
trsDump OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER { ready (1),  
start (2)  
}
ACCESS read-write  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″When start is selected, a dump of the Topology and Route  
Services component is taken.  
The dump is stored in the hub in a file that can be  
retrieved through TFTP.″  
::= { dumps 2 }  
-- Microcode swap  
swap OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { service 3 }  
swapControl OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER { ready (1),  
swap (2)  
}
ACCESS read-write  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″When swap is selected, the backup microcode image is  
checked and, if valid, activated.  
The previously active microcode image becomes  
the backup image.  
The atm subsystem is reset.″  
::= { swap 1 }  
swapResult OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER { not-initialized (1),  
swap-successful (2),  
swap-in-progress (3),  
checksum-error (4) }  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The result of the latest microcode swap.  
When an operational code image is downloaded or  
when the system is reset, swapControl becomes  
not-initialized.″  
::= { swap 2 }  
swapBackupVersion OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX DisplayString  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
226 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
″The version and release number for the backup  
firmware (microcode) saved in flash memory.″  
::= { swap 3 }  
-- configuration save/revert  
configuration OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { service 4 }  
configurationControl OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER {  
ready (1),  
save (2)  
}
ACCESS read-write  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″When set to save (2), the current configuration of the atm subsystem  
is saved in non volatile memory.  
This configuration will be restored at the next reset of the atm sub-  
system.  
It may be useful before an upload of the configuration file is  
performed, to save the current configuration (cf tftp group).  
When a reset is performed, the last configuration saved in non  
volatile memory is restored and not necessarily the current config  
at the time of the reset.″  
::= { configuration 1 }  
-- This MIB defines ATM signalling support, i.e. Q2931 and SAAL support  
-- for SVCs.  
atmSvc OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { node 9 }  
-- This group defines support for the Q2931 protocol  
atmQ2931 OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { atmSvc 1 }  
-- This table defines the Q2931 configuration and status.  
atmQ2931ConfTable OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF AtmQ2931ConfEntry  
ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″This table contains basic information on the Q2931 protocol  
for each signalling link defined per port.  
Usually, there is only one signalling channel per interface  
and thus one Q2931 protocol definition entry per interface.″  
::= { atmQ2931 1}  
atmQ2931ConfEntry OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX AtmQ2931ConfEntry  
ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″Entries of atmQ2931ConfTable. Each entry corresponds to a pair  
of ATM interface, signalling channel.  
A signalling channel is uniquely defined on each interface  
Appendix E. IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
by the VPI and VCI values allocated to it.″  
INDEX { atmQ2931ConfIndex,  
atmQ2931SiVpi,  
atmQ2931SiVci }  
::= { atmQ2931ConfTable 1 }  
AtmQ2931ConfEntry ::= SEQUENCE {  
atmQ2931ConfIndex  
INTEGER,  
atmQ2931SiVpi  
INTEGER,  
atmQ2931SiVci  
INTEGER,  
atmQ2931T303  
INTEGER,  
atmQ2931T308  
INTEGER,  
atmQ2931T309  
INTEGER,  
atmQ2931T310  
INTEGER,  
atmQ2931T316  
INTEGER,  
atmQ2931T317  
INTEGER,  
atmQ2931T322  
INTEGER,  
atmQ2931T398  
INTEGER,  
atmQ2931T399  
INTEGER,  
atmQ2931SetupRetry  
INTEGER,  
atmQ2931ReleaseRetry  
INTEGER,  
atmQ2931RestartRetry  
INTEGER,  
atmQ2931StatusRetry  
INTEGER }  
atmQ2931ConfIndex OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The ifIndex value of the ATM interface which, with the  
signalling channel defined by its Vpi/Vci values,  
uniquely identifies this entry.″  
::= { atmQ2931ConfEntry 1 }  
atmQ2931SiVpi OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The Vpi value which, with the Vci value specified in  
atmQ2931SiVci, defines the signalling channel for this  
entry.  
Usually, there is one signalling channel per interface  
228 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
defined by Vpi=0,Vci=5.″  
::= { atmQ2931ConfEntry 2 }  
atmQ2931SiVci OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The Vci value which, with the Vpi value specified in  
atmQ2931SiVpi, defines the signalling channel for this  
entry.  
Usually, there is one signalling channel per interface  
defined by Vpi=0,Vci=5.″  
::= { atmQ2931ConfEntry 3 }  
atmQ2931T303 OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″T303 timer as defined in the ATM UNI Specification.″  
::= { atmQ2931ConfEntry 4 }  
atmQ2931T308 OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″T308 timer as defined in the ATM UNI Specification.″  
::= { atmQ2931ConfEntry 5 }  
atmQ2931T309 OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″T309 timer as defined in the ATM UNI Specification.″  
::= { atmQ2931ConfEntry 6 }  
atmQ2931T310 OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″T310 timer as defined in the ATM UNI Specification.″  
::= { atmQ2931ConfEntry 7 }  
atmQ2931T316 OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″T316 timer as defined in the ATM UNI Specification.″  
::= { atmQ2931ConfEntry 8 }  
atmQ2931T317 OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
Appendix E. IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 229  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
DESCRIPTION  
″T317 timer as defined in the ATM UNI Specification.″  
::= { atmQ2931ConfEntry 9 }  
atmQ2931T322 OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″T322 timer as defined in the ATM UNI Specification.″  
::= { atmQ2931ConfEntry 10}  
atmQ2931T398 OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″T398 timer as defined in the ATM UNI Specification.″  
::= { atmQ2931ConfEntry 11 }  
atmQ2931T399 OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″T399 timer as defined in the ATM UNI Specification.″  
::= { atmQ2931ConfEntry 12 }  
atmQ2931SetupRetry OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″Number of set-up retries as defined in the ATM UNI  
Specification.″  
::= { atmQ2931ConfEntry 13 }  
atmQ2931ReleaseRetry OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″Number of release retries as defined in the ATM UNI  
Specification.″  
::= { atmQ2931ConfEntry 14 }  
atmQ2931RestartRetry OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″Number of restart retries as defined in the ATM UNI  
Specification.″  
::= { atmQ2931ConfEntry 15 }  
atmQ2931StatusRetry OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
230 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
DESCRIPTION  
″Number of status retries as defined in the ATM UNI  
Specification.″  
::= { atmQ2931ConfEntry 16 }  
-- This table defines the Q2931 statistics.  
atmQ2931StatsTable OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF AtmQ2931StatsEntry  
ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″This table contains statistics for the Q2931 protocol.″  
::= { atmQ2931 2 }  
atmQ2931StatsEntry OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX AtmQ2931StatsEntry  
ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″Entries of atmQ2931ConfTable. Each entry corresponds to a pair  
of ATM interface, signalling channel.  
A signalling channel is uniquely defined on each interface  
by the VPI and VCI values allocated to it.″  
INDEX { atmQ2931StatsIndex,  
atmQ2931StatsVpi,  
atmQ2931StatsVci }  
::= { atmQ2931StatsTable 1 }  
AtmQ2931StatsEntry ::= SEQUENCE {  
atmQ2931StatsIndex  
INTEGER,  
atmQ2931StatsVpi  
INTEGER,  
atmQ2931StatsVci  
INTEGER,  
atmQ2931OutCallAttempts  
Counter,  
atmQ2931OutCallInProgress  
Gauge,  
atmQ2931OutCallFailures  
Counter,  
atmQ2931InCallAttempts  
Counter,  
atmQ2931InCallInProgress  
Gauge,  
atmQ2931InCallFailures  
Counter }  
atmQ2931StatsIndex OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The ifIndex value of the ATM interface which, with the  
signalling channel defined by its Vpi/Vci values,  
uniquely identifies this entry.″  
::= { atmQ2931StatsEntry 1 }  
Appendix E. IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 231  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
atmQ2931StatsVpi OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The Vpi value which, with the Vci value specified in  
atmQ2931StatsVci, defines the signalling channel for this  
entry.  
Usually, there is one signalling channel per interface  
defined by Vpi=0,Vci=5.″  
::= { atmQ2931StatsEntry 2 }  
atmQ2931StatsVci OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The Vci value which, with the Vpi value specified in  
atmQ2931StatsVpi, defines the signalling channel for this  
entry.  
Usually, there is one signalling channel per interface  
defined by Vpi=0,Vci=5.″  
::= { atmQ2931StatsEntry 3 }  
atmQ2931OutCallAttempts OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX Counter  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″This is the number of outgoing call attempts on this  
interface, including accepted as well as rejected calls.″  
::= { atmQ2931StatsEntry 4 }  
atmQ2931OutCallInProgress OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX Gauge  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″This is the current number of outgoing calls in progress  
on this interface.″  
::= { atmQ2931StatsEntry 5 }  
atmQ2931OutCallFailures OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX Counter  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″This is the number of outgoing calls that were cleared  
for a reason other than a DTE or operator initiated action.″  
::= { atmQ2931StatsEntry 6 }  
atmQ2931InCallAttempts OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX Counter  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″This is the number of incoming call attempts on this  
interface, including accepted as well as rejected calls.″  
::= { atmQ2931StatsEntry 7 }  
232 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
atmQ2931InCallInProgress OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX Gauge  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″This is the current number of incoming calls in progress  
on this interface.″  
::= { atmQ2931StatsEntry 8 }  
atmQ2931InCallFailures OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX Counter  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″This is the number of calls that were rejected by the  
receiver.″  
::= { atmQ2931StatsEntry 9 }  
-- This table contains basic information about calls in progress.  
-- It allows the network operater to force clear an SVC.  
-- Its implementation is optional.  
atmSvcTable OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF AtmSvcEntry  
ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″This table contains basic information for each active  
Switched Virtual Connection (SVC).″  
::= { atmQ2931 3 }  
atmSvcEntry OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX AtmSvcEntry  
ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″Entries of atmSvcTable. Each entry uniquely  
defines two end-points of an SVC. In the case of a  
multicast SVC, each entry is defined by the  
association of the root and one party.″  
INDEX { atmSvcInterfaceIndex,  
atmSvcSiVpi,  
atmSvcSiVci,  
atmSvcCallReference,  
atmSvcEndPointReference }  
::= { atmSvcTable 1 }  
AtmSvcEntry ::= SEQUENCE {  
atmSvcInterfaceIndex  
INTEGER,  
atmSvcSiVpi  
INTEGER,  
atmSvcSiVci  
INTEGER,  
atmSvcCallReference  
INTEGER,  
atmSvcEndPointReference  
INTEGER,  
Appendix E. IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 233  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
atmSvcCallingNumber  
AtmAddress,  
atmSvcCalledNumber  
AtmAddress,  
atmSvcClear  
INTEGER,  
atmSvcCreationTime  
DateAndTime,  
atmSvcVpi  
INTEGER,  
atmSvcVci  
INTEGER }  
atmSvcInterfaceIndex OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The ifIndex value of the ATM interface used by this  
SVC.″  
::= { atmSvcEntry 1 }  
atmSvcSiVpi OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The Vpi value which, with the Vci value specified in  
atmSvcSiVci, defines the signalling channel for this  
entry.  
Usually, there is one signalling channel per interface  
defined by Vpi=0,Vci=5.″  
::= { atmSvcEntry 2 }  
atmSvcSiVci OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The Vci value which, with the Vpi value specified in  
atmSvcSiVpi, defines the signalling channel for this  
entry.  
Usually, there is one signalling channel per interface  
defined by Vpi=0,Vci=5.″  
::= { atmSvcEntry 3 }  
atmSvcCallReference OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER (0..8388607)  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The Q2931 call reference value used for this SVC.″  
::= { atmSvcEntry 4 }  
atmSvcEndPointReference OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER (0..16383)  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
234 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
″One of the Q2931 end point reference values used by this  
SVC.  
In a unicast SVC, there is only one entry for this SVC in  
the table.  
In a multicast SVC, there is one entry per party.″  
::= { atmSvcEntry 5 }  
atmSvcCallingNumber OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX AtmAddress  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The calling number carried in the calling party number  
information element of the call set-up message.″  
::= { atmSvcEntry 6 }  
atmSvcCalledNumber OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX AtmAddress  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The called number carried in the called party number  
information element of the call set-up message.″  
::= { atmSvcEntry 7 }  
atmSvcClear OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER {  
active (1),  
clear (2)  
}
ACCESS read-write  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″This variable allows a network manager to clear this  
SVC.  
When this SVC is cleared (either by the manager using  
this variable or by one of the parties), the entry is  
deleted from this table and another entry is created  
in the atmSvcClearTable.″  
::= { atmSvcEntry 8}  
atmSvcCreationTime OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX DateAndTime  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The date and time this call was placed.″  
::= { atmSvcEntry 9 }  
atmSvcVpi OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER (0..255)  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The VPI value used by this SVC for this interface.″  
::= { atmSvcEntry 10}  
Appendix E. IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 235  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
atmSvcVci OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER (0..65535)  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The VCI value used by this SVC for this interface.″  
::= { atmSvcEntry 11}  
-- This table keeps track of all SVCs that have been cleared.  
-- It allows to build traffic mattrix and provide more in-depth.  
-- statistics level on the use of the network.  
-- It is optional.  
atmSvcLogSize OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The maximum number of entries supported by this local  
SNMP agent.  
When this value is exceeded, the entries are wrapped.″  
::= { atmQ2931 4 }  
atmSvcLogLevel OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-write  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The maximum number of entries that can be written in the  
atmSvcLogTable before a trap is generated.  
When this number is reached, an svcLogOverflow trap is  
generated.  
When set to 0, no trap is generated.″  
::= { atmQ2931 5 }  
atmSvcLogTable OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF AtmSvcLogEntry  
ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″This table contains a list of the latest Switched  
Virtual Connection (SVC) that were completed on this  
ATM node.  
An SVC is completed when it has been torn down at the  
originator′ s request (normal completion) or by the  
network operator (forced tear down), or when it has  
been rejected or cleared by the network (exceptional  
condition).″  
::= { atmQ2931 6 }  
atmSvcLogEntry OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX AtmSvcLogEntry  
ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″Entries of atmSvcLogTable.″  
INDEX { atmSvcLogIndex }  
::= { atmSvcLogTable 1 }  
236 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
AtmSvcLogEntry ::= SEQUENCE {  
atmSvcLogIndex  
INTEGER,  
atmSvcLogInterfaceIndex  
INTEGER,  
atmSvcLogCallingNumber  
AtmAddress,  
atmSvcLogCalledNumber  
AtmAddress,  
atmSvcLogCreationTime  
DateAndTime,  
atmSvcLogTime  
DateAndTime,  
atmSvcLogClearCause  
INTEGER,  
atmSvcLogForwardQOS  
INTEGER,  
atmSvcLogBackwardQOS  
INTEGER,  
atmSvcLogForwardBW  
INTEGER,  
atmSvcLogBackwardBW  
INTEGER }  
atmSvcLogIndex OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″An identification value for this entry, assigned by the  
local SNMP agent.  
This value is assigned for each new SVC call or  
add-party request.  
This index is allocated in a decreasing order, so that  
a get-next request on the table allows to retrieve the  
latest calls first.″  
::= { atmSvcLogEntry 1 }  
atmSvcLogInterfaceIndex OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The ifIndex value of the ATM interface used by this  
SVC.″  
::= { atmSvcLogEntry 2 }  
atmSvcLogCallingNumber OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX AtmAddress  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The calling number carried in the calling party number  
information element of the call set-up message.″  
::= { atmSvcLogEntry 3 }  
atmSvcLogCalledNumber OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX AtmAddress  
ACCESS read-only  
Appendix E. IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 237  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The called number carried in the called party number  
information element of the call set-up message.″  
::= { atmSvcLogEntry 4 }  
atmSvcLogCreationTime OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX DateAndTime  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The date and time this call was placed.″  
::= { atmSvcLogEntry 5 }  
atmSvcLogTime OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX DateAndTime  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The date and time this call was cleared.″  
::= { atmSvcLogEntry 6 }  
atmSvcLogClearCause OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The cause of the clearing of this SVC.″  
REFERENCE  
″ATM Forum/93-265R5 Signalling Specification Draft -  
Apr. 14, 93.″  
::= { atmSvcLogEntry 7}  
atmSvcLogForwardQOS OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER {  
--  
unspecified (0),  
class-A (1),  
class-B (2),  
class-C (3),  
class-D (4)  
}
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The forward Quality Of Service requested for this  
call.″  
::= { atmSvcLogEntry 8}  
atmSvcLogBackwardQOS OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER {  
--  
unspecified (0),  
class-A (1),  
class-B (2),  
class-C (3),  
class-D (4)  
}
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
238 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
″The backward Quality Of Service requested for this  
call.″  
::= { atmSvcLogEntry 9}  
atmSvcLogForwardBW OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The forward bandwidth requested for this  
call.″  
::= { atmSvcLogEntry 10}  
atmSvcLogBackwardBW OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The backward bandwidth requested for this  
call.″  
::= { atmSvcLogEntry 11}  
-- SAAL Group  
-- This group defines support for the SAAL protocol.  
atmSaal OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { atmSvc 2 }  
-- This table defines the SAAL configuration and status.  
atmSaalConfTable OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF AtmSaalConfEntry  
ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″This table contains basic information on the SAAL protocol  
for each signalling link defined per port.  
Usually, there is only one signalling channel per interface  
and thus one SAAL protocol definition entry per interface.″  
::= { atmSaal 1 }  
atmSaalConfEntry OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX AtmSaalConfEntry  
ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″Entries of atmSaalConfTable. Each entry corresponds to a pair  
of ATM interface, signalling channel.  
A signalling channel is uniquely defined on each interface  
by the VPI and VCI values allocated to it.″  
INDEX { atmSaalConfIndex,  
atmSaalConfSiVpi,  
atmSaalConfSiVci }  
::= { atmSaalConfTable 1 }  
AtmSaalConfEntry ::= SEQUENCE {  
atmSaalConfIndex  
INTEGER,  
atmSaalConfSiVpi  
INTEGER,  
Appendix E. IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 239  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
atmSaalConfSiVci  
INTEGER,  
atmSaalState  
INTEGER,  
atmSaalTimerPoll  
INTEGER,  
atmSaalTimerKeepAlive  
INTEGER,  
atmSaalTimerNoResponse  
INTEGER,  
atmSaalTimerCC  
INTEGER,  
atmSaalTimerIdle  
INTEGER,  
atmSaalMaxCC  
INTEGER,  
atmSaalMaxPD  
INTEGER,  
atmSaalMaxStat  
INTEGER }  
atmSaalConfIndex OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The ifIndex value of the ATM interface which, with the  
signalling channel defined by its Vpi/Vci values,  
uniquely identifies this entry.″  
::= { atmSaalConfEntry 1 }  
atmSaalConfSiVpi OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The Vpi value which, with the Vci value specified in  
atmSaalConfSiVci, defines the signalling channel for this  
entry.  
Usually, there is one signalling channel per interface  
defined by Vpi=0,Vci=5.″  
::= { atmSaalConfEntry 2 }  
atmSaalConfSiVci OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The Vci value which, with the Vpi value specified in  
atmSaalConfSiVpi, defines the signalling channel for this  
entry.  
Usually, there is one signalling channel per interface  
defined by Vpi=0,Vci=5.″  
::= { atmSaalConfEntry 3 }  
atmSaalState OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
240 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
DESCRIPTION  
″The state of the SAAL for this interface as defined in  
the Q.2110 Specification, Chapter 7.3.″  
::= { atmSaalConfEntry 4 }  
atmSaalTimerPoll OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″Timer_POLL as defined in the Q.2110 Specification.  
This timer is running in the active phase to assure that  
the peer receiver is polled often enough to return  
its status.″  
::= { atmSaalConfEntry 5 }  
atmSaalTimerKeepAlive OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″Timer_KEEP-ALIVE as defined in the Q.2110 Specification.  
This timer is started when entering the transient phase.″  
::= { atmSaalConfEntry 6 }  
atmSaalTimerNoResponse OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″Timer_NO-RESPONSE as defined in the Q.2110 Specification.  
This timer indicates the maximum time interval during  
which at least one STAT PDU needs to be received.″  
::= { atmSaalConfEntry 7 }  
atmSaalTimerCC OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″Timer_CC as defined in the Q.2110 Specification.  
Transmission of PDUs is protected by this timer during  
establishment and release of a connection and during  
resynchronization or recovery.″  
::= { atmSaalConfEntry 8 }  
atmSaalTimerIdle OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″Timer_IDLE as defined in the Q.2110 Specification.  
This timer is started upon receipt of a STAT PDU  
when entering the idle phase (no POLL PDUs sent).″  
::= { atmSaalConfEntry 9 }  
atmSaalMaxCC  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
OBJECT-TYPE  
Appendix E. IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 241  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″MaxCC as defined in the Q.2110 Specification.  
This is the maximum value for the state variable  
VT(CC), corresponding to the maximum number of  
transmissions of a BGN, END, ER or RS PDU.″  
::= { atmSaalConfEntry 10 }  
atmSaalMaxPD  
OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″MaxPD as defined in the Q.2110 Specification.  
This is the maximum iacceptable value for the state  
variable VT(PD) before sending a POLL PDU and  
resetting VT(PD) to zero.  
This parameter is an upper limit for counter VT(PD)  
that sends a POLL PDU after every (MaxPD) SD PDUs.″  
::= { atmSaalConfEntry 11}  
atmSaalMaxStat OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″MaxSTAT as defined in the Q.2110 Specification.  
This is the maximum number of list elements  
placed in a STAT PDU.″  
::= { atmSaalConfEntry 12}  
-- This table defines the SAAL statistics.  
atmSaalStatsTable OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF AtmSaalStatsEntry  
ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″This table contains statistics for the SAAL protocol,  
for outgoing calls only.″  
::= { atmSaal 2 }  
atmSaalStatsEntry OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX AtmSaalStatsEntry  
ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″Entries of atmSaalConfTable. Each entry corresponds to a pair  
of ATM interface, signalling channel.  
A signalling channel is uniquely defined on each interface  
by the VPI and VCI values allocated to it.″  
INDEX { atmSaalStatsIndex,  
atmSaalStatsSiVpi,  
atmSaalStatsSiVci }  
::= { atmSaalStatsTable 1 }  
AtmSaalStatsEntry ::= SEQUENCE {  
atmSaalStatsIndex  
INTEGER,  
242 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
atmSaalStatsSiVpi  
INTEGER,  
atmSaalStatsSiVci  
INTEGER,  
atmSaalUnexpectPdus  
Counter,  
atmSaalUnsuccessPdus  
Counter,  
atmSaalFailedEstablishment  
Counter,  
atmSaalSequenceGap  
Counter,  
atmSaalGapNumbers  
Counter,  
atmSaalOtherListErrors  
Counter,  
atmSaalLackOfCredit  
Counter,  
atmSaalCreditObtained  
Counter }  
atmSaalStatsIndex OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The ifIndex value of the ATM interface which, with the  
signalling channel defined by its Vpi/Vci values,  
uniquely identifies this entry.″  
::= { atmSaalStatsEntry 1 }  
atmSaalStatsSiVpi OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The Vpi value which, with the Vci value specified in  
atmSaalStatsSiVci, defines the signalling channel for this  
entry.  
Usually, there is one signalling channel per interface  
defined by Vpi=0,Vci=5.″  
::= { atmSaalStatsEntry 2 }  
atmSaalStatsSiVci OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The Vci value which, with the Vpi value specified in  
atmSaalStatsSiVpi, defines the signalling channel for this  
entry.  
Usually, there is one signalling channel per interface  
defined by Vpi=0,Vci=5.″  
::= { atmSaalStatsEntry 3 }  
atmSaalUnexpectPdus OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX Counter  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
Appendix E. IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 243  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
DESCRIPTION  
″Error conditions A to M, as defined in the Q.2110  
Specification.  
This is the number of received unsolicited or  
or inappropriate PDUs.″  
::= { atmSaalStatsEntry 4 }  
atmSaalUnsuccessPdus OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX Counter  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″Error condition O as defined in the Q.2110  
Specification.  
This is the number of failing retries.″  
::= { atmSaalStatsEntry 5 }  
atmSaalFailedEstablishment OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX Counter  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″Error condition P as defined in the Q.2110  
Specification.  
This is the number of failing polls.″  
::= { atmSaalStatsEntry 6 }  
atmSaalSequenceGap OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX Counter  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The number of times sequence gaps were  
detected by the peer entity. ″  
::= { atmSaalStatsEntry 7 }  
atmSaalGapNumbers OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX Counter  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The number of times frames were  
re-transmitted due to sequence gaps  
detected by the peer entity.″  
::= { atmSaalStatsEntry 8 }  
atmSaalOtherListErrors OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX Counter  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″Error conditions Q to V as defined in the  
Q.2110 Specification.″  
::= { atmSaalStatsEntry 9 }  
atmSaalLackOfCredit OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX Counter  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
244 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
DESCRIPTION  
″Error condition W as defined in the Q.2110  
Specification.  
This is the number of times that transmission  
was not permitted by the peer entity due to  
a lack of credit.″  
::= { atmSaalStatsEntry 10 }  
atmSaalCreditObtained OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX Counter  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″Error condition X as defined in the Q.2110  
Specification.  
This is the number of times that credit was  
obtained from the peer entity to allow  
transmission.″  
::= { atmSaalStatsEntry 11 }  
-- This MIB defines ATM support for Permanent Virtual Circuits.  
atmPvc OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { node 10 }  
-- Global PVC Parameter  
atmPvcHandler OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER {  
ready (1),  
out-of-memory (2)  
}
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The status of the PVC handler in the switch.  
When no more memory is available, the creation of new PVCs  
is rejected with a generic Error sense code.″  
::= { atmPvc 1 }  
-- PVC Table  
atmPvcTable OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF AtmPvcEntry  
ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″This table lists all PVCs defined per interface.  
There is only one entry in this table per PVC  
(point-to-point or point-to-multipoint PVC).″  
::= { atmPvc 2 }  
atmPvcEntry OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX AtmPvcEntry  
ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″Entries of atmPvcTable.  
Appendix E. IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 245  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Policing parameters are those requested when  
creating the PVC. The actual values used by the  
network to satisfy these requirements may slightly  
differ. These values are attached to virtual links  
and are available in virtual link tables, such as  
the RFC-1695 VPL/VCL tables.″  
INDEX { atmPvcIndex,  
atmPvcIdentifier }  
::= { atmPvcTable 1 }  
AtmPvcEntry ::= SEQUENCE {  
atmPvcIndex  
INTEGER,  
atmPvcIdentifier  
INTEGER,  
atmPvcRowStatus  
RowStatus,  
atmPvcType  
INTEGER,  
atmPvcEndPoint  
INTEGER,  
atmPvcVpi  
INTEGER,  
atmPvcVci  
INTEGER,  
atmPvcBackwardQos  
INTEGER,  
atmPvcForwardQos  
INTEGER,  
atmPvcBackwardType  
INTEGER,  
atmPvcForwardType  
INTEGER,  
atmPvcBackwardParm1  
INTEGER,  
atmPvcForwardParm1  
INTEGER }  
atmPvcIndex OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The ifIndex value of the ATM interface used by this PVC.″  
::= { atmPvcEntry 1 }  
atmPvcIdentifier OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″A value used to uniquely identify this PVC on this  
interface.  
To create a new PVC on a given interface, an unused PVC  
identifier must be found.″  
::= { atmPvcEntry 2 }  
atmPvcRowStatus OBJECT-TYPE  
246 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
SYNTAX INTEGER { active (1),  
notInService (2),  
notReady (3),  
createAndWait (5),  
destroy (6) }  
ACCESS read-write  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″States values:  
active: the PVC is operational  
notInService: the PVC is failing  
notReady: values are missing to be able to activate this PVC  
Actions:  
active: this requests to re-start a failing PVC (which status  
was notInService)  
destroy: this requests to delete a PVC  
createAndWait: this requests to create a PVC  
To create a new PVC, this variable must be set to  
createAndWait with an index where:  
- atmPvcIndex is the number of the interface from where the  
PVC is created  
- atmPvcIdentifier is an unused PVC identifier for this  
interface  
To activate a PVC, this variable must be set to active.  
Default values are provided for all attributes except for the  
atmPvcEpRemIndex. If this attribute is not set, the PVC will  
remain in the notReady state.  
To delete a PVC, this variable must be set to destroy.″  
::= { atmPvcEntry 3 }  
atmPvcType OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER { point2pointVP  
point2pointVC  
(1),  
(2),  
point2multipointVP (3),  
point2multipointVC (4) }  
ACCESS read-write  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″A unicast PVC is defined between two endpoints, using  
either a VP or a VC connection.  
A Multicast PVC is defined :  
- first between a source endpoint and a target endpoint  
- then adding endpoints, thanks to the PvcEpTable  
using either VP or VC connections.  
The source endpoint is called Root, while target endpoints are  
called multicast parties.″  
DEFVAL { point2pointVC }  
::= { atmPvcEntry 4 }  
atmPvcEndPoint OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER { primaryRoot (1),  
secondaryLeaf (2) }  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
Appendix E. IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 247  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
DESCRIPTION  
″The end-point where the PVC is created is identified as the  
primary or root end-point.  
the other end-point is the identified as the secondary or  
leaf end-point.″  
DEFVAL { primaryRoot }  
::= { atmPvcEntry 5 }  
atmPvcVpi OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER (0..65536)  
ACCESS read-write  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The VPI value assigned to this PVC at the origin.  
A value of 65536 means that no value has been specified by  
the operator.  
If no value has been specified, the VPI value is then  
automatically allocated by the agent when activating the PVC.″  
DEFVAL { 65536 }  
::= { atmPvcEntry 6 }  
atmPvcVci OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER (0..65536)  
ACCESS read-write  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The VCI value assigned to this PVC at the origin.  
For VP-type PVC, this value is not applicable and is  
set to 0.  
A value of 65536 means that no value has been specified by  
the operator.  
If no value has been specified, the VCI value is then  
automatically allocated by the agent when activating the PVC.″  
DEFVAL { 65536 }  
::= { atmPvcEntry 7 }  
atmPvcBackwardQos OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER {  
--  
unspecified (0),  
class-A (1)  
}
ACCESS read-write  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The QOS requested for this PVC to the originator.″  
DEFVAL { unspecified }  
::= { atmPvcEntry 8 }  
atmPvcForwardQos OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER {  
--  
unspecified (0),  
class-A (1)  
}
ACCESS read-write  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The QOS requested for this PVC from the originator.″  
DEFVAL { unspecified }  
::= { atmPvcEntry 9 }  
248 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
atmPvcBackwardType OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX OBJECT IDENTIFIER  
ACCESS read-write  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The first parameter used to define the  
policy requested for this PVC.″  
::= { atmPvcEntry 10 }  
atmPvcForwardType OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX OBJECT IDENTIFIER  
ACCESS read-write  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The type of policy requested for this PVC.″  
::= { atmPvcEntry 11 }  
atmPvcBackwardParm1 OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-write  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The fourth parameter used to define the  
policy requested for this PVC.″  
DEFVAL { 0 }  
::= { atmPvcEntry 12 }  
atmPvcForwardParm1 OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-write  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The third parameter used to define the  
policy requested for this PVC.″  
DEFVAL { 0 }  
::= { atmPvcEntry 13 }  
-- A list of all the End-Points for each PVC defined.  
atmPvcEpTable OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF AtmPvcEpEntry  
ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″This table lists the characteristics of the remote  
end-points of defined PVCs.  
There is at least one entry for each PVC defined in the atmPvcTable.″  
::= { atmPvc 3 }  
atmPvcEpEntry OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX AtmPvcEpEntry  
ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″Entries of atmPvcEpTable.  
One entry is automatically created by the agent when a  
PVC is created in the PVC Table.  
No additional entry can be created in this table if the  
Appendix E. IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 249  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
PVC is defined as point-to-point in the PVC table.″  
INDEX { atmPvcEpIndex,  
atmPvcEpIdentifier,  
atmPvcEpParty }  
::= { atmPvcEpTable 1 }  
AtmPvcEpEntry ::= SEQUENCE {  
atmPvcEpIndex  
INTEGER,  
atmPvcEpIdentifier  
INTEGER,  
atmPvcEpParty  
INTEGER,  
atmPvcEpRowStatus  
RowStatus,  
atmPvcEpStatusCause  
INTEGER,  
atmPvcEpRemAddress  
NetPrefix,  
atmPvcEpRemIndex  
INTEGER,  
atmPvcEpRemVpi  
INTEGER,  
atmPvcEpRemVci  
INTEGER,  
atmPvcEpLastActive  
DateAndTime,  
atmPvcEpQ2931Cause  
INTEGER,  
atmPvcEpFailures  
Counter }  
atmPvcEpIndex OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The ifIndex value of the ATM interface used by this PVC.″  
::= { atmPvcEpEntry 1 }  
atmPvcEpIdentifier OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″A value used to uniquely identify this PVC on this  
interface.  
This is the same identifier as the one used in the atmPvcTable  
to identify the PVC that this end-point belongs to.″  
::= { atmPvcEpEntry 2 }  
atmPvcEpParty OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″A value used to uniquely identify a remote end-point of a PVC,  
when associated with an interface index and a PVC identifier.  
250 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
For a point-to-point PVC, this value is always set to 0.″  
::= { atmPvcEpEntry 3 }  
atmPvcEpRowStatus OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER { active (1),  
notInService (2),  
notReady (3),  
createAndWait (5),  
destroy (6) }  
ACCESS read-write  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″States values:  
active: the PVC is operational  
notInService: the PVC is failing  
notReady: values are missing to be able to activate this PVC  
Actions:  
active: this requests to re-start a failing unicast PVC  
(status was notInService)  
destroy: this requests to delete a unicast PVC.″  
::= { atmPvcEpEntry 4 }  
atmPvcEpStatusCause OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER { noCause (1),  
underModification (2),  
missingParameters (3),  
invalidParameters (4),  
uncompatibleParameters (5),  
internalFailure (6),  
pvcFailure (7),  
unavailableResource (8),  
remoteBusy (9),  
retrying (10)  
}
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″A detailed cause for the current PVC status.″  
::= { atmPvcEpEntry 5 }  
atmPvcEpRemAddress OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX NetPrefix  
ACCESS read-write  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The ATM address of the remote ATM switch where the PVC  
ends.  
If none is specified, the ATM address of the target  
switch (local) is used and the PVC is confined to the  
target switch (local switch).″  
::= { atmPvcEpEntry 6 }  
atmPvcEpRemIndex OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-write  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
Appendix E. IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 251  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
″The ifindex value used at the remote end to identify the  
interface where the PVC ends.  
This entry will remain in the notReady state until this  
attribute is set (and the atmPvcRowStatus is set to active).″  
::= { atmPvcEpEntry 7 }  
atmPvcEpRemVpi OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER (0..65536)  
ACCESS read-write  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The VPI value assigned to this PVC at the destination  
(remote end).  
If left at 65536 (default value), one value is  
automatically allocated by the agent.″  
DEFVAL { 65536 }  
::= { atmPvcEpEntry 8 }  
atmPvcEpRemVci OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER (0..65536)  
ACCESS read-write  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The VCI value assigned to this PVC at the destination.  
For VP-type PVC, this value is not applicable and is  
set to 0.  
If left at 65536 (default value), one value is  
automatically allocated by the agent (for VC only).″  
DEFVAL { 65536 }  
::= { atmPvcEpEntry 9 }  
atmPvcEpLastActive OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX DateAndTime  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The date and time of the latest PVC activation.″  
::= { atmPvcEpEntry 10}  
atmPvcEpQ2931Cause OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The cause of the failure as defined by Q2931.″  
::= { atmPvcEpEntry 11}  
atmPvcEpFailures OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX Counter  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The number of times this PVC failed.″  
::= { atmPvcEpEntry 12 }  
-- The group atmLanEmulation defines the specific support for  
-- the lan emulation resources in the atm node  
252 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
lanEmulation OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { node 11 }  
lanEmulationServer OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { lanEmulation 1 }  
lesConfTable OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF LesConfEntry  
ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″This table contains the specific configuration  
parameters of the embedded LAN emulation servers.″  
::= {lanEmulationServer 1}  
lesConfEntry OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX LesConfEntry  
ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″Entries of the lesConfTable. Each entry corresponds to  
a Lan emulation server embedded in the atm control point.″  
INDEX { lesIndex }  
::= { lesConfTable 1 }  
LesConfEntry ::= SEQUENCE {  
lesIndex  
INTEGER,  
lesMaxNumberOfClients  
INTEGER,  
lesLecLastChange  
INTEGER }  
lesIndex OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″A value which uniquely identifies a  
lan emulation server in the lesConfTable.″  
::= { lesConfEntry 1 }  
lesMaxNumberOfClients OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-write  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The maximum number of clients supported by  
this lan emulation server.  
The maximum number of clients cannot be set  
if the associated LES is started.  
The total number of clients on all the embedded  
lan emulation servers in one node must not exceed 128.″  
::= { lesConfEntry 2 }  
lesLecTableLastChange OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX TimeTicks  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The value of the sysUpTime the last time a change was detected  
Appendix E. IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 253  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
in a lesLecEntry associated to the given lesIndex.  
The lesLecEntry is defined in the lesMIB.″  
::= { lesConfEntry 3 }  
-- ====================================================================  
-- Traps  
-- ====================================================================  
hello TRAP-TYPE  
ENTERPRISE node  
VARIABLES { sysObjectID, ifPhysAddress }  
DESCRIPTION  
″ A hello trap is sent:  
- when the system re-initializes: it is sent every minutes until  
an SNMP request is received or until 255 minutes have passed.  
- when one of the following parameters is changed:  
-- agent IP address(es)  
-- agent subnet mask(s)  
-- ATM address of the IP ARP server  
-- IP address of the default gateway  
The value of ifPhysAddress is the ATM address of the hub.  
The hello trap may be disabled.″  
::= 1  
lock TRAP-TYPE  
ENTERPRISE node  
VARIABLES { moduleSlotIndex }  
DESCRIPTION  
″ A lock trap is sent when a set request is rejected because it is  
suspected that this may cause to break the link between the agent  
and the manager. This may occur when:  
- isolating a slot  
- disabling a port  
if the request is received through this specific port/module/slot.″  
::= 2  
change TRAP-TYPE  
ENTERPRISE node  
VARIABLES { moduleSlotIndex, ifIndex }  
DESCRIPTION  
″ A change trap is sent when one of the following MIB variables or  
group of variables is changed:  
- Date and Time reset  
- System Parameters (name, contact, location) changed  
- Interface changed:  
-- Administrative State (enabled/disabled)  
- Module changed:  
-- Administrative State (isolate/attach)  
When one of this variable is changed, the lastChange MIB object is  
also updated with the current date and time.  
When the Date and Time or the System Parameters changed,  
the interface number of the hub virtual interface is returned.  
This trap may be disabled.″  
::= 3  
pvcFailure TRAP-TYPE  
ENTERPRISE node  
VARIABLES { atmPvcIndex, atmPvcIdentifier, atmPvcEpQ2931Cause }  
254 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
DESCRIPTION  
″ A PVC failure trap is sent when a PVC becomes inoperational.″  
::= 4  
-- node.5 intentionnally left unused  
callLoggingOverflow TRAP-TYPE  
ENTERPRISE node  
DESCRIPTION  
″ A callLoggingOverflow trap is sent when the call logging table  
is about to wrap.″  
::= 6  
moduleInstalled TRAP-TYPE  
ENTERPRISE node  
VARIABLES { moduleSlotIndex }  
DESCRIPTION  
″ An ATM module has been detected in the hub.″  
::= 7  
moduleRemoved TRAP-TYPE  
ENTERPRISE node  
VARIABLES { moduleSlotIndex }  
DESCRIPTION  
″ An ATM module is no longer detected in the hub.″  
::= 8  
lesMaxClientsReached TRAP-TYPE  
ENTERPRISE node  
VARIABLES { lesIndex }  
DESCRIPTION  
″The maximum number of lan emulation  
clients has been connected to the given lan emulation  
server.″  
::= 9  
lesMaxClientsThresholdDown TRAP-TYPE  
ENTERPRISE node  
VARIABLES { lesIndex }  
DESCRIPTION  
″The number of operational clients of the given emulated  
lan is now equal to lesMaxNumberOfClients - 10.  
This trap is sent only if the  
trap lesMaxClientsReached has been sent previously.  
lesIndex is the index of the lesConfTable defined above″  
::= 10  
-- Expansion Description  
expansion OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { atmSw 4 }  
expansionHardwareVersion OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX DisplayString  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The Part Number (P/N) and Engineering Change (EC) level  
and Plant Location for this module.″  
::= { expansion 1 }  
Appendix E. IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 255  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
-- Chassis management  
chassis  
OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { atmSw 5 }  
--  
-- Hub Chassis Groups  
--  
chassisAgents OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { chassis 1 }  
conc  
OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { chassis 2 }  
OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { chassis 3 }  
OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { chassis 4 }  
OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { chassis 8 }  
OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { chassis 9 }  
env  
modules  
ocPower  
ocInventory  
ocPowerControl OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { ocPower 1 }  
ocInvHub  
ocInvMods  
OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { ocInventory 1 }  
OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { ocInventory 2 }  
agentsMySlot OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The slot id of this agent.″  
::= { chassisAgents 1 }  
agentsMasterReset OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER {  
noReset(1)  
}
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The agent mastership cannot be reset.  
noReset is always returned.″  
::= { chassisAgents 2 }  
agentsTable OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF AgentsEntry  
ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″A table of agents in the concentrator as seen by  
this agent. A master will see all the agents; a slave  
will only see itself.″  
::= { chassisAgents 3 }  
agentsEntry OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX AgentsEntry  
ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″A profile of an agent within the concentrator.″  
256 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
INDEX { agentsSlotIndex }  
::= { agentsTable 1 }  
AgentsEntry ::=  
SEQUENCE {  
agentsSlotIndex  
INTEGER,  
agentsStationAddr  
OCTET STRING,  
agentsIpAddress  
IpAddress,  
agentsMasterStatus  
INTEGER,  
agentsMasterPriority  
INTEGER,  
ocAgentsSubSlot  
INTEGER  
}
agentsSlotIndex OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The slot number that identifies the referenced agent.″  
::= { agentsEntry 1 }  
agentsStationAddr OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX OCTET STRING (SIZE(6))  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The unique identifier for this agent. Often this  
is the value of ifPhysAddress for the first interface.″  
::= { agentsEntry 2 }  
agentsIpAddress OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX IpAddress  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″An IP Address that can be used to communicate to  
this agent. Note, this object′ s value may change  
as the agent switches to different sub-networks.″  
::= { agentsEntry 3 }  
agentsMasterStatus OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER {  
master(1),  
non-master(2), -- slave  
electing(3)  
}
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The mastership status of this agent.″  
::= { agentsEntry 4 }  
agentsMasterPriority OBJECT-TYPE  
Appendix E. IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 257  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
SYNTAX INTEGER {  
one(1),  
-- lowest  
two(2),  
three(3),  
four(4),  
five(5),  
six(6),  
seven(7),  
eight(8),  
nine(9),  
ten(10),  
-- highest  
never(11)  
}
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The mastership priority of this agent. Ten is the  
highest and one is the lowest. Never means will not  
be able become master. MasterPriority is only used  
when an election occurs. Mastership is not pre-emptive.″  
::= { agentsEntry 5 }  
ocAgentsSubSlot OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The subslot index for this agent. For agents not located  
in the IBM 8260 system, this object will always  
return 1 for this object value.″  
::= { agentsEntry 6 }  
-- The conc Group:  
-- This group is mandatory for all devices that are acting as a concentrator  
-- master.  
--  
-- The conc group contains information and control relative to  
-- the concentrator.  
--  
concType OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER {  
hub-8260-017-A(6),  
hub-8260-010-A(10)  
-- 17-slot with ring backplane  
-- 10-slot with ring backplane  
}
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″This object identifies the type of concentrator represented  
by this agent.″  
::= { conc 1 }  
concReset OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER {  
noReset(1),  
reset(2)  
}
258 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
ACCESS read-write  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″Writing a reset(2) will reset every module in the stack  
without changing the current configuration and will zero  
all counters.″  
::= { conc 2 }  
concNumSlots OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The number of slots in this concentrator. This value is  
the sum total of all payload slots plus any slots reserved  
for controller modules. For example, for an IBM 8260 agent  
operating in a 17-slot IBM 8260 hub, this object will have  
the value 19 (17 payload slots plus 2 controller slots).″  
::= { conc 3 }  
concProfile OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX OCTET STRING (SIZE(1..3))  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″A bit string containing always 00 00 00.″  
::= { conc 4 }  
concDescr OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX DisplayString (SIZE(1..128))  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″A textual string containing information about the hub type.″  
::= { conc 5 }  
-- The env Group  
-- This group represents the concentrator′ s environment. It is available  
-- from agents that are acting as a concentrator master.  
envTempStatus OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER {  
okay(1),  
extremeTemp(2),  
warning(3)  
}
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The overall temperature status for this concentrator.  
This object′ s value is an aggregate of all the temperature  
probes in the concentrator, such that, when at least one probe  
reports extreme temperature, this object will have the value  
extremeTemp(2). This object will have the value warning(3)  
prior to reporting the value extremeTemp(2) as a means of  
warning of a possible hub overheat condition.″  
Appendix E. IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 259  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
::= { env 1 }  
envPSCapacity OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The total capacity of power supplies for this concentrator.″  
::= { env 2 }  
envPSTable OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF EnvPSEntry  
ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″A table that contains information about each potential  
power supply in the concentrator.″  
::= { env 3 }  
envPSEntry OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX EnvPSEntry  
ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″A list of information for each power supply in the  
concentrator.″  
INDEX { envPSIndex }  
::= { envPSTable 1 }  
EnvPSEntry ::=  
SEQUENCE {  
envPSIndex  
INTEGER,  
envPSAdminState  
INTEGER,  
envPSOperStatus  
INTEGER  
}
envPSIndex OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″Identifies the power supply for which this entry contains  
power supply information. ″  
::= { envPSEntry 1 }  
envPSAdminState OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER {  
activate(1)  
}
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The current desired state of the power supply.  
activate is the only adminState reported.″  
::= { envPSEntry 2 }  
260 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
envPSOperStatus OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER {  
active(1),  
standby(2),  
faulty(3),  
not-installed(4)  
}
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The current operational state of the power supply. A power  
supply in standby does not provide power to the concentrator.″  
::= { envPSEntry 3 }  
envFanStatus OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER {  
okay(1),  
faulty(2),  
not-installed(4),  
unknown(5)  
}
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The overall status of the fan(s). When fan operational  
status is known, this object′ s value is an aggregate of  
all fan status in the concentrator such that, when at  
least one fan unit is faulty, this object will have the  
value faulty(2).″  
::= { env 4 }  
--  
-- Static Summaries  
--  
staticSummary OBJECT IDENTIFIER ::= { modules 12 }  
staticSummaryTable OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF StaticSummaryEntry  
ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″A table for retrieving predefined collections  
of MIB objects as a single field of octets. This  
table is read-only: all the entries are created  
by the agent.  
The purpose of this table is to replace the  
modSummaryTable. It can support changes in  
the MIB structure and new types of variables as  
they are added in the future. This is accomplished  
by returning the OID of each item included in the  
summary, along with the summarized values.  
Each entry in this table summarizes important  
information concerning the configuration and status  
Appendix E. IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 261  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
of a slot/subslot. This information is a summary of  
the objects in the modules branch.  
No entry in this table exists for an empty slot.″  
::= { staticSummary 1 }  
staticSummaryEntry OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX StaticSummaryEntry  
ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″A predefined collection of MIB objects whose  
values can be retrieved as a single field.″  
INDEX { ssSlotIndex, ssSubSlotIndex }  
::= { staticSummaryTable 1 }  
StaticSummaryEntry ::=  
SEQUENCE {  
ssSlotIndex  
INTEGER,  
ssSubSlotIndex  
ssValues  
}
INTEGER,  
OCTET STRING  
ssSlotIndex OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The slot number of the slot to which this  
entry pertains.″  
::= { staticSummaryEntry 1 }  
ssSubSlotIndex OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The subslot number to which this entry pertains.  
It is associated with a slot number. Motherboards are  
always located in subslot one, (e.g. <slot>.1). However,  
daughter cards can reside on any subslot within the range  
(2 ... 8), (e.g. <slot>.<2 .. 8>).″  
::= { staticSummaryEntry 2 }  
ssValues OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX OCTET STRING  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The OIDs and values of the objects to be summarized,  
given as an octet string in the ′ New Summary′ format.  
NEW_SUMMARY DEFINITION ::= BEGIN  
IMPORTS TimeTicks FROM RFC1155-SMI;  
Message ::= CHOICE OF {  
Message_0  
}
262 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Message_0 ::= •0“ IMPLICIT SEQUENCE {  
timeStamp TimeTicks,  
containments CONTAINMENTS  
}
CONTAINMENTS ::= SEQUENCE OF CONTAINMENT  
CONTAINMENT ::= SEQUENCE {  
prefix  
blocks  
OID,  
-- Base OID  
BLOCKS  
}
BLOCKS ::= SEQUENCE OF BLOCK  
BLOCK ::= SEQUENCE {  
suffix SUFFIX,  
values VALUES  
}
SUFFIX ::= CHOICE OF {  
SEQUENCE OF INTEGER, -- Indicies (i.e. slot.port)  
NULL  
}
VALUES ::= SEQUENCE OF VALUE  
VALUE ::= SEQUENCE {  
attribute  
data  
INTEGER,  
DATA  
}
DATA ::= CHOICE OF {  
INTEGER,  
OCTET STRING,  
TimeTicks  
}
END″  
::= { staticSummaryEntry 3 }  
ssLastChangedTable OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF SsLastChangedEntry  
ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″A table of timestamps each indicating the change  
state of the corresponding information contained  
in the staticSummaryTable.  
This table contains a fixed number  
of entries, one for each possible subslot in  
each possible slot in the concentrator, regardless  
of whether the slot or subslot is occupied. For  
example, for an IBM 8260 concentrator, this table  
has 19 x 8 entries; for an Hub concentrator, which  
has no subslots, this table has either 5 or 17 entries,  
and the subslot index of each entry is 1.  
Appendix E. IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 263  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
(Note that the number of subslot entries in this table  
is determined by the type of concentrator, not the type  
of module; for an Hub module in an IBM 8260  
concentrator, there will still be 8 subslot entries.)″  
::= { staticSummary 2 }  
ssLastChangedEntry OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX SsLastChangedEntry  
ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″An entry for a particular slot/subslot address in  
the concentrator, indicating the value of SysUpTime  
at the time of the last detected change to any of  
the information included in the corresponding  
staticSummaryEntry instance.″  
INDEX { ssTlcSlotIndex, ssTlcSubSlotIndex }  
::= { ssLastChangedTable 1 }  
SsLastChangedEntry ::=  
SEQUENCE {  
ssTlcSlotIndex  
ssTlcSubSlotIndex  
INTEGER,  
INTEGER,  
ssTlcCurrentlyOccupied INTEGER,  
ssTimeLastChanged  
}
TimeTicks  
ssTlcSlotIndex OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The number of the slot to which this entry pertains.″  
::= { ssLastChangedEntry 1 }  
ssTlcSubSlotIndex OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The subslot number to which this entry pertains.  
For Hub concentrators, there is a single entry  
for each slot, with a subslot number of 1.  
For IBM 8260 concentrators, the number 1 indicates  
the motherboard, and daughterboards are numbered  
beginning with subslot 2.″  
::= { ssLastChangedEntry 2 }  
ssTlcCurrentlyOccupied OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER {  
empty(1),  
occupied(2)  
}
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The current configuration state of this slot/  
subslot. Whether occupied or not, the  
ssTimeLastChanged field is still valid: if a  
264 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
slot/subslot is unoccupied, the timestamp indicates  
the time that the module was removed. If no module  
has occupied this slot/subslot since the last  
restart of the agent, the value of ssTimeLastChanged  
for this entry is zero.″  
::= { ssLastChangedEntry 3 }  
ssTimeLastChanged OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX TimeTicks  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The value of SysUpTime at the time that the  
last change was detected to any of the information  
included in the summary table entry for this slot  
and subslot. A change in the value of this object  
signals the management station to re-get the  
corresponding summary information.″  
::= { ssLastChangedEntry 4 }  
ssLastChangedSummary OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX OCTET STRING  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″This object contains the value of ssTimeLastChanged for  
each slot/subslot in the concentrator. The first two  
octets contain the version of this object. The data  
following the version begins with the first slot and  
all of its sub-slots before continuing with the next slot.″  
::= { staticSummary 3 }  
--  
-- IBM 8260 Power Group  
--  
-- This group is used for managing the  
-- power in the IBM 8260 hub.  
--  
-- Hub power mode  
--  
ocPowerModeAdminStatus OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER {  
fault-tolerant(1),  
not-fault-tolerant(2)  
}
ACCESS read-write  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The current desired state of hub power fault-tolerant  
mode. Setting this object to fault-tolerant(1) will  
reserve one power supply′ s worth of power from the power  
budget for fault-tolerant operation, provided sufficient  
power is available. Setting this object to  
not-fault-tolerant(2) returns the reserved power to the  
power budget.″  
::= { ocPowerControl 1 }  
Appendix E. IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 265  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
ocPowerModeOperStatus OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER {  
fault-tolerant(1),  
not-fault-tolerant(2)  
}
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The current operational status of hub power fault-tolerant  
mode.″  
::= { ocPowerControl 2 }  
ocPowerOverheatPowerDownMode OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER {  
enable(1),  
disable(2)  
}
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The current desired state of hub overheat automatic power-  
down mode. The value enable(1) causes slots containing IBM 8260  
modules to be automatically power-disabled during a hub  
overheat condition. The value disable(2) causes no action  
to be taken when a hub overheat condition occurs.″  
::= { ocPowerControl 3 }  
--  
-- Hub backplane power  
--  
ocPowerOutputTable OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF OcPowerOutputEntry  
ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″A table that contains information about the hub power  
budget. This table is indexed by voltage line type, each  
of which is supplied by the operational power supplies.″  
::= { ocPower 2 }  
ocPowerOutputEntry OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX OcPowerOutputEntry  
ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″A list of information about the hub power budget.″  
INDEX { ocPowerOutputType }  
::= { ocPowerOutputTable 1 }  
OcPowerOutputEntry ::=  
SEQUENCE {  
ocPowerOutputType  
INTEGER,  
ocPowerOutputVoltageLevel  
Gauge,  
ocPowerOutputWattageCapacity  
Gauge,  
ocPowerOutputWattageConsumed  
Gauge,  
266 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
ocPowerOutputWattageAvailable  
Gauge,  
ocPowerOutputUnmanagedWattageAlloc  
Gauge  
}
ocPowerOutputType OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER {  
plusFiveVolt(1),  
-- + 5 Volt  
-- - 5 Volt  
-- +12 Volt  
-- -12 Volt  
-- + 2 Volt  
minusFiveVolt(2),  
plusTwelveVolt(3),  
minusTwelveVolt(4),  
plusTwoVolt(5)  
}
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″Identifies the power (voltage) line type for which this  
entry contains power budget information.″  
::= { ocPowerOutputEntry 1 }  
ocPowerOutputVoltageLevel OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX Gauge  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″In millivolts (1/1000 Volt), the actual voltage level  
for this voltage type as sensed on the backplane. This  
voltage is supplied by all operational power supplies.″  
::= { ocPowerOutputEntry 2 }  
ocPowerOutputWattageCapacity OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX Gauge  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″In hundredths of a Watt (1/100 Watt), the maximum  
wattage for the voltage line that is output by all  
operational power supplies combined.″  
::= { ocPowerOutputEntry 3 }  
ocPowerOutputWattageConsumed OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX Gauge  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″In hundredths of a Watt (1/100 Watt), the wattage  
consumed by all hub modules. For a given voltage line,  
this object′ s value is the sum total of the power  
consumed by the hub itself, the Controller Modules  
and all power-enabled slots containing IBM 8260 modules.  
If power fault-tolerant mode is enabled (when it was  
previously disabled), this object′ s value is increased  
by the amount of power reserved for the voltage line.  
If power fault-tolerant mode is disabled (when it was  
previously enabled), this object′ s value is decreased  
by the amount of power that is returned to the available  
power budget for the voltage line.″  
::= { ocPowerOutputEntry 4 }  
Appendix E. IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 267  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
ocPowerOutputWattageAvailable OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX Gauge  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″In hundredths of a Watt (1/100 Watt), the wattage  
available to power-up modules. If power fault-tolerant  
mode is enabled (when it was previously disabled), this  
object′ s value is decreased by the amount of power reserved  
for the voltage line. If power fault-tolerant mode is  
disabled (when it was previously enabled), this object′ s  
value is increased by the amount of power that is returned  
to the available power budget for the voltage line.″  
::= { ocPowerOutputEntry 5 }  
ocPowerOutputUnmanagedWattageAlloc OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX Gauge  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″In hundredths of a Watt (1/100 Watt), the wattage  
reserved for modules that are not power-manageable.  
This value 0 is always returned.″  
::= { ocPowerOutputEntry 6 }  
--  
-- Module power configuration  
--  
ocPowerSlotTable OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF OcPowerSlotEntry  
ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″A table that contains power management information  
for each non-empty, payload slot in the hub. Note  
that for multi-slot IBM 8260 modules, there is one point  
of power management contact and control. Hence, only  
the leftmost slot is represented in this table.″  
::= { ocPower 3 }  
ocPowerSlotEntry OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX OcPowerSlotEntry  
ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″A list of power management information for each  
payload slot in the hub containing an 8260 module.″  
INDEX { ocPowerSlotIndex }  
::= { ocPowerSlotTable 1 }  
OcPowerSlotEntry ::=  
SEQUENCE {  
ocPowerSlotIndex  
INTEGER,  
ocPowerSlotClass  
INTEGER,  
ocPowerSlotAdminStatus  
INTEGER,  
268 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
ocPowerSlotOperStatus  
INTEGER  
}
ocPowerSlotIndex OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The unique slot number that identifies the module  
associated with this power entry.″  
::= { ocPowerSlotEntry 1 }  
ocPowerSlotClass OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER {  
one(1),  
two(2),  
three(3),  
four(4),  
five(5),  
six(6),  
seven(7),  
eight(8),  
nine(9),  
ten(10)  
}
ACCESS read-write  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The current slot power class. For a slot containing  
an IBM 8260 module, this object′ s value ranges from 1 to  
10, where 1 is the lowest power class and 10 is the  
highest power class. Slots assigned higher power classes  
will be power-enabled before slots assigned lower power  
classes. Similarly, slots assigned lower power classes  
will be power-disabled before slots assigned higher power  
classes. Power class can be used to establish an  
IBM 8260 module power-up and power-down priority scheme.  
Combined with slot location, slot power class defines the  
order in which slots containing IBM 8260 modules will be  
power-enabled and power-disabled. For a given power class,  
slots are power-enabled from lowest payload slot to highest  
payload slot and power-disabled from highest payload slot  
to lowest payload slot. Slot power class is not pre-emptive;  
changing a slot′ s power class will not affect the power  
state of other slots. It will take effect during a slot  
power-up or power-down event (e.g., the failure or recovery  
of a power supply).″  
::= { ocPowerSlotEntry 2 }  
ocPowerSlotAdminStatus OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER {  
enable(1), -- enable slot power  
disable(2) -- disable slot power  
}
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The current desired slot power state. For a slot  
Appendix E. IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 269  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
containing an IBM 8260 module, the value enable(1) causes the  
module to be power-enabled, provided sufficient power is  
available. The value disable(2) causes the module to be  
power-disabled and is not allowed for a slot containing the  
IBM 8260 agent, to prevent the user from losing hub  
manageability. The slot will not receive power untill this  
object is set to the the value enable(1).″  
::= { ocPowerSlotEntry 3 }  
ocPowerSlotOperStatus OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER {  
enabled(1),  
-- Slot power is enabled  
-- Slot power is disabled  
disabled(2),  
insufficient-power(3), -- Slot power up not possible  
enabled-always(4)  
}
-- Slot power is enabled always  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The current operational slot power status. This object  
will have the value enabled(1), if the slot contains an  
IBM 8260 module and is actually power-enabled. This object  
will have the value disabled(2), if the slot contains an  
IBM 8260 module and is actually power-disabled. In this case,  
the slot is ineligible for power until ocPowerSlotAdminStatus  
for the slot is set to enable(1). This object will have  
the value insufficient-power(3), if the slot is eligible to  
receive power but, due to power constraints, is not  
power-enabled. When sufficient power becomes available, the  
slot will become power-enabled, and this object will then have  
the value enabled(1). This object will have the value  
enabled-always(4) for a slot containing the IBM 8260 agent.  
For the slot containing the IBM 8260 agent, ocPowerSlotAdminStatus  
cannot be set to the value disable(2). However, in the event of  
an environmental change such as a power supply failure, the slot  
containing the IBM 8260 agent may be automatically power-disabled,  
and this object will then have the value insufficient-power(3).  
This is based on the value of ocPowerSlotClass for the slot.″  
::= { ocPowerSlotEntry 4 }  
--  
-- IBM 8260 Inventory Group  
--  
-- This group reflects inventory information about  
-- components in the IBM 8260 hub.  
--  
--  
-- Hub chassis information  
--  
ocInvHubType OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX DisplayString (SIZE(1..32))  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The hub type (i.e. model number) of the hub. An instance  
for which information is not valid will return ′ invalid  
EEPROM!′ . ″  
::= { ocInvHub 1 }  
270 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
ocInvHubSerialNo OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX DisplayString (SIZE(1..32))  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The serial number of the hub. An instance for which  
information is not valid will return ′ invalid EEPROM!′ . ″  
::= { ocInvHub 2 }  
ocInvHubHWVer OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX DisplayString (SIZE(1..32))  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The revision number of the hardware of the hub. An instance  
for which information is not valid will return ′ invalid  
EEPROM!′ . ″  
::= { ocInvHub 3 }  
ocInvHubMfr OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX DisplayString (SIZE(1..32))  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The company name that manufactured this hub. An instance  
for which information is not valid will return ′ invalid  
EEPROM!.″  
::= { ocInvHub 4 }  
ocInvHubMfrDate OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX DisplayString (SIZE(6))  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The date in yymmdd format that this unit was manufactured.  
An instance for which information is not valid will return  
′ invalid EEPROM!′ . ″  
::= { ocInvHub 5 }  
ocInvHubNotePad OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX DisplayString (SIZE(0..256))  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″Note pad area reserved for the hub. This area  
contains information pertaining to the hub such as  
service or hardware upgrade information. An instance  
for which information is not valid will return ′ invalid  
EEPROM!′ . ″  
::= { ocInvHub 6 }  
--  
-- IBM 8260 Modules inventory information  
--  
-- Contains information about the hub modules. The modules  
-- information are organized as a base-one matrix. That is, a module,  
-- motherboard or daughter card, can be located by a pair of primitives:  
Appendix E. IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 271  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
-- slot index and subslot index (i.e. <slot>.<subslot>)  
--  
-- ocInvModTable  
--  
ocInvModTable OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX SEQUENCE OF OcInvModEntry  
ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″A list of inventory information related to a module,  
indexed with respect to slot and subslot location numbers.″  
::= { ocInvMods 1 }  
ocInvModEntry OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX OcInvModEntry  
ACCESS not-accessible  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″Values to describe a module inventory items.″  
INDEX { ocInvModSlotIndex, ocInvModSubSlotIndex }  
::= { ocInvModTable 1 }  
OcInvModEntry ::=  
SEQUENCE {  
ocInvModSlotIndex  
INTEGER,  
ocInvModSubSlotIndex  
INTEGER,  
ocInvModModel  
DisplayString,  
ocInvModSerialNo  
DisplayString,  
ocInvModHWVer  
DisplayString,  
ocInvModSWVer  
DisplayString,  
ocInvModSWBootVer  
DisplayString,  
ocInvModMfr  
DisplayString,  
ocInvModMfrDate  
DisplayString,  
ocInvModNotePad  
DisplayString  
}
ocInvModSlotIndex OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The slot number where this Module is located.″  
::= { ocInvModEntry 1 }  
ocInvModSubSlotIndex OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX INTEGER  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
272 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
″The subslot number where this Module is located.  
It is associated with a slot number. Motherboards are  
always located in subslot one, (e.g. <slot>.1). However,  
daughter cards can reside on any subslot within the range  
(2 ... 8), (e.g. <slot>.<2 .. 8>).″  
::= { ocInvModEntry 2 }  
ocInvModModel OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX DisplayString (SIZE(1..32))  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″This Module model number.  
If the instance value is unknown, Hub will be returned.″  
::= { ocInvModEntry 3 }  
ocInvModSerialNo OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX DisplayString (SIZE(1..32))  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″This Module serial number.  
If the instance value is unknown, N/A will be returned.″  
::= { ocInvModEntry 4 }  
ocInvModHWVer OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX DisplayString (SIZE(1..32))  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The revision number of the hardware on this module.  
If the instance value is unknown, N/A will be returned.″  
::= { ocInvModEntry 5 }  
ocInvModSWVer OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX DisplayString (SIZE(1..32))  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The revision number of the software on this module.  
If the instance value is unknown, N/A will be returned.″  
::= { ocInvModEntry 6 }  
ocInvModSWBootVer OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX DisplayString (SIZE(1..32))  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The revision number of the boot software on this module.  
If the instance value is unknown, N/A will be returned.″  
::= { ocInvModEntry 7 }  
ocInvModMfr OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX DisplayString (SIZE(1..32))  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The company name that manufactured this module.  
If the instance value is unknown, N/A will be returned.″  
Appendix E. IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 273  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
::= { ocInvModEntry 8 }  
ocInvModMfrDate OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX DisplayString (SIZE(0..6))  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″The date in yymmdd format that this module was manufactured.  
If the instance value is unknown, N/A will be returned.″  
::= { ocInvModEntry 9 }  
ocInvModNotePad OBJECT-TYPE  
SYNTAX DisplayString (SIZE(0..256))  
ACCESS read-only  
STATUS mandatory  
DESCRIPTION  
″Note pad area reserved for the module. This area  
contains information pertaining to the module such as  
service or hardware upgrade information. If the instance  
value is unknown, N/A will be returned.″  
::= { ocInvModEntry 10 }  
-- Chassis related Traps sent by the 8260 ATM agent.  
-- Traps are defined using the conventions in RFC 1215.  
chassisSlotDown TRAP-TYPE  
ENTERPRISE  
DESCRIPTION  
node  
″This trap indicates that a module is down.  
Usually, this trap is sent when the module  
has been removed.  
Sometimes, this trap is sent when management communications  
with this module have been broken. In this case, it may not  
be possible to distinguish between a removed and a failed  
module.″  
::= 102  
chassisSlotUp TRAP-TYPE  
ENTERPRISE  
node  
DESCRIPTION  
″This trap indicates that a module is up.  
Usually, this trap is sent when the module is  
inserted into the hub.  
Sometimes, this trap is sent when management communications  
have been restored to a module where they had previously  
been broken.″  
::= 103  
chassisEnvironment TRAP-TYPE  
ENTERPRISE  
DESCRIPTION  
node  
″A chassisEnvironment trap indicates a change in the  
concentrator′ s environment has occurred. The variables  
supplied indicate what exactly changed.″  
::= 104  
274 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
chassisChange TRAP-TYPE  
ENTERPRISE  
node  
DESCRIPTION  
″A chassisChange trap is used to indicate that a configuration  
change has occurred. The actual variables that changed  
are included in the variables section of the PDU.″  
::= 107  
chassisModuleDown TRAP-TYPE  
ENTERPRISE  
DESCRIPTION  
node  
″A chassisModuleDown trap indicates that management communications  
with a slot has been  
broken. This event usually occurs when a module has been  
physically removed from the concentrator. However, it  
is possible for this event to occur when the particular  
module fails.″  
::= 116  
chassisModuleUp TRAP-TYPE  
ENTERPRISE  
DESCRIPTION  
node  
″A chassisModuleUp trap indicates that management communications  
with a slot has been  
established. This event usually occurs when a module has  
physically been inserted into the concentrator. The  
variable chipModType indicates the module type inserted.″  
::= 117  
END  
Appendix E. IBM ATM Campus Switch Private MIBs 275  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
276 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Appendix F. Special Notices  
This publication is intended to help customers and IBM technical professionals to  
implement ATM Networks using the IBM 8285 ATM Workgroup Switch. The  
information in this publication is not intended as the specification of any  
programming interfaces that are provided by the IBM 8285 ATM Workgroup  
Switch documentations. See the PUBLICATIONS section of the IBM  
Programming Announcement for IBM 8285 ATM Workgroup Switch for more  
information about what publications are considered to be product documentation.  
References in this publication to IBM products, programs or services do not  
imply that IBM intends to make these available in all countries in which IBM  
operates. Any reference to an IBM product, program, or service is not intended  
to state or imply that only IBM′s product, program, or service may be used. Any  
functionally equivalent program that does not infringe any of IBM′s intellectual  
property rights may be used instead of the IBM product, program or service.  
Information in this book was developed in conjunction with use of the equipment  
specified, and is limited in application to those specific hardware and software  
products and levels.  
IBM may have patents or pending patent applications covering subject matter in  
this document. The furnishing of this document does not give you any license to  
these patents. You can send license inquiries, in writing, to the IBM Director of  
Licensing, IBM Corporation, 500 Columbus Avenue, Thornwood, NY 10594 USA.  
Licensees of this program who wish to have information about it for the purpose  
of enabling: (i) the exchange of information between independently created  
programs and other programs (including this one) and (ii) the mutual use of the  
information which has been exchanged, should contact IBM Corporation, Dept.  
600A, Mail Drop 1329, Somers, NY 10589 USA.  
Such information may be available, subject to appropriate terms and conditions,  
including in some cases, payment of a fee.  
The information contained in this document has not been submitted to any  
formal IBM test and is distributed AS IS. The use of this information or the  
implementation of any of these techniques is a customer responsibility and  
depends on the customer′s ability to evaluate and integrate them into the  
customer′s operational environment. While each item may have been reviewed  
by IBM for accuracy in a specific situation, there is no guarantee that the same  
or similar results will be obtained elsewhere. Customers attempting to adapt  
these techniques to their own environments do so at their own risk.  
Any performance data contained in this document was determined in a  
controlled environment, and therefore, the results that may be obtained in other  
operating environments may vary significantly. Users of this document should  
verify the applicable data for their specific environment.  
The following terms are trademarks of the International Business Machines  
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries:  
AIX  
IBM  
LANStreamer  
Nways  
NetView  
OS/2  
Copyright IBM Corp. 1996  
277  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
PROFS  
TURBOWAYS  
SystemView  
400  
The following terms are trademarks of other companies:  
C-bus is a trademark of Corollary, Inc.  
PC Direct is a trademark of Ziff Communications Company and is  
used by IBM Corporation under license.  
UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other  
countries licensed exclusively through X/Open Company Limited.  
Microsoft, Windows, and the Windows 95 logo  
are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.  
ObjectStore is a trademark of Object Design Inc.  
Java and HotJava are trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc.  
Other trademarks are trademarks of their respective companies.  
278 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Appendix G. Related Publications  
The publications listed in this section are considered particularly suitable for a  
more detailed discussion of the topics covered in this redbook.  
G.1 International Technical Support Organization Publications  
For information on ordering these ITSO publications see “How To Get ITSO  
Redbooks” on page 281.  
•
ATM Campus Introduction, Planning, and Troubleshooting Overview,  
GA27-4089  
•
Campus ATM Design Guidelines, SG24-5002  
•
Local Area Network Concepts and Products: Adapters, Hubs and ATM,  
SG24-4754  
•
IBM 8260 As a Campus ATM Switch, SG24-5003  
•
Local Area Network Concepts and Products: LAN Architecture, SG24-4753  
•
Campus ATM Network Management Guideline, SG24-5006  
G.2 Redbooks on CD-ROMs  
Redbooks are also available on CD-ROMs. Order a subscription and receive  
updates 2-4 times a year at significant savings.  
CD-ROM Title  
Subscription  
Number  
Collection Kit  
Number  
System/390 Redbooks Collection  
SBOF-7201  
SBOF-7370  
SBOF-7240  
SBOF-7270  
SBOF-7230  
SBOF-7205  
SBOF-7290  
SBOF-7250  
SK2T-2177  
SK2T-6022  
SK2T-8038  
SK2T-2849  
SK2T-8040  
SK2T-8041  
SK2T-8037  
SK2T-8042  
Networking and Systems Management Redbooks Collection  
Transaction Processing and Data Management Redbook  
AS/400 Redbooks Collection  
RS/6000 Redbooks Collection (HTML, BkMgr)  
RS/6000 Redbooks Collection (PostScript)  
Application Development Redbooks Collection  
Personal Systems Redbooks Collection  
G.3 Other Publications  
These publications are also relevant as further information sources:  
•
IBM 8250/8260/8285 Planning and Site Preparation Guide, GA33-0285  
•
IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch Installation and User′s Guide,  
SA33-0381  
•
IBM 8285 Nways ATM Workgroup Switch SAFETY and SERVICE Catalog,  
SA33-0398  
•
ATM 4-Port 100 Mbps Module Installation and User′s Guide, SA33-0324  
•
Nways 8260 ATM 155 Mbps Flexible Concentration Module Installation and  
User′s Guide, SA33-0358  
•
Nways 8260 ATM TR/Ethernet LAN Bridge Module Installation and User′s  
Guide SA33-0361  
Copyright IBM Corp. 1996  
279  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
•
•
IBM 8260/8285 ATM WAN Module Installation and User′s Guide, SA33-0396  
8260/8285 ATM 25 MBps Concentration Module Installation and User′s Guide,  
SA33-0383  
280 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
How To Get ITSO Redbooks  
This section explains how both customers and IBM employees can find out about ITSO redbooks, CD-ROMs,  
workshops, and residencies. A form for ordering books and CD-ROMs is also provided.  
This information was current at the time of publication, but is continually subject to change. The latest  
information may be found at URL http://www.redbooks.ibm.com.  
How IBM Employees Can Get ITSO Redbooks  
Employees may request ITSO deliverables (redbooks, BookManager BOOKs, and CD-ROMs) and information about  
redbooks, workshops, and residencies in the following ways:  
•
PUBORDER — to order hardcopies in United States  
•
GOPHER link to the Internet - type GOPHER.WTSCPOK.ITSO.IBM.COM  
•
Tools disks  
To get LIST3820s of redbooks, type one of the following commands:  
TOOLS SENDTO EHONE4 TOOLS2 REDPRINT GET SG24xxxx PACKAGE  
TOOLS SENDTO CANVM2 TOOLS REDPRINT GET SG24xxxx PACKAGE (Canadian users only)  
To get lists of redbooks:  
TOOLS SENDTO WTSCPOK TOOLS REDBOOKS GET REDBOOKS CATALOG  
TOOLS SENDTO USDIST MKTTOOLS MKTTOOLS GET ITSOCAT TXT  
TOOLS SENDTO USDIST MKTTOOLS MKTTOOLS GET LISTSERV PACKAGE  
To register for information on workshops, residencies, and redbooks:  
TOOLS SENDTO WTSCPOK TOOLS ZDISK GET ITSOREGI 1996  
For a list of product area specialists in the ITSO:  
TOOLS SENDTO WTSCPOK TOOLS ZDISK GET ORGCARD PACKAGE  
•
Redbooks Home Page on the World Wide Web  
http://w3.itso.ibm.com/redbooks  
•
IBM Direct Publications Catalog on the World Wide Web  
http://www.elink.ibmlink.ibm.com/pbl/pbl  
IBM employees may obtain LIST3820s of redbooks from this page.  
•
REDBOOKS category on INEWS  
•
Online — send orders to: USIB6FPL at IBMMAIL or DKIBMBSH at IBMMAIL  
•
Internet Listserver  
With an Internet E-mail address, anyone can subscribe to an IBM Announcement Listserver. To initiate the  
service, send an E-mail note to [email protected] with the keyword subscribe in the body of  
the note (leave the subject line blank). A category form and detailed instructions will be sent to you.  
Copyright IBM Corp. 1996  
281  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
How Customers Can Get ITSO Redbooks  
Customers may request ITSO deliverables (redbooks, BookManager BOOKs, and CD-ROMs) and information about  
redbooks, workshops, and residencies in the following ways:  
•
Online Orders (Do not send credit card information over the Internet) — send orders to:  
IBMMAIL  
Internet  
In United States:  
In Canada:  
usib6fpl at ibmmail  
caibmbkz at ibmmail  
dkibmbsh at ibmmail  
[email protected]  
[email protected]  
[email protected]  
Outside North America:  
•
Telephone orders  
United States (toll free)  
Canada (toll free)  
1-800-879-2755  
1-800-IBM-4YOU  
Outside North America  
(long distance charges apply)  
(+45) 4810-1020 - German  
(+45) 4810-1620 - Italian  
(+45) 4810-1320 - Danish  
(+45) 4810-1420 - Dutch  
(+45) 4810-1540 - English  
(+45) 4810-1670 - Finnish  
(+45) 4810-1220 - French  
(+45) 4810-1270 - Norwegian  
(+45) 4810-1120 - Spanish  
(+45) 4810-1170 - Swedish  
•
Mail Orders — send orders to:  
IBM Publications  
Publications Customer Support  
P.O. Box 29570  
IBM Publications  
144-4th Avenue, S.W.  
Calgary, Alberta T2P 3N5  
Canada  
IBM Direct Services  
Sortemosevej 21  
DK-3450 Allerød  
Denmark  
Raleigh, NC 27626-0570  
USA  
•
•
Fax — send orders to:  
United States (toll free)  
Canada  
1-800-445-9269  
1-403-267-4455  
Outside North America  
(+45) 48 14 2207  
(long distance charge)  
1-800-IBM-4FAX (United States) or (+1) 415 855 43 29 (Outside USA) — ask for:  
Index # 4421 Abstracts of new redbooks  
Index # 4422 IBM redbooks  
Index # 4420 Redbooks for last six months  
•
•
Direct Services - send note to [email protected]  
On the World Wide Web  
Redbooks Home Page  
http://www.redbooks.ibm.com  
IBM Direct Publications Catalog  
http://www.elink.ibmlink.ibm.com/pbl/pbl  
•
Internet Listserver  
With an Internet E-mail address, anyone can subscribe to an IBM Announcement Listserver. To initiate the  
service, send an E-mail note to [email protected] with the keyword subscribe in the body of  
the note (leave the subject line blank).  
282 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
IBM Redbook Order Form  
Please send me the following:  
Title  
Order Number  
Quantity  
• Please put me on the mailing list for updated versions of the IBM Redbook Catalog.  
First name  
Company  
Address  
Last name  
City  
Postal code  
Country  
Telephone number  
Telefax number  
VAT number  
•
•
Invoice to customer number  
Credit card number  
Credit card expiration date  
Card issued to  
Signature  
We accept American Express, Diners, Eurocard, Master Card, and Visa. Payment by credit card not  
available in all countries. Signature mandatory for credit card payment.  
DO NOT SEND CREDIT CARD INFORMATION OVER THE INTERNET.  
How To Get ITSO Redbooks 283  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
284 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Glossary  
A
B
AAL  
(ATM Adaptation Layer). The layer that  
Broadcast. A value of the service attribute  
“communication configuration”, which denotes  
unidirectional distribution to all users.  
adapts user data to/from the ATM network by  
adding/removing headers and  
segmenting/reassembling the data into/from cells.  
BCM (Broadcast Manager). An IBM extension to  
LAN Emulation designed to limit the effects of  
broadcast frames  
AAL-5 (ATM adaptation Layer 5). One of several  
standard AALs, AAL-5 was designed for data  
communications and is used by LAN Emulation and  
classical IP.  
BUS (Broadcast and Unknown Server). A LAN  
emulation Service component responsible for the  
delivery of multicast and unknown unicast frames.  
ABR (Available Bit Rate). ATM Forum Service  
category in relation to traffic Management on ATM  
networks. Use bandwidth available in the running  
network after other traffic utilizing guaranteed  
bandwidth services has been serviced.  
C
cell header. ATM layer protocol control information.  
ARP  
(Address Resolution Protocol). IP ARP  
CBR (Constant Bit Rate). ATM Forum Service  
category in relation to traffic Management on ATM  
networks. Includes anything where a continuous  
stream of bits at a predefined constant rate is  
transported through the network.  
translate network addresses into hardware addresses,  
LE ARP translates LAN destinations into ATM  
addresses.  
asynchronous. Any two events that are not tied  
together exactly in time are said to be asynchronous.  
cell loss priority. A control descriptor in each ATM  
cell header which indicates the relative importance of  
the cell. If set to zero it should not be discarded, if  
set to one it may be discarded.  
ATM (asynchronous transfer mode). A transfer  
mode in which the information is organized into cells.  
It is asynchronous in the sense that the recurrence of  
cells containing information from an individual user is  
not necessarily periodic.  
CIP (Classical IP). An IETF standard for  
ATM-attached devices to communicate using IP.  
ATM layer. The layer in the protocol model which  
relays cells from one connection to another.  
CIPC (Classical IP Client). A classical IP component  
that represents users of the classical IP Subnet.  
ATM peer-to-peer connection. A virtual channel  
connection (VCC) or a virtual path connection (VPC).  
CAC (connection admission control). The set of  
actions taken by the network at the call setup phase  
(or during call re-negotiation phase) in order to  
establish whether a virtual channel/virtual path  
connection can be accepted or rejected (or a request  
for re-allocation can be accommodated). Routing is  
part of connection admission control actions.  
ATM user-to-user connection. An association  
established at the ATM layer to support  
communication between two or more ATM service  
users (that is, between two or more next higher layer  
entities or between two or more ATM entities). The  
communication over an ATM layer connection may be  
either bidirectional or unidirectional. The same  
virtual channel identifier (VCI) is used for both  
directions of a connection at an interface.  
congestion control. The set of actions taken to  
relieve congestion by limiting its spread and duration.  
connection oriented. Communication where there is  
a connection provided between sender and receiver,  
which must be maintained for data to be transferred.  
ATM layer link. A section of an ATM layer connection  
between two active ATM layer entities (ATM entities).  
connectionless service. A service which allows the  
transfer of information between service users without  
the need for end-to-end call establishment  
procedures.  
ATM link. A virtual path link (VPL) or a virtual  
channel link (VCL).  
constant bit rate service. A type of  
telecommunication service characterized by a service  
bit rate specified by a constant value.  
Copyright IBM Corp. 1996  
285  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
E
J
ELAN (Emulated Local Area Network). A LAN  
JPEG  
(Joint Picture Experts Group). A Standard  
segment implemented with IBM Technology.  
body defining image compression methods.  
ESI (End System Identifier). A - byte component of  
L
an ATM address.  
LANE or LE  
(LAN emulation). The service provided  
F
by an ATM network to allow it to emulate a  
conventional LAN. Permits existing LAN based  
applications to communicate over ATM without any  
change being required.  
FC LANE (Forum Compliant LAN Emulation). ATM  
Forum compliance rules.  
FPGA (Field Programmable field array). Module on  
LEC (LAN Emulation Client). A LAN emulation  
which logic functions can be programmed.  
component that represent users of the emulated LAN.  
LECS (LAN Emulation Configuration Server). A LAN  
emulation service component the centralize and  
disseminates configuration data as LES address.  
I
IBUS (Intelligent Broadcast Unknown Server).  
A
LAN Emulation optimization designed to limit the  
scope of unknown unicast frames sent to the BUS  
LES (LAN Emulation Server). A LAN emulation  
service component that resolves LAN destinations to  
ATM addresses.  
ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol).  
A
protocol for communicating control information over  
IP.  
LIS (Logical IP Subnet). An IP subnet implemented  
with ATM technology.  
IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronic  
Engineers). An organization involved in establishing  
Local Area Network standards.  
LLC (Logical Link Control). The top sublayer of the  
Data Link layer, which is layer 2 of the ISO model.  
IETF (Internet Engineering task force). An  
organization that product Internet Specifications  
M
MAC (Medium Access Control). The bottom  
sublayer of the data link layer, which is layer 2 of the  
ISO model.  
Interim Local Management Interface (ILMI). The  
standard (part of the UNI specification) for  
management of ATM networks. ILMI uses the SNMP  
protocol and a special UNI MIB to provide full  
information on the ATM network.  
MIB (Management Information Base). A network  
management base supporting the monitoring and  
control of network elements.  
IP (Internet Protocol). A widely-use network layer  
protocol specified by the IETF.  
MPEG (Motion Picture Experts Group). A Standard  
body defining compression techniques for motion  
pictures such as MPEG-1 and MPEG-2 NTSC.  
IPX (Internet Packet exchange). A network layer  
protocol that is frequently used by personal computer  
systems.  
MSS (Multiprotocol Switched Services).  
A
component of IBM′s Switched Virtual Networking  
(SVN) framework.  
ISO (International Standard Organization). An  
organization that specifies International  
Communication Standards  
MTU  
(Maximum Transmission Unit). The maximum  
amount of user data that can be transmitted as a  
single unit (frame) on a communication link.  
isochronous. Literally “in the same time”. An  
isochronous bit stream is one that goes at a constant  
rate. The term isochronous is often used colloquially  
to mean “digitally encoded voice”. The term is not  
often used in the world of data communications but is  
a common term in the voice communications and  
engineering context.  
multicast. Operation where a message is sent  
simultaneously to a number of stations. Similar to  
broadcast, in principle, but usually only to a subset of  
the total number of stations on a network.  
multipoint-to-point connection. A multipoint-to-point  
connection consists of a simple tree topology  
considered as a root node connected to many leaves.  
A multipoint-to-point connection has zero bandwidth  
286 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
from the root node to the leaf nodes and a non-zero  
return bandwidth from the leaf nodes to the root  
node.  
point-to-multipoint connection. A point-to-multipoint  
connection is a collection of associated ATM VC or VP  
links and associated endpoint nodes, with the  
following properties:  
multipoint-to-multipoint connection.  
A
1. One ATM link, called the root link, serves as the  
root in a simple tree topology. When the root  
node sends information, all of the remaining  
nodes on the connection, called leaf nodes,  
receive copies of the information.  
multipoint-to-multipoint is a collection of ATM VC or  
VP links and their associated endpoint nodes. Any  
information sent on the connection by a node is  
received by all of the other nodes. A receiving  
endpoint node cannot distinguish which other  
endpoint sent the information unless some higher  
layer information is present for the purpose.  
2. Each of the leaf nodes on the connection can send  
information directly to the root node. The root  
node cannot distinguish which leaf node is  
sending the information without additional (higher  
layer) information.  
N
3. Leaf nodes cannot communicate directly with  
each other.  
network node interface. The interface between two  
ATM switches.  
ATM Forum Phase 1 signaling does not support traffic  
sent from a leaf to the root.  
NTSC (National Television Standard Committee).  
Video resolution: 525 rows x 700 vertical lines, 29.97  
frames per second, transmitted as {fields/frame. Used  
in US, Japan,parts of South Africa.  
point-to-point connection. A connection that has only  
two end points.  
port. (1) An access point for data entry or exit. (2) A  
connector on a device to which cables for other  
devices such as display stations and printers are  
attached. Synonymous with socket.  
O
OSPF (Open Shortest Path first). A link-state  
routing protocol specified by the IETF. Link-state  
routing protocols scale better than vector-distance  
routing protocol as RIP.  
private network to network interface. The interface  
between two switches, or between a switch and a  
switching subsystem. Also known as the private  
network to node interface.  
P
protocol. (1) A set of semantic and syntactic rules  
that determines the behavior of functional units in  
achieving communication. (2) In SNA, the meanings  
of and the sequencing rules for requests and  
responses used for managing the network,  
packet. In data communication, a sequence of binary  
digits, including data and control signals, that is  
transmitted and switched as a composite whole.  
Synonymous with data frame.  
In ATM, “An information block identified by a label at  
layer 3 of the OSI reference model.”  
transferring data, and synchronizing the states of  
network components. (3) A specification for the  
format and relative timing of information exchanged  
between communicating parties.  
PAL (Phase Alternation by Phase). Video  
resolution:625 rows x 700 vertical lines, 25 frames per  
second.  
protocol data unit (PDU). A unit of data specified in a  
layer protocol and consisting of protocol control  
information and layer user data.  
Standard used in most the world.  
PCMCIA (Personal Computer Memory Card  
International Association). An association involved in  
establishing hardware standards that are often  
associated with miniaturized peripherals.  
R
RIP (Routing Information Protocol).  
A
vector-distance routing protocol.Versions of RIP are  
used with IP and IPX.  
PVC  
(Permanent Virtual Circuit). A logical  
connection between end stations, defined through  
administrator configuration, that is established at all  
times that the network is operational.  
S
physical layer. In the Open Systems Interconnection  
reference model, the layer that provides the  
mechanical, electrical, functional, and procedural  
means to establish, maintain, and release physical  
connections over the transmission medium.  
SAP (Service Advertising Protocol). An IPX protocol  
used to advertise the location of available services.  
SECAM (Sequentielles Couleurs Avec Memoire).  
Video resolution: 625 rows X 700 lines, 25 frames per  
second.  
Glossary 287  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Standard used in France and Russia.  
T
SDU (Service Data Unit). Data as it appears at the  
interface between a layer and the layer immediately  
above.  
TB (Transparent bridging). A bridging protocol for  
LANs specified in the IEEE 802.1d Standard.  
TLV (Type/length/value). A generalized information  
element that may be present in certain LAN emulation  
packets.  
segment. A single ATM link or group of  
interconnected ATM links of an ATM connection.  
signaling virtual channel. A virtual channel for  
transporting signaling information.  
telephone twisted pair. One or more twisted pairs of  
copper wire in the unshielded voice-grade cable  
commonly used to connect a telephone to its wall  
jack. Also referred to as “unshielded twisted pair”  
SLIP (Serial Line IP). An IETF Standard for running  
IP over serial line communication links.  
SNA (System Network Architecture). A networking  
architecture developed by IBM currently used for  
large systems.  
U
UBR (Unspecified Bit Rate). ATM Forum Service  
category in relation to traffic Management on ATM  
networks. The UBR service is for ″best effort″ delivery  
of data.  
SNAP (SubNetwork Attachment Point). An LLC  
header extension that identifies the protocol type of a  
frame.  
UTP (unshielded twisted pair). See telephone  
twisted pair.  
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol). An  
IETF Standard protocol that uses MIBs to control and  
monitor network elements.  
UNI (User to Network Interface). The connection  
that links a user device to an ATM switch, hence  
attaches it to the ATM network.  
SR (Source Routing). A bridging protocol for  
Token-Ring LANs.  
SRT (Source Routing Transparent). A bridging  
protocol for LANs specified in the IEEE 802.1d  
Standard. SRT bridges support both source-route and  
transparent bridging on the same port.  
V
VC (Virtual Channel). A concept used to describe  
unidirectional transport of ATM cells associated by a  
common unique identifier value.  
SR-TB (Source Route Transparent Bridge). A bridge  
that connect SR and SRT ports  
VCC (Virtual Channel Connection). A concatenation  
of virtual channel links that extends between two  
points where the adaptation layer is accessed.  
Sublayer. A logical sub-division of a layer.  
switched connection. A connection established by  
signaling.  
VCI (Virtual Channel Identifier). The VPI/VCI pair  
uniquely identify a specific ATM connection on a  
given link.  
SVC (switched virtual circuit). A logical (not  
physical) connection established between two ATM  
stations on demand using signalling.  
virtual channel link. A means of unidirectional  
transport of ATM cells between a point where a  
virtual channel identifier value is assigned and the  
point where that value is translated or removed.  
SVN (Switched Virtual Networking). The name of  
IBM′s framework for building and managing  
switch-based networks.  
VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network). A logical  
collection of ATM stations grouped into a single  
synchronous. Literally “locked together”. When two  
bit streams are said to be synchronous it is meant  
that they are controlled by the same clock and are in  
the same phase.  
domain, and independent of physical location.  
A
VLAN is often based on end stations having common  
access to a LAN emulation server or Classical IP ARP  
server.  
VP (Virtual Path). A concept used to describe the  
unidirectional transport of ATM cells belonging to  
virtual channels that are associated by a common  
identifier value.  
virtual path connection. A concatenation of virtual  
path links that extends between the point where the  
288 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
virtual channel identifier values are assigned and the  
point where those values are translated or removed.  
assigned and the point where the VPI value is  
translated or removed.  
VPI (Virtual Path Identifier). The VPI/VCI pair  
uniquely identify a specific ATM connection on a  
given link.  
virtual path switch. A network element that connects  
VPLs. It translates VPI (not VCI) values and is  
directed by control plane functions. It relays the cells  
of the VP.  
virtual path link. The group of virtual channel links,  
identified by a common value of the virtual path  
identifier, between the point where the VPI value is  
virtual path terminator. A system that unbundles the  
VCs of a VP for independent processing of each VC.  
Glossary 289  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
290 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
List of Abbreviations  
AAL  
ATM adaptation layer  
available bit rate  
EFCI  
Explicit Forward Congestion  
Control  
ABR  
ELID  
EMC  
ETSI  
emulated LAN identifier  
A-CPSW  
AIX  
ATM control point and switch  
electromagnetic compatibility  
advanced interactive  
executive  
European Telecommunication  
Standards Institute  
APPN  
advanced peer-to-peer  
networking  
FCS  
frame check sequence  
ARE  
all routes explorer  
FDDI  
fiber distributed data  
interface  
ARP  
address resolution protocol  
FPGA  
field programmable gate  
array  
ASCII  
American (National) Standard  
Code for Information  
Interchange  
FTP  
file transfer protocol  
gigabits per second  
ATM  
AUI  
asynchronous transfer mode  
attachment unit interface  
Broadband ISDN  
Gbps  
GFC  
HDLC  
HDTV  
HEC  
IBM  
generic flow control  
B-ISDN  
BOOTP  
Bps  
high-level data link control  
high-definition tele-video  
header error check  
boot protocol (IP)  
bytes per second  
bps  
bits per second  
International Business  
Machines Corporation  
BRI  
basic rate interface  
IEEE  
IETF  
IISP  
Institute of Electrical and  
Electronics Engineers  
BUS  
broadcast and unknown  
server  
Internet Engineering Task  
Force  
CAC  
CAD  
CAP  
CBR  
CCITT  
call admission control  
common ATM datamover  
common ATM processor  
constant bit rate  
interim inter-switch signaling  
protocol  
ILMI  
INARP  
interim local management  
interface  
Comite Consultatif  
International Telegraphique  
et Telephonique  
inverse address resolution  
protocol  
(International Telegraph and  
Telephone Consultative  
Committee) now ITU-T  
IP  
internet protocol  
IPX  
Internetwork Packet  
eXchange  
CE  
circuit emulation  
classical IP  
ISA  
industry standard  
architecture  
CIP  
CLP  
CPCS  
cell loss priority  
ISDN  
ISO  
integrated services digital  
network  
common part convergence  
sublayer  
International Organization for  
Standardization  
CRC  
cyclic redundancy check  
CSMA/CD  
carrier sense multiple access  
with collision detection  
ITSO  
ITU-T  
International Technical  
Support Organization  
DAAT  
destination address  
association table  
International  
Telecommunication Union -  
Telecommunication  
DE  
discard eligibility  
KB  
kilobyte  
DXI  
ECC  
data exchange interface  
error correction code  
Kbps  
LAA  
kilobits per second  
locally administered address  
Copyright IBM Corp. 1996  
291  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
LAN  
LE  
local area network  
PDH  
plesiochronous digital  
hierarchy  
LAN emulation  
PDU  
PG  
protocol data unit  
peer group  
LEC  
LECS  
LES  
LIS  
LAN emulation client  
LAN emulation client/server  
LAN emulation server  
logical IP subnetwork  
logical link control  
PGI  
peer group identifier  
peer group leader  
product independent module  
PGL  
PIM  
PNNI  
LLC  
LNNI  
private network node  
interface  
LAN emulation network node  
interface  
PSM  
PT  
product specific module  
payload type  
LPDU  
logical link control protocol  
data unit  
LSU  
link state update  
PTSP  
PVC  
PVP  
QoS  
RB  
PNNI topology state packet  
permanent virtual circuit  
permanent virtual path  
quality of service  
LUNI  
LAN emulation  
user-to-network interface  
MAC  
MAT  
medium access control  
mamangement application  
transporter  
reserved bandwidth  
RIP  
routing information protocol  
MB  
megabytes  
RISC  
reduced instruction set  
computer/cycles  
Mbps  
MIB  
megabits per second  
management information  
base  
RMON  
SAAL  
remote monitor  
signaling ATM adaptation  
layer  
MPOA  
MSS  
multiprotocol over ATM  
Multiprotocol Switched  
Services  
SAAT  
source address association  
table  
MTU  
maximum transmission unit  
SAP  
SAR  
SDH  
SDLC  
SDU  
SFE  
service access point  
NBBS  
Networking BroadBand  
Services  
segmentation and reassembly  
synchronous digital hierarchy  
synchronous data link control  
service data unit  
NDIS  
network driver interface  
specification  
NetBIOS  
network basic input/output  
system  
specific front end  
NIX  
NNI  
network information exchange  
SNA  
Systems Network  
Architecture  
network-to-network interface  
network node interface  
SNAP  
SNMP  
subnetwork access protocol  
NSAP  
NRB  
OC-n  
ODI  
network service access point  
non reserved bandwidth  
optical carrier level n  
open data-link interface  
originator identifier  
simple network management  
protocol  
SONET  
SRB  
synchronous optical network  
single route broadcast  
SRF  
specifically routed frame  
OID  
SSCOP  
service-specific  
connection-oriented protocol  
OSI  
open systems interconnection  
open shortest path first  
personal computer  
OSPF  
PC  
SSCS  
service-specific convergence  
sublayer  
PCR  
PCI  
Peak Cell Rate  
SSI  
switch to switch interface  
synchronous transfer mode  
shielded twisted pair  
peripheral component  
interconnect  
STM  
STP  
SVC  
PCM  
pulse code modulation  
switched virtual circuit  
292 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
SVN  
TA  
switched virtual networking  
terminal adapter  
UNI  
user-to-network interface  
user node interface  
UTP  
VBR  
VC  
unshielded twisted pair  
variable bit rate  
TAXI  
transparent asynchronous  
transmitter-receiver interface  
TCP  
transmission control protocol  
virtual circuit (X.25)  
virtual connection (Frame  
Relay)  
TCP/IP  
Transmission Control  
Protocol/Internet Protocol  
virtual channel (ATM)  
TDM  
TE  
time division multiplexing  
terminal equipment  
VCC  
virtual circuit connection  
(X.25)  
virtual channel connection  
(ATM)  
TFTP  
TRS  
TP  
trivial file transfer protocol  
topology and route selection  
twisted pair (Wiring)  
VCI  
virtual channel identifier  
virtual LAN  
VLAN  
VP  
UAA  
universally administered  
address  
virtual path  
VPC  
VPCI  
virtual path connection  
UBR  
UDP  
UFC  
ULEC  
unspecified bit rate  
virtual path connection  
identifier  
user datagram protocol  
universal feature card  
VPI  
virtual path identifier  
wide area network  
unknown LAN emulation  
client  
WAN  
List of Abbreviations 293  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
294 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Index  
8285 Console  
Numerics  
access mode 173  
command list 172, 176  
functions 105, 107  
normal mode 106  
password 173, 174  
setup 106, 107, 171  
SLIP mode 107  
100 Mbps MIC/SC Fiber Module, 4-Port  
features 46  
power requirements 94  
redundant links 47  
sample scenario, access node 47  
sample scenario, workgroup 46  
155 Mbps LAN Concentration Module, 3-Port  
features 42  
8285 Control Point  
capacity 31, 82  
I/O cards 42  
CIP  
overview 42  
capacity 88  
power requirements 94  
redundant links 41, 45  
reserved bandwidth 43  
sample scenario, access node 45  
155 Mbps Media Module, 2-Port  
features 42  
functions 10, 19, 28, 30, 31  
LEC 104  
capacity 88  
LES/BUS 104  
capacity 33, 88, 99  
functions 33  
I/O cards 42  
levels 29, 102  
overview 42  
power requirements 94  
redundant links 41  
MIB browsing 189  
switching capacity 97  
variable VPI/VCI 31, 81, 102  
8285 Customization  
ATM address 131, 137  
LEC 137  
reserved bandwidth 43  
sample scenario, workgroup 44  
25 Mbps UTP Concentrator Module, 12-Port  
features 38  
ELAN name 133, 143  
Ethernet type 133, 143  
IP parameters 133, 143  
LES/LECS ATM address 134  
MAC address 134  
maximum SDU size 143  
LECS  
overview 38  
power requirements 94  
sample scenario, access node 41  
sample scenario, low-cost networking 40  
sample scenario, workgroup 39  
VPC/VCC modes 36  
8260 Multiprotocol Switching Hub 22  
8285 Base Unit 10  
LECS ATM address 135  
LES/BUS 137  
155 Mbps ATM I/O Card 13  
bandwidth capacity 99  
CAP/CAD  
capacity 97  
functions 19  
connectors 12, 13  
ELAN name 133, 143  
ELAN type 132  
Ethernet type 132, 143  
maximum number of LECs 132  
maximum SDU size 133, 143  
server ID 132  
environmental specifications 92  
front panel 11  
PVC 83  
PVP 85  
latency 97  
LEDs 12, 13  
mechanical specifications 93  
Model 00P 40  
8285 Expansion Unit 13  
backplane capacity 36  
bandwidth capacity 99  
CAP/CAD  
ports 12  
capacity 97  
power supply 93  
functions 19  
power supply, future 93  
reset button 13  
shipping group 91  
connectors 15  
environmental specifications 92  
front panel 14  
switching capacity 97  
switching fabric 22  
latency 97  
LEDs 15  
functions 24  
mechanical specifications 93  
internal cell 22, 33  
Copyright IBM Corp. 1996  
295  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
8285 Expansion Unit (continued)  
physical installation 105, 109  
power budget 94  
Bridge Module, 4-Port TR/Ethernet (continued)  
Microcode considerations (continued)  
Operational Software Versions 184  
Recovering from Corrupted FLASH code 185  
Sources of Microcode 184  
power supply 93  
power supply, future 93  
shipping group 92  
slots 15  
switching capacity 97  
switching fabric 22  
functions 25  
power requirements 94  
sample scenario, LAN-ATM campus bridging 60  
sample scenario, LAN-ATM server bridging 59  
sample scenario, LAN-LAN server bridging 59  
Troubleshooting 62, 192, 193  
internal cell 22, 33  
C
A
Cabling  
abbreviations 291  
acronyms 291  
console cables 186  
Classical IP  
ATM address 131  
ARP Server  
Asynchronous Transfer Mode  
addressing  
connection setup  
connection tear-down  
connections  
6
data flows  
overview  
6
2
6
4
Commands  
5
SET PVC 53  
2
initial registration  
ATM WAN I/O cards  
power requirements 94  
ATM WAN Module, 2-Port  
features 67  
4
G
glossary 285  
I
power requirements 94  
supported ATM interfaces 67  
supported I/O cards 67  
used with VDM 56  
IBM MSS Server Module  
IISP 101, 104  
5
implementation constraints 42  
Interfaces, supported ATM  
ATM 25.6 Mbps  
Available Bit Rate (ABR)  
25 Mbps UTP Concentrator Module, 12-Port support  
for 38  
on 25 Mbps UTP Concentrator Module,  
12-Port 38  
DS3  
on ATM WAN module 67  
E3  
B
bibliography 279  
on ATM WAN module 67  
OC-3c  
Bridge Module, 4-Port TR/Ethernet  
as a proxy LEC 61  
on ATM WAN module 67  
SONET  
implementation constraints 42  
on LAN switch ATM UFC 76  
STM-1  
Configuration considerations  
Configuration Program  
connectivity requirements 64  
functions 62  
Installation 185  
on ATM WAN module 67  
TAXI, 100 Mbps  
installation process 63  
overview 62  
on 4-port module 46  
running 63  
with OS/2 Japan 190  
General considerations  
association between IP and MAC address 62  
features 57  
L
LAN Emulation  
and the Bridge Module 61  
filters 57, 192  
overview  
signalling  
5
migrating to Release 2 191  
OS/2 device driver levels 191  
problems with older adapter code 191  
SNMP access 58  
5
LAN Emulation, ATM Forum-Compliant  
ATM address 131  
LEC 104, 131, 133  
interfaces 58  
Microcode considerations  
8285 software level 191  
functions  
on the LAN switch ATM UFC 76  
5
296 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
LAN Emulation, ATM Forum-Compliant (continued)  
LECS 104, 135  
Nways Campus Manager ATM for AIX (continued)  
ATM change management 151, 163, 165  
ATM connection tracking 151, 163  
ATM fault management 150, 162, 163  
ATM network monitoring 151, 165  
ATM network topology management 150, 156,  
157, 158  
functions  
6
WKA 135  
LES/BUS 33, 99, 104, 131, 132  
functions  
5
with Bridge Module 57  
LAN Emulation, IBM  
ATM resource configuration 150, 161, 163, 165  
ATM statistics management 151  
ATM view 160  
with Bridge Module 57  
hardware requirements 154  
LAN Emulation Management 152, 166  
MAT 149  
M
MIB  
AtoMIB 145  
PSM 149, 152, 163  
IBM extensions 147, 195  
ILMI MIB 146  
software requirements 155  
submap 156, 157, 158  
MIB-II 145  
OSPF MIB 146  
Microcode considerations  
Sources of Microcode  
for the ATM Bridge Module 184  
Modems  
Nways Campus Manager ATM for HP-UX 148  
Nways Manager for Windows 148, 167, 168  
hardware requirements 170  
PSM 168  
software requirements 170  
connecting to an ATM Bridge Module 192  
Modules, 8285  
P
backplane capacity 36  
common attributes 36  
currently available 35  
not supported 94  
power budget for 94  
variable VPC/VCC ranges 36  
MPEG-2  
PAL 48  
S
SSI 38, 42, 43, 46  
capacity 101  
Switching Modules, LAN and ATM/LAN  
8271 Ethernet Switch Module  
′Plug-and-Play′ capabilities 75  
bandwidth aggregation 75  
features 74  
audio compression 51  
components supported 48  
frame types 50  
fundamentals 48  
multiplexing 49  
ports on VDM 48  
versus M-JPEG 49, 51  
video data rates 48  
sample scenario, Ethernet congestion relief 79  
statistics gathered 75  
UFCs: 74  
8272 Token-Ring Switch Module  
′Plug-and-Play′ capabilities 73  
bandwidth aggregation 73  
features 72  
N
Network Management  
ATM Bridge Module and 191  
Nways Campus Manager  
ATM Bridge Module and 191  
NNI 38, 42, 46  
maximum frame size 74  
sample scenario, token-ring migration 77  
source route bridging 73  
source route switching 73  
statistics gathered 73  
UFCs 72  
capacity 101  
NTSC 48  
ATM UFC  
Nways Campus Manager ATM for AIX 148, 149, 152  
8285 Call Logging 165  
8285 Configuration 161  
8285 Device 163  
features 76  
limitations 76  
common features 71  
filters 72  
8285 Download 165  
8285 Fault 162  
8285 Monitor 165  
limitations 76  
management interfaces 76  
port mirroring 72  
8285 Network Monitoring 165  
8285 Profile 160  
switching modes 72  
virtual switch capabilities 72  
8285 SLIP Configuration 165  
Index 297  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
T
TCP/IP  
SLIP setup 186  
SLIP, using  
UART considerations 186  
with bridge module 63  
with Chameleon TCP/IP 188  
with DOS TCP/IP 187  
with modem connections 192  
with OS/2 TCP/IP V2.0 188  
with OS/2 TCP/IP V3.0 189  
Topology and Routing Services  
Troubleshooting  
5
ATM parameters 141  
ELAN name 143  
Ethernet type 143  
IP network number 143  
LANE registration 141  
LANE registration sequence 143  
maxiumum SDU size 143  
physical connection 139  
TRS  
capacity 101  
U
UNI 38, 42, 43, 46, 57, 58, 67, 104  
ABR 32, 89  
limitations  
atmufc.performance 76  
management interfaces  
5x08ih1.source route switching 77  
V
Variable  
Video Distribution Module, 8-Port  
configuration process 52  
features 48  
power requirements 94  
sample scenario, campus video distribution 55  
sample scenario, enterprise ATM interconnect 70  
sample scenario, enterprise video distribution 56  
sample scenario, workgroup 54  
standards supported 48  
video resolutions 48  
VPD considerations 68  
VPC/VCCs  
298 ATM Workgroup Solutions: Implementing the 8285 ATM Switch  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IBM  
This soft copy for use by IBM employees only.  
Printed in U.S.A.  
SG24-4817-00  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Grundig Radio GUADAB08IP User Manual
Haier Dishwasher DW9 AFE ME User Manual
Haier Flat Panel Television HL26ATB User Manual
Hamilton Beach Coffeemaker 840142000 User Manual
Harbor Freight Tools Welder 6098 User Manual
Heat Glo LifeStyle Indoor Fireplace LCOR HV IPI User Manual
IBM Personal Computer X3400 M2 User Manual
iHome Clock Radio iBN97 User Manual
Image Hot Tub IMSB73911 User Manual
Impex Home Gym TT 360 User Manual